Office Water Intrusion Repairs IFB #2018-1420 AC Transit TABLE OF CONTENTS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 00 01 10 - …

General Office Water Intrusion Repairs IFB #2018-1420

1600 Franklin Street

Oakland, CA 94612

Invitation for Bid (IFB) #2018-1420

General Office Water

Intrusion Repairs

Architect

Interactive Resources, Inc.

117 Park Place

Richmond, CA 94801

510-236-7435

February 21, 2018

Alameda-Contra Costa County Transit District (District)

https://actrans.sharepoint.com/Purchasing/


AC Transit TABLE OF CONTENTS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 00 01 10 - Page 1 of 3

Section 00 01 10

Table of Contents

Division 00 Bidding and Contracting Requirements Pages

00 01 01 Project Title Page 1

00 01 10 Table of Contents 1

00 01 15 List of Drawing Sheets / Contract Documents 1

00 11 16 Notice Inviting Bids 3

00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 8

00 25 13 Pre-Bid Conference 1

00 31 19 Existing Condition Information 1

00 41 00 Bid Forms 12

00 41 13 Bid Form – Stipulated Sum 1

00 52 13 Agreement Form – Stipulated Sum 2

00 61 13 Contract Bonds 6

00 72 13 General Conditions 69

00 73 00 Supplemental Conditions 1

00 73 16 Insurance Requirements 5

00 73 39 DBE Requirements 1

00 73 43 Prevailing Wages 3

00 73 73 Federal Requirements 19

Division 01 General Requirements

01 10 00 Summary 6

01 21 00 Allowances 3

01 23 00 Alternates 2

01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 5

01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 10

01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 10

01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 14

01 40 00 Quality Requirements 10



01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 6

01 60 00 Product Requirements 6

01 73 00 Execution 10

01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 6

01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 9

01 78 39 Project Record Documents 5

Division 02 Existing Conditions

02 41 19 Selective Demolition 6

Division 03 Concrete

03 01 30 Concrete and CMU Repair 12

03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 12

Division 05 Metals

05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 8

05 31 00 Steel Decking 5

05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 8

Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection

07 14 16 Cold Applied Waterproofing 8

07 16 16 Crystalline Waterproofing Xpex 5

07 18 00 Traffic Coatings 14

07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 9

07 81 00 Applied Fireproofing 7

07 92 00 Joint Sealants 8

Division 08 Openings

08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 9

08 71 00 Door Hardware 11

Division 09 Finishes

09 24 00 Portland Cement Plastering 5

09 91 13 Exterior Painting 8

Division 21 Fire Protection

21 13 13 Wet Pipe Fire Sprinklers 6

Division 22 Plumbing



22 14 23 Storm Drainage Piping and Specialties 3

Division 23 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning

23 05 18 Escutcheons for HVAC Piping 2

23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 6

23 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC 3

23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 4

23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 7

23 31 13 Metal Ducts 8

23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 2

23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators 6

Division 26 Electrical

26 05 00 Electrical Basic Materials and Methods 12

Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security

28 31 11 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System 11

Division 32 Site Improvements

32 14 00 Sand Set Concrete Pavers 5


AC Transit LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 00 01 15 - Page 1 of 2

SECTION 00 01 15

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS / CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

No. Title

Date

T0.1 Cover Sheet 10/6/2017

A0.1 Reference – (E) Path of Travel 10/6/2017

A1.1 Basement & First Floor Plans 10/6/2017

A1.2 P3 & P4 Parking & Second Floor Plans 10/6/2017

A1.3 Third Floor Plan 10/6/2017

A1.3A Enlarged Restroom Plan & Details 10/6/2017

A1.4 Tenth Floor Plan 10/6/2017

A1.5 Penthouse & Roof Floor Plans 10/6/2017

A1.6 Enlarged Ramp Plans & S-Framing Plans 10/6/2017

A8.1 Exterior Details 10/6/2017







A9.1 Ramp Details 10/6/2017

S1.1 Framing Plan 10/6/2017

S1.2 Structural Details 10/6/2017

M0.1 Mechanical Title Sheet 8/15/2017

M1.2 Mechanical P3 & P4 Parking Level Demolition Plan 8/15/2017

M1.6 Mechanical 10th Floor Demolition Plan 8/15/2017


AC Transit LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 00 01 15 - Page 2 of 2

M1.7 Mechanical Roof and Penthouse Demolition Plans 8/15/2017

M2.2 Mechanical P3 & P4 Parking Level and Second Floor Plan 8/15/2017

M2.6 Mechanical 10th Floor Plan 8/15/2017

M2.7 Mechanical Roof and Penthouse Plan 8/15/2017

E0.1 Electrical Title Sheet 8/15/2017

E1.2 P3 & P4 Parking Level and Second Floor Electrical Demolition Plans 8/15/2017

E1.6 Electrical 10th Floor Demolition Plan 8/15/2017

E1.7 Electrical Roof and Penthouse Demolition Plans 8/15/2017

E2.2 Electrical P3 & P4 Parking Level and Second Floor Plan 8/15/2017

E2.7 Electrical Roof, Penthouse, and 10th Floor Plans 8/15/2017

Drawings for Alternate #3

T0.1 Cover Sheet (Add Alternate #3) 10/6/2017

A0.1 Reference – (E) Path of Travel 10/6/2017

A1.2 P3 & P4 Parking & Second Floor Plans 10/6/2017

A1.2A Enlarged Restroom Second Floor Plan 10/6/2017

A1.3A Details 10/6/2017

END OF SECTION 00 01 15


AC Transit NOTICE INVITING BIDS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 00 11 16 - Page 1 of 3

SECTION 00 11 16

NOTICE INVITING BIDS

NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN THAT sealed bids will be received by the Alameda-Contra Costa Transit

District (hereinafter “AC Transit” or the “District”) at 1600 Franklin Street, 6th Floor, Oakland, California

94612, until March 22, 2018 at 1:00pm at which time bids will be publicly opened and read for the following

project:

AC Transit

General Office Water Intrusion Repairs

1600 Franklin Street

Oakland, CA 94612

IFB NO. 2018-1420

The work consists, in general, of furnishing all materials, labor, tools, plants, supplies, equipment,

transportation and superintendence necessary to provide for:

1. Repairs to various areas at the General Office building to prevent water intrusion and repair water

damaged elements, and accessibility upgrades at the second floor bathrooms. Repairs to take place at

various levels including the roof, parking garage ramp, third floor, basement and ground floors.

City of Oakland plan check has been submitted, and the permit fee has been included as an allowance.

Contractor shall take out permit.

Bids shall be submitted on the District’s Bid Forms included in Sections 00 41 00 of the Bid Documents,

plainly endorsed with Bidder's name together with signed acknowledgment of any and all addenda.

Bid Forms shall be securely sealed in a suitable envelope marked with the name and address of the Bidder,

and marked in on the front and back of the envelope, as follows:

AC Transit

Purchasing Office

Attn: Erica Elkington

6th Floor

IFB NO. 2018-1420

General Office Water Intrusion Repairs

(Name and Address of Bidder)

Whether mailed or personally delivered, all bids shall be addressed to AC Transit, Purchasing Office, Attn:

Erica Elkington, 6th Floor, 1600 Franklin St., Oakland, CA 94612.

Each bid must be accompanied by a Bid Guaranty in the form of a Certificate of Deposit, Certified or Cashier’s

Check, or Bidder’s Bond, in an amount equal to at least ten percent (10%) of the Bidder’s Grand Total Bid

Price. The Bid Guaranty will be retained by the District and applied to any and all damages sustained by the

District in the event that the successful Bidder fails or refuses to enter into the Contract awarded to it and to

furnish all required bonds and Certificates of Insurance.



The District intends to award the Contract to the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder based on the Grand

Total Bid Price including all alternates. The alternates will be accepted based on available funding. If no

funding is available no alternates will be accepted. District reserves the right to reject any and all bids and/or

to waive any irregularities or informalities in any bid or in the bidding procedure. The District specifically

reserves the right to not award the Contract after the opening of bids.

Bids will be examined and reported to the District’s Board of Directors within ninety (90) days of the bid

opening. Except as permitted by applicable law, no Bidder may withdraw its bid for a period of ninety (90)

days after the date of bid opening. Each Bidder will be notified of any award of the Contract by the District.

In connection with the performance of the resulting Contract, full compliance with all applicable safety and

health standards and with all applicable laws and regulations concerning Equal Employment Opportunity and

Disadvantaged Business Enterprises will be required.

This project has a 10% SBE utilization goal to which the use of certified SBEs shall be counted towards the

attainment thereof. Evidence of goal attainment must be provided via the District’s List of Subcontractors

form as provided in Division 00 herein. The absence of evidence of goal attainment requires the submittal of

Good Faith Effort (GFE) documentation showing all practicable steps taken to satisfy the SBE goal, including,

but not limited to direct solicitations to SBE firms and/or SBE-focused media; two-way communications

between prime bidder and potential SBE firms, and clear documentation of genuine negotiations between

bidder and potential subcontractor(s) that did not result in a contractual agreement. Lack of evidence of the

SBE goal attainment coupled with a lack of District-determined genuine GFE to satisfy the SBE goal is

grounds for a bid to be deemed non-responsive.

After contract award, all SBE utilization, including, but not limited to prompt-payment adherence, shall be

captured and submitted by the prime contractor and its subcontractors electronically via B2GNow. Contractors

unfamiliar with this program shall be afforded requisite training at no cost to the contractor.

In order to bid and perform public works on this project, all tiers of subcontractors, including trucking/hauling

firms that are subcontracted to perform services, must be registered with the California Department of

Industrial Relations (DIR) pursuant to Senate Bill 854, at the time bids are due and throughout the duration of

the project. Evidence of DIR registration, including that of its subcontractors, must be submitted by the prime

bidder with its bid. No contractor or subcontractor may be listed on a bid proposal for a public works project

(submitted on or after March 1, 2015) unless registered with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant

to Labor Code section 1725.5 [with limited exceptions from this requirement for bid purposes only under

Labor Code section 1771.1(a)].

Bidders and their proposed subcontractors shall hold such licenses as may be required by the laws of the State

of California for the performance of the work specified in the Contract Documents. Bidders bidding as the

prime Contractor shall possess a valid California State License Board Contractor’s B License at the time of

contract award and throughout the contract term. The Contractor will also be required to ensure that all

subcontractors working on this project are holding valid licenses suitable for their trade.

Pursuant to Section 1773 of the Labor Code, the general prevailing wage rates in the county, or counties, in

which the work is to be done have been determined by the Director of the California Department of Industrial

Relations. The prevailing wage rates may be reviewed at the District’s offices.

Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 22300, the successful Bidder may submit certain securities in lieu

of the District withholding retention of payments during the Project.



The General Office Water Intrusion Repairs will consist of a single contract. Prime contractor will be

responsible to perform a minimum of 20% of the work.

The Contractor is responsible for coordinating work with other construction contracts and therefore shall plan

accordingly. See Section 01 10 00, Work Under Other Contracts

Attention is directed to the Bid documents for complete details and bid requirements. Said documents,

including bid forms, bonds, and this IFB, shall be considered as a part of any Contract made pursuant to this

solicitation.

Bid documents will be made available on the District’s website at www.actransit.org and can be downloaded

at no cost.

All questions prior to award of the Contract shall be directed to the attention of Erica Elkington via e-mail at

[email protected]. The deadline for submissions of questions and clarifications concerning the

Contract Documents is March 8, 2018 at 4:00 p.m. Only signed Addenda issued by the Contracts &

Procurement Department is binding.


http://www.actransit.org/

mailto:[email protected]


AC Transit INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 00 21 13 - Page 1 of 8

SECTION 00 21 13

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

A. Information contained in this section is supplemental to or in explanation of information in the

NOTICE INVITING BIDS contained in Section 00 11 16 of the Contract Documents.

1.02 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER’S ESTIMATE

A. If an Estimate of Quantities is given in the Contract Documents, the quantities are approximate

only, being given as a basis for the comparison of bids. The District does not, expressly or by

implication, agree that the actual amount of work will correspond to the estimate. The District

reserves the right to increase or decrease the amount of any class or portion of the work or to omit

portions of the work.

1.03 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE OF WORK

A. The bidder shall examine carefully the Contract Documents and the site of work and shall inform

itself of the conditions relating to the execution of the work. Failure to do so will not relieve the

successful bidder of his obligation to enter into a Contract and complete the work in strict

accordance with the Contract Documents. Conditions relating to the execution of work include the

requirements of federal, state and local laws, statutes and ordinances relative to the execution of

work, including, but not limited to, applicable regulations concerning prevailing wage rates, non-

discrimination in the employment of labor, protection of the public and employee health and safety,

and environmental protection.

B. The submission of a Bid shall be conclusive evidence that the bidder has investigated and is

satisfied as to the conditions to be encountered, the character, quality and scope of work to be

performed, the quantities of materials to be furnished and the requirements of the Contract

Documents.

1.04 EXISTING INFORMATION

A. See Section 00 31 19 Existing Condition Information. The availability or use of information

described in this Section is not intended to be and shall not be construed to relieve the Bidder or

Contractor from properly examining the site and making such additional investigations as it may

elect, or from properly fulfilling all the terms of the Contract Documents.

1.05 EXPLANATIONS/CLARIFICATIONS

A. Any explanation/clarification of the Contract Documents desired by a prospective bidder shall be

requested in writing from the Contracts Specialist so identified in Section 00 11 16, NOTICE

INVITING BIDS, and delivered to the Contracts Specialist no later than 4:00 PM on March 8,

2018. Any change to the Contract Documents will be made by written Addendum that will be

mailed or delivered to each firm receiving a set of the Contract Documents. Upon mailing or

delivery, such Addendum will become a part of Contract Documents and binding on all bidders.

The receipt of the addendum by the bidder shall be acknowledged and so noted in the space


AC Transit INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA Section 002000 – Page 2 of 8

provided on the Bid Form. Only written explanations/clarifications, instructions or changes so

given by the District will be effective. Oral explanations or instructions will not be binding on the

District.

B. The District’s reply to requests for explanations/clarifications received pursuant to the above

instructions will be issued no later than 4:00PM on March 15, 2018.

1.06 REQUEST FOR ALTERNATIVES/APPROVED EQUALS REQUESTS

A. It is understood that specifying a brand name or specific types of components and/or equipment in

these solicitation documents shall not relieve the bidder from its responsibility to furnish the end

product in accordance with the warranty and contractual requirements. The bidder is responsible

for notifying the District of any inappropriate brand names, or types of components and/or

equipment that may be called for in these solicitation documents, and to propose a suitable

substitute for consideration. If the phrase “or approved equal” is inadvertently omitted, it is implied

after any brand name.

B. Unless otherwise specifically provided in the solicitation documents, reference to any equipment,

material, article or patented process by trade name, make, or catalog number shall be regarded as

establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition; and a bidder

may, at its option, use any equipment, material, article, or process which, in the judgment of the

District, is equal to that designated. To do so a bidder shall furnish, at its own expense, all test

results, technical data, and background information required by the District in making the

determination as to whether the proposed equipment, material or article or process, in the judgment

of the District, is equal to that designated.

C. The District shall be the sole judge as to the comparative quality and suitability of alternative

equipment, articles, material or process, and its decision shall be final.

D. Prospective bidders may discuss these Contract Documents with the District's Contracts Specialist

as noted in Section 00 11 16, NOTICE INVITING BIDS. This, however, will not relieve bidders

from the procedure of submitting written documented requests required as follows:

E. Requests for Approved Equals must be received by the District, in writing or sent by fax to the

attention of the Contracts Specialist noted in Section 00 11 16, NOTICE INVITING BIDS, no later

than 4:00 p.m. on March 8, 2018. No such requests will be considered by the District if received

after this date. Any request for an Approved Equal must be fully supported with technical data,

test results or other pertinent information as evidence that the substitute offered is equal to or better

than the requirements of the solicitation documents. In addition, any test requirements in the

Contract Documents that pertain to an item under consideration for Approved Equal must be

submitted with the request for Approved Equal.

F. District’s reply to requests received pursuant to the above instructions will be by March 15, 2018.

PART 2 - BID REQUIREMENTS

2.01 BID FORMS

A. Bids shall be tendered as described herein and on the forms provided in Section 00 41 00, BID

FORMS, and Section 00 41 13 BID FORM: SINGLE STIPULATED SUM of the Contract

Documents.



B. All blank spaces in the BID FORMS must be completed, as required, in ink, preferably black. All

price information shall be shown, clearly legible, in figures, where required. No changes shall be

made in the Bid Forms.

C. The bidder shall sign its bid in the blank space provided therefor. If bidder is the Owner, the bid

shall be signed by the Owner. If bidder is a corporation, the legal name of the corporation and its

State of incorporation shall be set forth and the Bid shall be signed by at least two officers

authorized to sign contracts on behalf of the corporation. If bidder is a partnership, the true name

of the firm shall be set forth, the names and addresses of all partners shall be given and the bid shall

be signed by a partner in the firm authorized to sign contracts on behalf of the partnership. If the

bidder is a joint venture, the Bid shall be signed on behalf of each participating company by officers

or other individuals who have the full and proper authorization to do so. If the Bid is signed by an

agent of the bidder other than an officer of a corporation or a member of a partnership, a notarized

power-of-attorney must be on file with the District prior to opening of bids or must be submitted

with the bid. If requested by the District, the bidder shall promptly submit evidence satisfactory to

the District of the authority of the person signing the Bid.

D. Note that the successful bidder may be required to prepare a Schedule of Values based on the

Schedule of Bid Prices that will provide additional detail which will be used in conjunction with

payment.

2.02 SUBMISSION OF BIDS

A. Bids must be submitted at the prescribed time and location specified in Section 00 11 16, NOTICE

INVITING BIDS. Any submission received after the prescribed time shall be rejected.

B. Any unauthorized conditions or qualifications entered on, or changes made to, the Bid Documents

may render it informal and may cause its rejection.

C. Alterations by erasure or interlineation must be expressly explained or noted in the Bid Forms over

the signature of the Bidder.

D. No telegraphic, telephonic, or facsimile (fax) or other electronically transmitted bids will be

considered.

2.03 BID GUARANTY

A. Each bidder shall furnish and submit with its Bid one of the following forms of bidder’s security,

in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Grand Total Bid Price:

1. Unconditional certified or cashier’s check on a solvent bank payable to the order of

the District

2. A bidder's bond using the form entitled "Bidder's Bond," provided with the bid

documents, which is properly executed by the bidder and the surety and is

accompanied by corporate surety's power of attorney. The surety's signature shall be

notarized and the surety shall be authorized to transact such business in the State of

California and be acceptable to the District. Any condition or limitation placed upon

said check or any alteration of the form of said bond, or imperfection in the execution



thereof, will render it informal and may, at the option of the District, result in the

rejection of the Bid.

B. The bidder’s security shall be given as a guaranty that the bidder will not withdraw its Bid for

ninety (90) calendar days after bid opening, and if awarded the Contract, will execute the required

Contract and bonds within ten (10) days after such Contract has been awarded to it or such

additional time as may be allowed by District. If the bidder fails or refuses to execute the required

Contract and bonds, and provide the required insurance certificates within that time, the money and

proceeds from the bidder’s security shall be applied towards payment of the damage to District on

account of the delay in the execution of the Contract and bonds and the performance of the work

thereunder and the necessity of accepting a higher less desirable bid resulting from such failure or

refusal to execute the Contract and bonds, and provide the required insurance certificates as

required. The bidder’s security shall remain in full force and effect until a written contract is

executed and all the required bonds are executed. The amount of the bidder’s security shall not

constitute a limitation upon the right of the District to recover for the full amount of such damage.

C. Within fifteen (15) calendar days after the recommendation for the award of the Contract, the

District will return the Bid guaranties to bidders except the three (3) lowest bidders who are being

considered in awarding the Contract. Retained Bid guaranties will be held until sixty (60) days

after opening of Bids or until the Contract has been finally executed, whichever occurs first, after

which all Bid guaranties, other than bidder’s security amounts that have been forfeited, will be

returned.

2.04 DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS

A. In accordance with the provisions of the Public Contract Code of the State of California, the bidder

shall designate on the form provided in Section 00 41 00, Bid Forms, each subcontractor who will

perform work, supply materials, or render services for the bidder under this Contract in excess of

one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the total bid submitted. The bidder shall list the portion of the

work that will be done by each subcontractor. If the bidder fails to specify a subcontractor for any

portion of the work, the bidder agrees to perform that portion of the work itself, and represents that

it is qualified to perform that portion of the work itself.

B. Notwithstanding the above paragraph, the winning bidder shall be required to provide names of

all firms at all tiers to the extent practicable to the District’s Contracts Compliance Office in a

manner suitable to the District’s Contracts Compliance Officer in order to ensure accurate reporting

of public expenditures.

2.05 NON-COLLUSION DECLARATION

A. By submitting a bid, the bidder represents and warrants that such bid is genuine and not a sham or

collusive or made in the interest or on the behalf of any person therein named, and that the bidder

has not, directly or indirectly, induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a sham bid, or any

other person, firm, or corporation to refrain from bidding, and that the bidder has not in any manner

sought collusion to secure the bidder an advantage over any other bidder.

B. All Bids shall be accompanied by an executed Non-Collusion Declaration in the form required by

Public Contract Code Section 7106 provided with the bid documents in Section 00 41 00.



2.06 DISQUALIFICATION QUESTIONNAIRE

A. Bidders shall complete and submit, under penalty of perjury, a standard form of questionnaire

inquiring whether such prospective bidder, any officer of such bidder, or any employee of such

bidder who has a proprietary interest in such bidder, has ever been disqualified, removed or

otherwise prevented from bidding on, or completing a federal, state or local government project

because of a violation of law or a safety regulation, and if so, to explain the circumstances.

B. A Bid may be rejected on the basis of a bidder, any officer of such bidder, or any employee of such

bidder who has a proprietary interest in such bidder, having been disqualified, removed or

otherwise prevented from bidding on, or completing a federal, state or local project because of a

violation of law or a safety regulation.

C. All Bids shall be accompanied by an executed Disqualification Questionnaire as required by Public

Contract Code Section 10162, on the form provided in the Bid Forms.

2.07 RESPONSIBILITY OF BIDDERS

A. As a prerequisite to an award of Contract, the District will determine whether the low bidder meets

the definition of a “responsible bidder” as set forth in Public Contract Code Section 1103: “a bidder

who has demonstrated the attribute of trustworthiness, as well as quality, fitness, capacity, and

experience to satisfactorily perform the public works contract.” In making this determination, the

District may consider any information about the bidder, including information submitted with the

Bidder’s Statement of Qualifications (included with the Bid Forms).

2.08 WITHDRAWAL OF BID

A. A Bidder may withdraw a Bid without prejudice, provided a written request is in the hands of the

District not later than the time set for opening bids. The Bid will be set aside prior to the opening

of bids and returned to the Bidder unopened. Withdrawal of a Bid does not prejudice the right of

a bidder to submit a new Bid as long as it is received on or before the due date and time specified

in Section 00 11 16, NOTICE INVITING BIDS. No Bidder may withdraw its bid for a period of

ninety (90) days after the date of opening of the bids.

2.09 PUBLIC OPENING OF BIDS

A. Bids will be opened and read aloud publicly at the date, time and place designated in Section 00 11

16, NOTICE INVITING BIDS. All bidders and their authorized representatives are invited to be

present. Bids will not be made available for public inspection at bid opening in order for the

District to thoroughly review all submittals, but may be reviewed immediately thereafter pursuant

to the California Public Records Act.

PART 3 - REVIEW OF BIDS

3.01 BID REVIEW PROCESS

A. Bids received shall be reviewed to determine the apparent low bidder. The apparent low bidder

will be determined on the basis of the Grand Total Bid Price.



B. In case of discrepancy between lump sum or unit prices and the Grand Total Bid Price, unit prices

shall prevail. Any mathematical errors that appear on the face of the bid will be corrected by the

District and the District will use the mathematically corrected addition.

3.02 REJECTION OF BIDS

A. The District reserves the right to reject any and all bids. Bids may be rejected if they show such

items as: any alteration of form; additions not called for; conditional bids; incomplete bids;

erasures; irregularities which make the bids incomplete, indefinite or ambiguous; no acceptable bid

security; or if the bid is not properly executed.

3.03 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS

A. A Bid may be disqualified on the basis of a bidder, any officer of such bidder, or any employee of

such bidder who has a proprietary interest in such bidder, having been disqualified, removed, or

otherwise prevented from bidding on, or completing, a California or local project because of a


B. A Bid will be deemed nonresponsive and therefore disqualified if the bidder (both prime and

subcontractor(s)) do not have the required licenses outlined in section 00 11 16 Notice Inviting

Bids at the time of bid opening.

C. A Bid may be disqualified on the basis of a bidder, any officer of such bidder, or any employee of

such bidder who has a proprietary interest in such bidder, having been disqualified, removed, or

otherwise prevented from bidding on, or completing, a California or local project because of a


D. More than one Bid from an individual, firm, partnership, corporation or combination thereof under

the same or different names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any

individual, firm, partnership, corporation or combination thereof is interested in more than one

Bidder for the work contemplated may cause the disqualification of all Bids in which such

individual, firm, partnership, corporation or combination thereof is interested.

3.04 RELIEF OF BIDDERS

A. Attention is directed to Public Contract Code sections 5100 to 5107, inclusive, concerning relief of

bidders and in particular to the requirement therein, that if the bidder claims a mistake was made

in the bid presented, the bidder shall give the District written notice within five (5) working days

after the opening of the bid of alleged mistake, specifying in the notice detail how the mistake

occurred.

PART 4 - AWARD AND EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT

4.01 TIME OF AWARD

A. The District shall make its best efforts to maintain the Time of Award schedule stated herein.

However, failure to do so will not affect the District’s rights under this section.

B. Within sixty (60) days after the opening of Bids, the District will use best efforts to reject all Bids

or award the Contract to the lowest responsible, responsive bidder. If the lowest responsible,

responsive bidder refuses or fails to execute the Contract and provide an acceptable Performance



Bond, Payment Bond, and insurance certificate(s), the District may award the Contract to the

second lowest responsible, responsive bidder. District will use best efforts to make such award, if

made, within ninety (90) days after the opening of Bids. If the second lowest responsible,

responsive bidder refuses or fails to execute the Contract and provide an acceptable Performance

Bond, Payment Bond, and insurance certificate(s), the District may award the Contract to the third

lowest responsible, responsive bidder. The District reserves the right to adjust the periods of time

specified above within which an award of Contract may be made and if the ninety (90) day period

for award is insufficient, said period shall be subject to extension for such further period as may be

agreed upon in writing by the District and the bidder or bidders concerned.

4.02 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT

A. The successful bidder shall, within ten (10) calendar days after having received notice that the

Contract has been awarded, sign and deliver to the District a Contract in the form hereto attached

together with the Contract Bonds and insurance certificates as required in the Contract Documents.

After receiving the signed Contract with acceptable bonds and insurance certificates from the

successful bidder, the District will sign the Contract.

B. If the Contractor is an individual, the Contract shall be executed personally by the Contractor. If

the Contractor is a co-partnership, it is desirable that the Contract be executed by all of the partners,

but it may be executed by one of them. If the Contractor is a corporation, it must be executed by

two officers of the corporation consisting of (1) the chairman of the board, president or vice

president; and (2) the secretary, assistant secretary, chief finance officer, treasurer or assistant

treasurer, or by a person authorized by the corporation to execute written contracts on its behalf,

and the corporate seal affixed thereto. In the alternative, a person other than an officer may sign

the Agreement, provided evidence satisfactory to the District is provided indicating the individual’s

authority to bind the corporation. If the corporate seal is not affixed to the Contract, or if it is

executed by a person other than an officer, or only by one officer, there must be attached to the

Contract a certified copy of a resolution of the corporation authorizing such officer or person to

execute written contracts for and on behalf of the corporation. If the Contractor is a joint venture,

the Contract must be executed on behalf of each participating firm by officers or other individuals

who have the full and proper authorization to do so.

4.03 FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONTRACT

A. Failure of a bidder to whom the Contract is awarded to promptly and properly execute the Contract

or furnish acceptable Contract bonds, or certificates of insurance, shall be just cause for the

annulment of the award and the forfeiture of such bidder’s Bid Guaranty.

4.04 NOTICE TO PROCEED

A. After execution of the Contract and submission of Contractor’s performance and payment bonds

and certificate of insurance, District will issue the Notice to Proceed indicating that the Work may

commence on the date indicated. The Notice to Proceed will also identify the District’s Designated

Representative (DDR) for the project. Notice to Proceed will be issued within one hundred twenty

(120) days of Notice to Award, or any longer period agreed upon between the District and

Contractor.



4.05 RELEASE OF INFORMATION

A. Awardee must receive prior permission from the District before releasing any reports, information

or promotional materials prepared in connection with this IFB and subsequent contract award. The

Awardee shall not use the District’s logo or any other proprietary material without the prior written

permission of the District. The awardee shall provide a copy or copies of any such material to the

DDR for first review.

PART 5 - BID PROTEST PROCEDURES

5.01 BID PROTEST PROCEDURES

A. A link to the District’s bid protest procedures is listed below: You may also contact the District’s

assigned Contracts Specialist for a copy thereof.

http://www.actransit.org/wp-content/uploads/board_policies/BP%20354%20-

%20Procurement%20Protest.pdf


http://www.actransit.org/wp-content/uploads/board_policies/BP%20354%20-%20Procurement%20Protest.pdf

http://www.actransit.org/wp-content/uploads/board_policies/BP%20354%20-%20Procurement%20Protest.pdf


AC Transit PRE-BID CONFERENCE February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 00 25 13 - Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 25 13

PRE-BID CONFERENCE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 BACKGROUND

A. The purpose of the Pre-bid conference is to address questions pertaining to the Contract Documents,

to familiarize all Bidders with District’s property and the work site, and to discuss the District’s

safety and other requirements. Attendance at Pre-bid conference is optional but highly

recommended.

1.02 LOCATION AND TIME OF PRE-BID CONFERENCE

A. A pre-bid conference will be held prior to the date of bid opening. The conference will take place

on March 1, 2018, 10:00 a.m., at 1600 Franklin Street, Oakland, CA 94612. Please meet in the

lobby.

B. The Pre-Bid meeting will be immediately followed by a project site walk.

1.03 PLANNED AGENDA

A. The planned agenda for the Pre-bid conference is as follows: registration; introduction of staff and

consultants; overview of project; District’s SBE requirements, Labor Compliance, safety and

quality requirements; District requirements of Contractor equipment and personnel; questions and

answers.



AC Transit EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA Section 00 31 19 – Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 31 19

EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION

A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting

Requirements for Project. They provide District's information for Bidders' convenience and are

intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of the Bidders' own investigations. They are made

available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions.

This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.

B. Existing drawings that include information on existing conditions including previous construction

at Project site are available on line with the advertisement for bid.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 00 21 13 "Instructions to Bidders" for the Bidder's responsibilities for

examination of Project site and existing conditions.



AC Transit BID FORMS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 00 41 00 - Page 1 of 14

SECTION 00 41 00

BID FORMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

A. Bid Forms shall be completed in accordance with the directions herein and the directions indicated in

Section 00 11 16, "Notice Inviting Bids"; Section 00 21 13, "Instructions to Bidders"; Section 00 41 00

and Section 00 41 13, “Bid Form,” of the Contract Documents.

1.02 BID FORMS

A. Due on or before the date of Bid Opening

Each of the following Bid Forms must be completed as part of each Bidder’s bid and shall be submitted

before the specified time and date of the Bid Opening as identified in Section 00 11 16, “Notice Inviting

Bids”, of the Contract Documents.

1. Bid Letter (including acknowledgement of receipt of Addenda)

2. Bidder’s Statement of Qualifications and Business References

3. Prime and Subcontractor Report

4. Contract Compliance Requirements

5. Bidder’s Guaranty: Bidder’s Bond or Irrevocable Standby Letter of Credit

6. Buy America Certification

7. Lobbying Certification for Contracts Grants, Loans and Cooperative Agreements

8. Disclosure of Lobbying Activities (SF-LLL)

9. Bid Form – Stipulated Sum



IFB Bid Letter

Name of Bidder: _________________________________________________________________________

Type of Business: Sole Proprietor Partnership Joint Venture Corporation (Incorporated under the State of ___)

Primary Business Address: ________________________________________________________________

Contact Name: _____________________________________________ Title: ________________________

Email: ____________________________________________________ Phone #: _____________________

Contractor’s License #: _____________________________ License Expiration Date: ________________

License Classification(s):___________________________ DIR Registration #: ____________________

Pursuant to the Notice Inviting Bids, the undersigned bidder herewith submits a bid on the Bid Forms attached hereto and

made a part hereof, and binds itself on award by the under this bid to execute a Contract in accordance with its bid and the

Contract Documents.

The Notice Inviting Bids, Instructions to Bidders, General Requirements, Technical Specifications, Appendices, Contract

Drawings, and Addenda, if any, are made part of this bid and all provisions thereof are hereby accepted, and all

representations and warranties required thereby are hereby affirmed. The undersigned bidder understands that any

clarification made to the above or any new and different conditions or information submitted on or with its Bid Forms, other

than that requested, may render the bid non-responsive.

The undersigned, as bidder, declares that the only persons or parties interested in this bid as principals are those named

herein; that this bid is made without collusion with any other person, firm or corporation and in submitting this bid, that it

has carefully examined the location of the proposed work, the attached proposed form of contract, and the plans,

specifications and the other Contract Documents (collectively the Contract Documents); and agrees if this bid is accepted,

that it will contract with the District, on the form of contract included with these specifications, to provide all necessary

labor, materials, equipment, machinery, apparatus and other means of construction, and to do all the work specified in the

Contract Documents, in the manner and time therein prescribed, and according to the requirements of the District’s

Designated Representative as therein set forth, and that it will accept all full payment therefore based on the item prices set

forth in its Schedule of Bid Prices.

The prices included within the Schedule of Bid Prices include all costs for labor, materials, tools, equipment, services,

subcontractors, suppliers, taxes, insurance, shipment, delivery, overhead, profit and all other costs necessary to perform the

work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

Receipt of _____________________ (list #) Addenda

The Bidder warrants and represents that it has received all Addenda issued by the District in connection with this

solicitation.

https://actrans.sharepoint.com/Purchasing/



Bid Validity

Bid shall remain valid and irrevocable for a period of not less than 180 days from the date of bid opening.

Insurance

The Bidder agrees to comply with the insurance requirements provided in Section 00 73 16: Insurance

Requirements.

Non-Collusion

The Bidder has made this bid independently, without consultation, communication, or agreement for the purpose

of restricting competition as to any matter relating to Invitations for Bid with any other firm or with any other

competitor.

Non-Conflict:

The Bidder covenants that it presently has no interest, direct or indirect, which would conflict in any manner or

degree with the performance of the services called for under this agreement. The Bidder further covenants that

in the performance of this agreement, no person having any such interest shall be employed by the Bidder, and

that the Bidder receives no commissions or other payments from parties other than the District as a result of work

performed.

Equal Employment Opportunity:

The Bidder agrees to comply with the Civil Rights Act, and agrees to have a complaint procedure where violations

of the Act can be reported and appropriately adjudicated. The Bidder agrees to comply with applicable Federal

laws, implementing regulations, and other implementing requirements the FTA may issue. In addition the Bidder

agrees to provide workforce data reports as may be periodically requested by the District.

Debarment, Suspension and Other Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion Lower Tier Covered

Transactions

The Bidder certifies, by submission of this Bid and certification, that neither it nor its principals is presently

debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in

this transaction by any State of California or U.S. Federal department or District.

The undersigned agrees to comply with the above referenced provisions and certifies that all information included in your

bid is, to the best of your knowledge, true, accurate and complete. Furthermore, upon execution of a Contract, to furnish

the District with services and/or goods, in accordance with the terms outlined in this solicitation (including all addenda) and

in the manner and at the prices bid.

Typed name: ______________________________________ Title: ________________________________

Signature: ________________________________________ Date: ________________

Typed name: ______________________________________ Title: ________________________________

Signature: ________________________________________ Date: ________________



BIDDER’S STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS &

BUSINESS REFERENCES

A. Bidder Name: ___________________________________________________________

B. How many years has your organization been in business as a Contractor under your present business name? ________

1. As a general contractor? ___________________

2. As a subcontractor? _______________________

C. 3-Year Annual Gross Receipts

Year: Year: Year:

$ $ $

D. Give information below about all your current and ongoing projects. (Attach additional sheets if necessary.)

Client Location

(city/state) Type of Work Value of Work

Percent

Completed

of Overall

Project

Scheduled

Completion

Date

(Continued on following page)



E. List all key projects your organization has completed similar in nature to the scope of services outlined in this

solicitation during at least the last three (3) years in the following tabulation.

Client Location

(city/state)

Type of Work Value of Work Year

Started

Year

Completed

(Attach additional sheets if necessary.)

F. Give information below about the relevant experience of the principal individuals of your present organization including

those individuals to be in responsible charge of this project. Attach additional sheets if necessary.

Individual's Name

Title

Years of

Professional

Experience

Type of Work




G. References: List Professional references for who your organization has performed work similar in nature to the scope

of services outlined in this solicitation.

Business Name Contact Person Phone Email

(Attach additional sheets if necessary)

H. Have you or your organization, or any officer or partner thereof, failed to complete a contract? No Yes

If yes, please explain below. Attach additional sheets if necessary.

______________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________

I. Is any pending litigation or adverse findings against your organization?

No Yes If yes, please explain below. Attach additional sheets if necessary.

______________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________



Prime Contractor & Subcontractor/Supplier Report

The Bidder is required to furnish the following information in accordance with the provisions of Public Contract Code Sections 4100 to 4113,

inclusive. This list and information shall include the prime contractor and all subcontractors that will perform work, provide labor or render services

to the Bidder in connection with the project in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the total amount of Bidder’s Grand Total

Bid Price.

Prime/Subcontractor/Supplier

Name/Address/Contact Information

Type of Work or

Materials

Dollar Amount

of Work/

Materials

Check if

Applicable DBE/SBE Certifying

Agency

(i.e. State of CA) DBE SBE

Name:

Address:

Contact Person:

Phone:

Email:

License No:

Name:

Address:

Contact Person:

Phone:

Email:

License No:

Name:

Address:

Contact Person:

Phone:

Email:

License No:

Name:

Address:

Contact Person:

Phone:

Email:

License No:

(DO NOT LIST ALTERNATIVE SUBCONTRACTORS FOR THE SAME WORK.

ATTACH ADDITIONAL SHEETS AS NECESSARY)



Contract Compliance Requirements

The Bidder shall certify that it has read and understood the following Contract Compliance requirements (please check all

boxes), and agrees to flow-down such requirements to all of its subcontractors (if any), with the instruction for each

subcontractor to flow it down to each subsequent subcontractor.

California Department of Industrial Relations (DIR) Registration - In order to bid or work on any Public Works

project, at any tier, Bidder must first be registered with the California Department of Industrial Relations (DIR) as

a Public Works Contractor. Note: If awarded a contract or subcontract on a Public Works project, the Contractor

must remain registered with the DIR throughout the duration of the project.

Prevailing Wage - When the Prime Contract exceeds $1,000 ($2,000 for Federally funded contracts), Contractors

are required to pay employees working on the project the corresponding prevailing wage rate or higher. Prevailing

Wage Rates are applied for each craft/trade employed on the project. Prevailing Wage is determined by DIR, and/or

the Department of Labor (DOL) for Federally funded projects. In instances where a Public Works project contains

both federal and state funding, Contractors must pay covered workers the higher of the two applicable wages.

Certified Payroll - On all Public Works projects, the DIR requires the submission of electronic certified payroll

(eCPRs) documents using their website. If awarded a contract, the requirements to submit eCPRs are outlined on

the DIR website. In addition, if the project has Federal funding, you may also be required to submit eCPRs directly

to the District.

Apprentice Requirements - When the Prime Contract exceeds $30,000, the DIR stipulates that each Contractor

and Subcontractor on the project must hire apprentices at a minimum ratio of one hour for every five hours of

journeyman hours, or 20% by the end of the Contract period. Apprenticeship requirements are applicable only to

apprenticeship trades. At Contract award, the Prime Contractor must (1) submit Contract award data to an

authorized apprenticeship program prior to the commencement of work, (2) request dispatch of Division of

Apprenticeship Standards (DAS) apprentices as required, and (3) employ DAS-registered apprentices, including

compliance with minimum ratios of work hours performed by apprentices to journeyman.

Department of Labor Hiring Goals – On Federally funded construction projects, and pursuant to Executive Order

11246, the DOL has established a 25.6% minority and 6.9% female hiring goal. The District will monitor

compliance with these established goals via periodic workforce reports of ethnicity and gender. These goals are

applicable to a Contractor’s entire workforce as opposed to only those assigned to the District’s project. In the event

that either, or neither goal is satisfied, the District may require the submittal of good faith effort documentation

from Contractors showing steps that were, and are taken to satisfy the goals. This process is subject to review by

the U.S. DOL.




Contract Goals & Monitoring

B2G - The District currently utilizes a Contract monitoring tool called B2GNow. This is an interactive tool, i.e.,

utilized jointly by the District, Prime and Subcontractors to ensure compliance with Contract specific utilization

goals, if any (DBE, SBE, SLBE), prompt payment and insurance requirements. Unless the District’s Contracts

Compliance Department determines otherwise, Contractors of all tiers are required to utilize this tool upon Contract

award, and Contractors unfamiliar with the program can obtain training at no additional cost to themselves.

The undersigned agrees to comply with the above referenced provisions regarding Contract Compliance (please check all

boxes above):

Typed name: _______________________________ Title: ______________________________________________

Signature: ___________________________________ Date: ____________________________



Bidder’s Bond

KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS:

That _______________________________________, as Principal, and _________________________, as Surety, are held

and firmly bound unto the Alameda-Contra Costa Transit District, hereinafter called District, in the sum of

($) , being at least ten percent (10%) of the total amount of the bid, for the payment of which sum in

lawful money of the United States of America to District we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors

and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

The condition of the above obligation is such that, whereas the Principal has submitted said bid to District;

NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal is awarded a Contract by District and, within the time and in the manner required by

the Specifications, enters into a written Contract with District and furnishes the requisite bond or bonds and insurance

certificates, then this obligation shall become null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect.

In the event suit is brought upon this bond by District and judgment is recovered, the Surety shall pay all costs incurred by

District in such suit, including a reasonable attorney’s fee to be fixed by the Court.

Dated _____________________, 20__.

To be considered complete, both the Principle and the Surety must sign the Bidder’s Bond. In addition, the Surety’s

signature must be notarized and a copy of the Surety’s Power of Attorney must be attached.

Principle Typed name: ________________________________________________________________

Principle Signature: ________________________________________ Date: ________________

Surety Typed name: _________________________________________________________________

Surety Signature: _________________________________________ Date: _________________

Address of Surety: ___________________________________________________________________

END OF BIDDERS BOND



Irrevocable Standby Letter of Credit (if applicable)

Date: __________________

To: AC Transit, Procurement & Materials Dept.

1600 Franklin Street, 6th Floor

Oakland, California 94612

Re: Irrevocable Standby Letter of Credit No. _______________

Procurement and Materials Director:

We hereby issue in your favor of the Alameda-Contra Costa Transit District (District) this Irrevocable Standby Letter of

Credit for the account of __________________________________________________ a

_______________________________________(indicate nature of organization, whether sole proprietorship, partnership,

corporation), in the amount of $ ____________________________________, which is available upon your demand when

accompanied by a signed statement from an officer of the District, stating that:

The amount drafted is due to the District because of the failure of _________ to enter into a written Contract awarded to it

by District, or to furnish the requisite bond(s) and insurance certificates within the time and in the manner required by the

Contract Documents and Specifications.

We hereby agree with the drawers and/or bona fide holders that drafts drawn and negotiated in conformity with the terms

of this Letter of Credit will be duly honored upon presentation when presented on or before _____________________.

Partial drawings are permitted.

Except so far as otherwise expressly stated, this credit is subject to the Uniform Customs and Practice for Documentary

Credits (1993 Revision) of the International Chamber of Commerce Publication No. 500.

Sincerely,

Financial Institution name: ________________________________________________________________

Typed Name: ________________________________________ Title: ____________________________

Signature: _________________________________________________ Date: _______________________

END OF IRREVOCABLE STANDBY LETTER OF CREDIT



Buy America Certificate

(Steel, Iron or Manufactured Products)

For Federally funded construction contracts with a combined labor and materials value equal to or greater than

$150,000, all steel, iron, or manufactured products must be of American origin. This requirement is applicable to

individual contracts at all tiers (i.e., between the District and Prime Contractor; Prime and Subcontractor, etc.)

Splitting up contracts for the purpose of circumventing the $150,000 threshold is strictly prohibited and does not

preclude the District from combining the value of individual contracts of similar purchases in order to implement Buy

America provisions. The District reserves the right to perform Buy America audits at its sole discretion, and require

the replacement of non-complying material at no additional cost to the District.

REVIEW AND COMPLETE ONLY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CERTIFICATIONS:

A. Certificate of Compliance with U.S. Code Title 49, Section 5323(j)(1)

The Bidder hereby certifies that it will meet the requirements of U.S. Code, Title 49, Section 5323(j)(1) and the

applicable regulations in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 661.

Firm Name

Signature of Authorized Official

Name and Title of Authorized Official

Date

B. Certificate of Non-Compliance with U.S. Code Title 49, Section 5323(j)(1)

The Bidder hereby certifies that it cannot comply with the requirements of U.S. Code, Title 49, Section 5323(j)(1),

but it may qualify for an exception pursuant to U.S. Code, Title 49, Section 5323(j)(2)(B) or (j)(2)(D) and the

regulations in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 661.7.

Firm Name

Signature of Authorized Official

Name and Title of Authorized Official

Date

END OF BUY AMERICA CERTIFICATION



Certification Regarding Lobbying

Bidders shall certify that it will not and has not used Federal appropriated funds to pay any person or organization for

influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a member of Congress, officer or employee of

Congress, or an employee of a member of Congress in connection with obtaining any Federal contract, grant or any other

award covered by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Bidders shall also disclose the name of any registrant under the Lobbying Disclosure

Act of 1995 who has made lobbying contacts on its behalf with non-Federal funds with respect to that Federal contract,

grant or award covered by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Such disclosures shall be forwarded to the District. Bidders shall ensure that

all of its Subcontractors included in their bid shall certify the same.

Please choose one:

No, Bidder has not participated in lobbying activities as outlined above

Yes, Bidder has participated in lobbying activities as outlined above

If yes –and complete the Disclosure of Lobbying Activities form on the following page

Name of Bidder: __________________________________________________________

Person Completing Form: _____________________________________________________

Title: ______________________________________________________________________

Signature: ____________________________________________________ Date: _________

Note: Contact the Contracts Specialist assigned to this procurement if you need further instructions on completing the

form below.



Attachment D (Continued):

Certification Regarding Lobbying


DISCLOSURE OF LOBBYING ACTIVITIES (Complete this form to disclose lobbying activities pursuant to 31

U.S.C. 1352)

1. Type of Federal Action:

contract

grant

cooperative agreement

loan

loan guarantee

loan insurance

2. Status of Federal Action:

bid/offer/application

initial award

post-award

3. Report Type:

initial filing

material change

For Material Change Only:

Year _______ Quarter _______

Date of last report:

4. Name and Address of Reporting Entity:

Prime Sub-awardee

Tier, if known:

____________________________________

Congressional District, if known: _____________________

5. If Reporting Entity in No. 4 is Sub-awardee,

Enter Name and Address of Prime: ________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________

Congressional District, if known: ____________

6. Federal Department/Agency:

7. Federal Program Name/Description:

CFDA Number, if applicable:

8. Federal Action Number, if known: 9. Award Amount, if known: $__________

10a. Name and Address of Lobbying Entity:

(if individual, last name, first name, MI):

10b. Individuals Performing Services (including address

if different from No. 10a):

(Attach Continuation Sheet(s), if necessary)

11. Amount of Payment (check all that apply):

$_________ actual planned 13. Type of Payment (check all that apply):

retainer

one-time fee

commission

contingent fee

deferred

other (specify:__________________)

12. Form of Payment (check all that apply):

cash

in-kind; specify:

nature

value

14. Brief Description of Services Performed or to be Performed and Date(s) of Service, including officer(s), employee(s),

or Member(s) contacted, for Payment indicated in Item 11:

15. Information requested through this form is authorized

by title 31 U.S.C. section 1352. This disclosure of lobbying

activities is a material representation of fact upon which

reference was placed by the user above when this

transaction was made or entered into. This disclosure is

required pursuant to 31 U.S.C. 1352. This information will

be reported to the Congress semi-annually and will be

available for public inspection. Any person who fails to file

the required disclosure shall be subject to a civil penalty of

not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each

failure.

Signature: __________________________________

Print Name: ___________

Title:_______________________________________

Telephone #: ______________________________

Date: ____________


AC Transit BID FORM – STIPULATED SUM February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 00 41 13 - Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 41 13

BID FORM - STIPULATED SUM (SINGLE-PRIME CONTRACT)

DESCRIPTION TOTAL PRICE

(Bid price must be

inclusive of all costs)

BASE BID PRICE: Work for General Office Water Intrusion Repairs

$

ALTERNATE #1: Ramp & Garage – Replace Failing Ramp $

ALTERNATE #2: 10th Floor – Mechanical Room Demolition $

ALTERNATE #3: Second Floor Bathroom Accessibility Upgrades $

ALLOWANCE #1: Unforeseen Conditions (To include but not be limited to: Hazardous Materials, Code

Conflicts, Testing and Special Inspections, etc.)

$25,000.00

ALLOWANCE #2: Building Permits

$40,000.00

ALLOWANCE #3: Furniture

$15,000.00

ALLOWANCE #4: Office Alterations

(Provide carpentry, mechanical and electrical alterations) $25,000.00

GRAND TOTAL (Base Bid plus Alternates & Allowances) $

Prices shall reflect all costs for the construction project, including bonds, taxes, permits, insurance, freight,

disposal and recycle fees, etc.

BIDDER NAME: DATE:

_______________________________________________ _________________________

NAME/TITLE OF PERSON COMPLETING FORM:

_____________________________________________________________________________________



AC Transit AGREEMENT FORM – STIPULATED SUM February 21, 2018

Oakland, CA Section 00 52 13 – Page 1 of 2

Contract Offer and Acceptance Form

THIS CONTRACT is made and entered into this day of A p r i l 2018, by and between ALAMEDA‐CONTRA COSTA TRANSIT DISTRICT (hereinafter “District”), a special transit district established

pursuant to California Public Utilities Code, Section 24501 et seq., and __________________., a California

corporation (hereinafter “Contractor”).

THE PARTIES AGREE AS FOLLOWS:

1. SCOPE OF SERVICES

Contractor shall provide water intrusion repairs in full accordance with Invitation for Bid

No. 2018-1420 prepared and issued by the District entitled General Office Water Intrusion

Repairs.

The undersigned hereby agrees to furnish the material, service, or construction in compliance with all

terms, conditions, specifications, and addenda in the above referenced solicitation. The Contractor

shall begin construction within thirty (30) days’ timeframe of the effective date of Notice to Proceed,

and shall be substantially complete with all work under the Contract Documents within six (6) months

of the effective date of the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor shall begin work as of the effective date

of the Notice to Proceed, and shall diligently prosecute all of the work under this Contract in all parts

and requirements as defined in the Contract Documents.

The Contractor is hereby cautioned not to perform any work or provide any service under this Contract

until valid certificates of insurance, a current and valid copy of your firm’s contractor’s license with

the California Contractors State License Board, a payment bond and performance bond are received

and accepted by the District, if applicable, and a purchase order is issued for the material, service, or

construction described herein. Any work initiated prior to a Notice to Proceed and the submission of

the documents referenced above shall be performed solely at Contractor’s risk.

2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

This Contract shall include the following documents:

Division 00 – IFB # 2018-1420

Addenda 1 - X

Division 01 – General Requirements

Technical Specifications: Divisions XX, XX, XX, XX

Drawing Sheets

Contractor’s Bid

3. CONTRACT PRICE

The Contractor shall faithfully perform all of the work hereunder for the Bid Price accepted by the

District, $________________________, payable by the District to the Contractor at the time and in

the manner provided in the Contract Documents.


AC Transit AGREEMENT FORM – STIPULATED SUM February 21, 2018

Oakland, CA Section 00 52 13 – Page 2 of 2

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Contract on the dates set forth below.

ALAMEDA‐CONTRA COSTA CONTRACTOR NAME:

TRANSIT DISTRICT:

________________________________ ________________________________

Michael Hursh Date Signature Date

General Manager

_____________________________

Printed Name / Title

Approved as to Form and Content:

________________________________

Denise C. Standridge Date

General Counsel



AC Transit CONTRACT BONDS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA Section 00 61 13 – Page 1 of 6

SECTION 00 61 13

CONTRACT BONDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. The Bidder to whom the Contract is awarded shall furnish the following Contract Bonds:

1. Performance Bond, in an amount not less than 100% of the Grand Total Bid Price, to

secure faithful performance of the Contract, including, but not limited to, the warranty

obligations following acceptance of the work by District.

2. Payment Bond, in an amount not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the Grand

Total Bid Price, to secure payment of all claims of laborers, mechanics, or

materialmen, subcontractors or other persons named in Civil Code Section 3181 for

costs of materials, equipment, supplies, and labor furnished in the course of the

performance of the Contract.

Contract Bonds shall be on the forms bound herewith and shall be executed as surety by a

corporation authorized to issue surety bonds in the State of California, with a financial

condition and record of service satisfactory to the District.

B. All alterations, extensions of time, extra and additional work and other changes authorized by the

Contract Documents may be made without securing the consent of the surety or sureties on the

Contract Bonds.



PERFORMANCE BOND

KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that WHEREAS THE ALAMEDA-CONTRA COSTA

TRANSIT DISTRICT (hereinafter referred to as the “District”) has entered into a Contract with

_______________________________________ (hereinafter referred to as “Principal”) for General Office

Water Intrusion Repair, Contract 2018-1420, (the “Contract”); and

WHEREAS said Principal is required under the terms of said Contract to furnish a bond of faithful

performance of said Contract,

NOW, THEREFORE, we, the undersigned Principal, and _________________________, as Surety, are

held and firmly bound unto the District, in the sum of _________________________________________

Dollars ($ ) lawful money of the United States, to be paid to the District or its

successors and assigns; for which payment, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators,

successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the above-bound Principal, or its heirs,

executors, administrators, successors, or assigns approved by the District, shall promptly and faithfully

perform the covenants, conditions and agreements in the Contract during the original term and any

extensions thereof as may be granted by the District, with or without notice to Surety, and during the period

of any guarantees or warranties required under the Contract, and shall also promptly and faithfully perform

all the covenants, conditions, and agreements of any alteration of the Contract made as therein provided,

notice of which alterations to Surety being hereby waived, on Principal’s part to be kept and performed at

the time and in the manner therein specified, and in all respects according to their true intent and meaning,

and shall indemnify, defend, protect, and hold harmless the District as stipulated in the Contract, then this

obligation shall become and be null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect.

No extension of time, change, alteration, modification, or addition to the Contract, or of the work required

thereunder, shall release or exonerate Surety on this bond or in any way affect the obligation of this bond;

and Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension of time, change, alteration, modification, or

addition.

Whenever Principal shall be and declared by the District to be in default under the Contract, Surety shall

promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly do one of the following at the District’s election:

1. Undertake through its agents or independent Contractors, reasonably acceptable to the

District, to complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions and to pay

and perform all obligations of Principal under the Contract, including without limitation,

all obligations with respect to warranties, guarantees, and the payment of liquidated

damages.

2. Reimburse the District for all costs the District incurs in completing the Contract, and in

correcting, repairing or replacing any defects in materials or workmanship and/or materials

and workmanship which do not conform to the specifications in the Contract.

Surety’s obligations hereunder are independent of the obligations of any other surety for the performance

of the Contract, and suit may be brought against Surety and such other sureties, jointly and severally, or

against any one or more of them, or against less than all of them without impairing the District’s rights

against the others.

No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other than the

District Transit or its successors or assigns.



In the event suit is brought upon this bond by the District, Surety shall pay reasonable attorney’s fees and

costs incurred by the District in such suit.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-bound parties have executed this instrument under their seals this

______ day of ____________, 20__, the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto

affixed and these presents duly executed by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its

governing body.





Address of Surety: ___________________________________________________________________



PAYMENT BOND

KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that _______________________ called the

PRINCIPAL, and ______________________________a corporation duly organized under the laws of the

State of _________, having its principal place of business at _____________________________ in the

State of ________________, and authorized to do business in the State of California, hereinafter called the

SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto the Alameda Contra Costa Transit District Authority (the

District), hereinafter called the OBLIGEE, or order in the sum of

____________________________($ .00) lawful money of the United States, for the payment of

which, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors,

jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT:

WHEREAS, the PRINCIPAL has entered into a Contract with the OBLIGEE for the General Office Water

Intrusion Repairs, Contract 2018-1420, and said PRINCIPAL is required under the terms of said Contract

to furnish a bond securing payment of claims to which reference is made in Section 3248 of the Civil Code.

NOW, THEREFORE, if said PRINCIPAL or any of its subcontractors fails to pay any of the persons named

in Section 3181 of the Civil Code, or amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect

to work or labor performed under the Contract, or any amounts required to be deducted, withheld and paid

over to the Employment Development Department from the wages of employees of the Contractor and his

subcontractors pursuant to Section 13020 of the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to such work

and labor, the SURETY, will pay for the same, in an amount not exceeding the sum specified in this bond,

and also will pay, in case suit is brought upon this bond, a reasonable attorney's fee, to be fixed by the court.

This bond will inure to the benefit of any of the persons named in Section 3181 of the Civil Code so as to

give a right of action to such persons or their assigns in any suit brought upon this bond.

This bond is given to comply with Sections 3247 and 3248 of the Civil Code. The liability of the

PRINCIPAL and SURETY hereunder is governed by the provisions of said Code, all acts amendatory

thereof, and all other statutes referred to therein, including Section 3225 of the Civil Code.

SURETY, for value received, hereby agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the

terms of the Contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or to the Contract Documents

accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice

of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the work or

to the other portions of the Contract Documents.



IN WITNESS WHEREOF the above-bounded parties have executed this instrument this ________ day of

____________, 20___, the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these

presents duly signed by its undersigned representatives, pursuant to authority of its governing body.

IT IS SO AGREED:





STATE OF CALIFORNIA )

) ss.

CITY AND COUNTY OF )

On __________, 20__ before me, _______________, Notary Public, personally appeared

_______________, personally known to me (or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence) to be

the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that

he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s)

on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the

instrument.

Witness my hand and official seal.

Notary Public

STATE OF CALIFORNIA )

) ss.

CITY AND COUNTY OF )

On __________, 20__ before me, _______________, Notary Public, personally appeared

_______________, personally known to me (or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence) to be

the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that

he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s)

on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the

instrument.

Witness my hand and official seal.

Notary Public



TO BE CONSIDERED COMPLETE, BOTH THE BIDDER AND AN ADMITTED SURETY INSURER

AUTHORIZED BY THE CALIFORNIA INSURANCE COMMISSIONER TO TRANSACT SURETY

BUSINESS IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA MUST SIGN THIS PERFORMANCE BOND. IN

ADDITION, BOTH THE PRINCIPAL’S AND THE SURETY’S SIGNATURES MUST BE

NOTARIZED AND A COPY OF THE SURETY’S POWER OF ATTORNEY MUST BE ATTACHED.



AC Transit GENERAL CONDITIONS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA Section 00 72 13 – Page 1 of 69

SECTION 00 72 13

GENERAL CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS .................................................................................................... 1

1.01 GLOSSARY OF ABBREVIATIONS, TERMS, AND DEFINITIONS

1.02 INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.03 EXAMINATION AND VERIFICATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.04 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

1.05 COORDINATION AND INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.06 PRODUCT REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

PART 2 – DISTRICT .......................................................................................................................... 13

2.01 PERSONAL LIABILITY

2.02 AUTHORITY OF THE DISTRICT AND THE DISTRICT'S DESIGNATED

REPRESENTATIVE

2.03 RIGHTS-OF-WAY

2.04 DISTRICT’S RIGHT TO STOP WORK

PART 3 – CONTRACTOR ................................................................................................................. 15

3.01 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR STATUS

3.02 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES AND SUPERVISION

3.03 LABOR AND MATERIALS

3.04 GUARANTY OF WORK

3.05 PAYMENT OF TAXES

3.06 PERMITS AND LICENSES

3.07 SUPERINTENDENCE BY THE CONTRACTOR

3.08 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK

3.09 DOCUMENTS ON JOB SITE

3.10 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES; SUBSTITUTION

3.11 WORK SITE MAINTENANCE

3.12 ACCESS TO WORK

3.13 INDEMNIFICATION

PART 4 – SUBCONTRACTORS ....................................................................................................... 28

4.01 SUBCONTRACTING

PART 5 - COORDINATION AND ACCESS .................................................................................... 30

5.01 GENERAL

PART 6 - CHANGES IN THE WORK ............................................................................................... 31

6.01 CHANGES

6.02 COST REDUCTION PROPOSALS

PART 7 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION .................................................................................................. 46

7.01 TIMELY NOTICE OF CLAIM

7.02 NOTICE OF POTENTIAL CLAIM

7.03 PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE CLAIM PROCEDURE

PART 8 – TIME .................................................................................................................................. 49

8.01 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS TO THE WORK

8.02 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

PART 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION .................................................................................. 53

9.01 SCOPE OF PAYMENT

9.02 PROGRESS PAYMENTS

9.03 RETENTION ON PROGRESS PAYMENTS

9.04 RELIEF FROM MAINTENANCE AND BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY

9.05 TITLE



9.06 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK

9.07 FINAL PAYMENT AND CLAIMS

9.08 STOP PAYMENT NOTICES

PART 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY .......................................................... 61

10.01 SUBSURFACE EXCAVATIONS, NOTIFICATION

10.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY PLAN

10.03 HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS AND WASTES

10.04 PUBLIC SAFETY

10.05 EMERGENCIES

PART 11 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ................................................................................. 65

11.01 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED

11.02 RIGHTS IN LAND AND IMPROVEMENTS

11.03 ANTITRUST CLAIMS

11.04 THIRD PARTY RIGHTS

11.05 ASSIGNMENT

11.06 RIGHTS TO DRAWINGS, TECHNICAL DATA AND PATENTS

11.07 GRATUITIES AND CONFLICT OF INTEREST

11.08 PROHIBITED INTERESTS

PART 12 - TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT .......................................................................... 68

12.01 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT FOR CAUSE

12.02 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE OF THE DISTRICT



PART 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.01 GLOSSARY OF ABBREVIATIONS, TERMS, AND DEFINITIONS

A. Whenever the following abbreviations and terms, or pronouns in place of them, appear in the

Contract Documents, the intent and meaning shall be interpreted as provided in this Section.

Working titles having a masculine gender, such as "workman" and "flagman" and the pronoun "he,"

are used for the sake of brevity, and are intended to refer to persons of either sex.

B. Abbreviations

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

AL Allowance

Cal-OSHA California Occupational Safety and Health Administration

CALTRANS California Department of Transportation

CPM Critical Path Method

CY Cubic Yard

DOL United States Department of Labor

EA Each

EPA United States Environmental Protection Agency

Est. Estimated

HR Hour

ITE Institute of Transportation Engineers

AC TRANSIT Alameda Contra Costa Transit District

LF Lineal Foot

LS Lump Sum

MUTCD California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices

Misc. Miscellaneous

MO Month

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association

NTP Notice to Proceed

DDR District’s Designated Representative

OSHA United States Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health

Administration and Occupational Safety and Health Act

PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute

QJ Queue Jump

RFC Request for Change

RFI Request for Information

RS Reference Specifications, "Standard Specifications for Public Works

Construction", commonly known as the "Green Book"

SY Square Yard

TSP Transit Signal Priority

UL Underwriters’ Laboratory

C. Definitions and Terms

Acceptance: Documentation attesting to the act of an authorized representative of the District by

which all Work under the Contract, or a specified portion thereof, is identified as having been

completed satisfactorily.



Addenda: Written interpretations or revisions to any of the Contract Documents issued by the

District before the bid opening.

As Approved: The words “as approved”, unless otherwise qualified, shall be understood to be

followed by the words “by the District’s Designated Representative for conformance with the

Contract Documents”.

Architect/Engineer of Record: Professional architect or engineer designated for a

particular project responsible for signing and sealing the permit drawings, interpretation of the

drawings where ambiguities exist, review of requests for information, design change requests and

shop drawings, resolution of errors and omission, and finalization of as-built drawings.

Assessment: A cost imposed on the Contractor for non-compliance with certain contractual

requirements.

As Built Documents or Record Documents: Contract Documents modified to reflect changes

resulting during the construction phase.

As Shown: and As Indicated: The words “as shown” and “as indicated” shall be understood to

be followed by the words “by the Contract Documents” as appropriate.

Beneficial Occupancy: The taking possession of a portion of the Work by the District for its use

and/or occupancy on other than a temporary or emergency basis.

Bidder: Any individual, firm, partnership, corporation or combination thereof, submitting a bid

for the work contemplated, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative.

Bid Forms: The approved forms upon which the District requires that each Bidder submit its bid

with regard to the Contract.

Bid Guaranty: The cashier’s or certified check, irrevocable standby letter of credit, deposit of

securities, or Bidder’s Bond, accompanying the bid submitted by the Bidder, as a guaranty that

the Bidder will enter into an agreement with the District for the performance of the Work, if the

Contract is awarded to him, and the Bidder will submit the required Contract Bonds and

Certificates of Insurance. Also referred to as the

Bidder’s Security.

Board, Board of Directors or Directors: The Board of Directors of the Alameda Contra Costa

Transit District, the District.

California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices: The California Manual on Uniform

Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (California MUTCD) is issued by the

Department of Transportation and is the Federal Highway Administration's MUTCD 2014

Edition, as amended for use in California.

Caltrans: The Department of Transportation, State of California



Change Order: A written order to the Contractor directing an addition, deletion or revision in the

Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time provided in the Contract

Documents and issued after the effective date of the Contract. A Change Order will not become

effective until approved in writing and signed by the District, hereinafter referred to as an

"Approved Change Order." An approved Change Order signed by the Contractor is hereinafter

referred to as an "Executed Change Order."

Common Carrier: Everyone who offers to the public to carry persons, property, or messages,

excepting only telegraphic messages, is a common carrier of whatever he thus offers to carry.

Completion Time: The time the Work shall be completed as specified in the Contract Documents.

Construction Schedule: A list or graphic display of construction activities required for

completing the Work, in a format required by the Contract Documents. The duration, start and

finish date, and sequence of the significant activities, critical path, float and milestones must be

indicated in the Construction Schedule.

Construction Staging Area: Property available for use by the Contractor during the construction

period for the purpose of storing products and construction equipment and coordinating activities

associated with the Work.

Contract: The written agreement covering the performance of the Work and the furnishing of

labor, materials, tools and equipment in the construction of the Work. The Contract is a part of

the Contract Documents and will include all approved change orders issued after the Contract is

executed by the parties.

Contract Documents: Those documents that form the Contract, including, but not limited to, the

Notice Inviting Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Pre-Bid Conference, Bid Forms, Schedule of Bid

Prices, Bidding Addenda, Form of Agreement, Contract Bonds, General Conditions, and

Supplemental Conditions, Technical Specifications, Appendices, Contract Drawings, Addenda,

accepted Bid when attached as an exhibit to the Contract, permits from other agencies, and all

Change Orders issued after the execution of the Contract.

Contract Drawings: The plans identified in the Contract, showing the character, dimensions, and

details of the Work.

Contract Price: The total compensation to be paid to the Contractor in accordance with the terms

of the Contract.

Contract Time: The number of calendar days, or portion thereof, allowed for completion of the

Work, including all authorized time extensions. The effective date for commencement of the

Work specified in the Notice to Proceed shall define the beginning of the Contract Time.

Contractor: The individual, firm, partnership, corporation, joint venture or other legal entity that

has contracted with the District to perform the Work. The term "prime contractor" shall mean

Contractor.

Days: Unless otherwise stated, "days" shall mean calendar days.



District: The Alameda Contra Costa Transit District acting through the District’s Designated

Representative.

District’s Designated Representative(s): The individual(s) or firm(s) designated by the District

to act as the final authority on all contract administration and management issues for the project

on the District’s behalf. The District’s Designated Representative (DDR) will be identified in

the Notice to Proceed for the project, and may be an architect, engineer, construction manager,

or any other consultant or employee of the District’s choosing. The DDR may delegate specific

administrative, technical or management functions to other consultants or District employees at

its discretion.

Emergency: Any sudden generally unforeseen occurrence (such as a fire, flood, storm,

earthquake, epidemic, civil disorder or other natural and/or man-made disaster) that has the

potential to adversely affect the safety of life, the Work, and/or adjacent property; to interrupt

contracts essential to the provision of daily transit service; and/or to cause catastrophic failure of

revenue-producing equipment and/or facilities.

Field Change Notice: A written directive issued by the District to the Contractor ordering a minor

addition, deletion, modification, or revision to the Work.

Force Account: Payment by force account shall mean payment on the basis of the Contractor’s

time and materials.

General Manager: General Manager of the District, the Alameda Contra Costa Transit District.

General Requirements: The provisions of Division 1, as may be amended by the District.

Inspector: A representative of the permitting agency responsible for verification of the

construction activities on site.

Installation, Install: Completely assembling, erecting, and/or connecting materials; parts,

components, supplies, and related equipment specified or required for the completion of the

Work.

Legal Holidays: Those days designated as State holidays by the Government Code or declared

by the Board, or otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.

Limit of Work: Boundary within which the onsite elements of the Work will be performed,

except utility and drainage work in local streets and on private property.

Liquidated Damages: The amount prescribed in the Contract Documents to be paid to the District

or to be deducted from any payment due or to become due the Contractor for each calendar days

delay in completing the Work beyond the time allowed in the Contract Documents.

Local Agencies: Includes the following participating agencies: City of Oakland



Notice of Completion: A document recorded by the District with the County Recorder signifying

completion of a work of improvement.

Notice to Proceed: A written notice given by the District to the Contractor fixing the date on

which the Contract Time will commence to run, and also identifying the DDR for the project.

Notice of Termination: Written notice from the District to the Contractor and its Surety

terminating the Contract, or a portion thereof, either for convenience of the District or for default

due to the Contractor's failure to perform its contractual obligations.

Or Equal: The term "or equal" shall mean that the "equal" product is the same or better than the

product named in function, performance, reliability, quality and general configuration as

approved by the District. The District will make determination of equality in reference to the

project design requirements. Such equivalent products shall not be purchased or installed by the

Contractor without written acknowledgment of the District.

Permitting Agency: Any government agency having jurisdiction over the construction project

and requiring permits of any kind.

Plans: Refer to Contract Drawings.

Product Data: Illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures,

diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate a material, product, or

system for a portion of the Work.

Professional Engineer: An engineer licensed by the Board of Registration for

Professional Engineers, State of California.

Provide: The term “provide” shall be understood to mean “furnish and install, complete and in

place.”

Quality Assurance: The process by which the Contractor and each subcontractor independently

monitors the quality control efforts made in the performance of its own work.

Quality Audit: The process by which the DDR to independently verify quality control measures

are being taken in accordance with applicable requirements.

Quality Control: The process by which the Contractor and each subcontractor measures and

evaluates the work it performs in order to meet the required contractual and statutory quality

standards.

Quality Surveillance: The process by which the DDR observes the Contractor to ensure that

quality control and quality assurance measures are taken by the Contractor and its subcontractors.

Request for Change: A document initiated by the Contractor requesting that a Change Order be

issued.

Request for Information: A document issued by the Contractor requesting information

concerning the Contract Documents.



Salvage: To save any removed item. The salvaged item shall be reused in the contract or

delivered and stockpiled for the District or others as specified in the Contract Documents.

Schedule of Values: The breakdown of the Contract Bid Price that will serve as the basis for

Contractor’s Applications of Payment. Any lump sum item included within the Contract Price

will be apportioned among values relating to specific components of the Work covered by said

lump sum item.

Shop Drawings: Drawings, plans, diagrams, schedules and other data specifically prepared and

submitted to the District by the Contractor, showing in detail: a.) The proposed fabrication and

assembly of a special component of the Work; and b.) The installation (form, fit and attachment

details) of a special component of the Work. Shop Drawings shall be deemed to include Working

Drawings, Product Data, literature, and applicable performance and test data.

Standard Drawings: Drawings for particular construction components which are generic and will

remain the same from project to project.

State: State of California, and its agencies, including Department of Transportation (Caltrans)

Subcontractor: Any individual, firm, partnership, corporation, joint venture, or combination

thereof, other than employees of the Contractor, engaged by the Contractor to furnish services,

labor, equipment and materials for a portion of the Work.

Submittals: Those documents required to be submitted by the Contractor for review by the

District in accordance to the Contract.

Substantial completion: The Work (or designated portion) is sufficiently complete, in accordance

with the Contract Documents, so that the District can safely and conveniently occupy or utilize

the Work (or such designated portion) for the use for which it is intended, and as needed for the

District to conduct its operation.

Supplemental Conditions: Additional requirements that are applicable to the Contract as set forth

in Division 0, Sections 00 73 00 through 00 73 16, as may be amended by District.

Supplier: Any individual, firm, partnership, corporation, joint venture, or combination thereof,

other than employees of the Contractor, that supplies a tangible product as a portion of the Work,

with services usually limited to delivery and/or required testing, and with manufacturing,

fabrication, or production facilities located off the Work site.

Technical Specifications: Technical details, requirements, and descriptions of Work to be

performed under the Contract. The Technical Specifications comprise Divisions 2 through 18 as

applicable of the Contract Documents, as may be amended by District.

Temporary Construction Easement: A portion of land belonging to outside party (ies) on which

agreed-upon activity can take place during the construction period.



Unit Price: The value established for a single item of work or group of items commonly regarded

as a single entity, that is inclusive of all fundamental, direct and incidental costs and exclusive

only of costs associated with any other unit price and any lump sum price.

Work: The sum total of productive and operative efforts used to generate the results specified,

indicated in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents, including the furnishing of all

labor, materials, and equipment.

Work Site: The property on which the Work will be performed, including all staging areas. The

Work Site is defined in Division 1 of the Contract Documents.

Working Drawings: Original drawings prepared by the Contractor and/or its Subcontractors or

Suppliers, of any tier, illustrating Work required for construction that will not become an integral

part of the completed Work. This includes, but is not limited to, drawings for temporary

structures such as decking, bulkheads, excavation supports, utility support, groundwater control,

forming, falsework, access roads, staging areas, and staging plans. A Working Drawing is one

type of Shop Drawing.

1.02 INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if

called for by all. The intent of the Contract Documents is to describe a functionally complete project

to be constructed. When the Contract Documents describe portions of the Work in general terms,

but not in complete detail, it is understood that the best general practice shall be followed and only

materials and workmanship of the best standard quality shall be used. Any Work, materials or

equipment that are customarily provided or that are reasonably inferable from the Contract

Documents, as being required to produce the intended result shall be supplied, whether or not

specifically called for. When words, which have a well-known technical or trade meaning are used

to describe work, materials or equipment, such words shall be interpreted in accordance with that

meaning.

B. Reference to standard specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or

association, or to the laws or regulations of any governmental authority, whether such reference be

specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual, code, laws or

regulations in effect on the first published date of the Notice Inviting Bids, except as may be

otherwise specifically stated. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification,

manual or code (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents)

shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of District or Contractor, or any of their

consultants, agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be

effective to assign to the District, or the DDR, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the

furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary

to the other provisions of the Contract Documents.

C. The Contract Documents are divided into parts, divisions, sections and articles for convenient

organization and reference. Generally, there has been no attempt to divide the specification sections

into work performed by the various building trades, work by separate subcontractors, or work

required for separate facilities in the project.



1.03 EXAMINATION AND VERIFICATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Contractor shall thoroughly examine and become familiar with all of the various parts of the

Contract Documents and shall determine the nature and location of the Work, the general and local

conditions (including applicable laws) and all other matters which can in any way affect the cost,

progress or performance of the Work under this Contract. Failure to make an examination necessary

for this determination shall not release the Contractor from the obligations of the Contract. No oral

agreement or conversation with any officer, or employee of the District, or with the DDR either

before or after the execution of the Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations

contained in the Contract Documents.

1.04 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. The Contract Drawings consist of general drawings and show such plans, elevations, sections, details

and schedules as are necessary to give a graphic and pictorial description of the contemplated

construction. All authorized alterations affecting the requirements and information given on the

Contract Drawings shall be in writing.

1.05 COORDINATION AND INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. In the event of inconsistencies between requirements contained in different components of the

Contract Documents, the precedence of the Contract Documents shall be as follows to resolve the

conflicts.

1. Permits

2. Change Orders

3. The Contract (including amendment(s))

4. The Supplemental Conditions (Sections 00 73 00 through 00 73 16) ET SEQ

5. Division 01

6. The General Conditions

7. The remainder of Division 00 sections

8. The Technical Specifications

9. Contract Drawings

10. Appendices and Standard Drawings

B. In the event of any doubt or question arising concerning the true meaning of the Contract Documents

or should it appear that the Work to be done or any of the matters relative thereto are not sufficiently

detailed or explained in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall submit a Request for

Information (“RFI”) to the District for such further written explanations as may be reasonably

necessary and shall conform to the written explanation given as if part of the Contract Documents.

The decision of the District in such cases shall be final.

C. Contractor shall anticipate that it will be necessary to prepare and submit RFIs regarding the

Contract Documents. The District will respond to each RFI by no later than fourteen (14) days after

receipt of the RFI, unless the RFI is of significant complexity. Furthermore, in the event that there

are numerous RFIs pending, Contractor shall cooperate with District in establishing a priority for

responding to the RFIs, and potentially some RFIs may be responded to beyond the fourteen (14)

day period.



D. Each RFI prepared by Contractor shall be full and complete. Contractor shall prepare RFIs so as to

not cause any delay to the progress of the Work and to not cause any impact to Contractor’s labor

productivity in the field. Contractor shall not assert any claims for delay or interference against

District if Contractor fails to timely submit any RFI to District, after consideration of the response

period allowed for District.

E. The response to an RFI shall not, by itself, constitute a writing that authorizes Contractor to perform

any Work that causes an adjustment to either the Contract Time or Contract Price. If Contractor

believes that any response to any RFI should constitute a compensable change, Contractor shall so

notify District via a Request for Change, as described in Part 6, CHANGES IN THE WORK herein.

Contractor’s failure to provide the required written notice shall constitute a waiver of Contractor’s

right to seek a compensable change based on the RFI response.

F. The Contractor shall examine all Contract Documents; shall verify all figures in the Contract

Documents before laying out the Work; shall promptly notify the District of all errors,

inconsistencies, and/or omissions that it discovers; and, in instances where such non-conformities

are discovered, shall obtain specific instructions in writing from the District before proceeding with

the Work. Contractor’s performance of any Work affected by such non-conformities prior to the

District's decision shall be at the Contractor's risk. Any Work that is customarily provided or that is

reasonably inferable shall not relieve the Contractor from performing such work at no additional

expense and/or delay, and such Work shall be performed as if fully set forth in the Contract

Documents.

1.06 PRODUCT REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. When descriptive catalog designations, including manufacturer's name, product brand name or

model number are referred to in the Contract Documents, such designations shall be considered as

being those found in industry publications in effect as of the first published date of the Notice

Inviting Bids, except as may be otherwise stated.

B. Where references are made to standard specifications (such as RS - standard specifications for Public

Works Construction [the Greenbook], or the State of California, Department of Transportation

[CALTRANS]), the following definitions shall apply:

1. All references to the "City", "County", "State", or "Department" in the context of

Districtship shall mean the District.

2. All references to the "Engineer" in the context of provider of compliance judgment

shall mean the DDR. For those aspects of the construction subject to supervision or

oversight by a Registered Professional Engineer, shall mean a Registered Professional

Engineer retained by the District.

3. All references to the "Agent" shall mean District.

4. All references to the "plan(s)" shall mean the Contract Drawings.

END OF PART 1



PART 2 - DISTRICT

2.01 PERSONAL LIABILITY

A. Neither the District's Board Members, DDR, Officers, Agents, Representatives nor Employees

shall be personally responsible for any liability arising under or by virtue of this Contract.

2.02 AUTHORITY OF THE DISTRICT AND THE DISTRICT'S DESIGNATED

REPRESENTATIVE

A. The District has the final authority in all matters affecting the Work covered by the Contract

Documents.

B. With respect to Contractor’s performance of the Work, the DDR shall have the authority to

enforce compliance with the Contract Documents. In accordance with the Contract Documents,

the Contractor shall promptly comply with all instructions from DDR, and the DDR shall have

the authority to enforce and make effective such decisions and orders in the event the Contractor

fails to promptly carry out same. Further, The District shall have the right to remove Contractor

personnel for violation of District Policies and Procedures.

C. On all questions relating to Contractor’s use of certain materials or equipment, the decision of the

DDR is final and binding, and shall be a condition precedent to any payment under the Contract

Documents.

2.03 DISTRICT’S RIGHT TO STOP WORK

A. If the Contractor fails to promptly correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements

of the Contract Documents or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract

Documents, or, if the District determines, in the exercise of its sole discretion that the Work needs

to stop, the District may, in writing, order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof,

until the cause for such order has been eliminated. The Contractor shall immediately comply with

District's written order to stop the Work. Contractor shall resume Work as and when ordered to

do so by the District. Any stoppage of the Work under this section shall be at Contractor's expense,

and Contractor shall have no claim against the District based on Contractor's failure to perform

the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. In addition to District’s right to stop Work, District may order Contractor to submit to District, at

no additional cost to District, additional information concerning Contractor’s planned Work if

Contractor fails to promptly correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract Documents or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract

Documents. The additional information ordered by District may include, but is not limited to,

preparation of submittals or Working Drawings not otherwise required to be submitted under the

Contract Documents.

C. In the event the District discovers that the Contractor has created an unsafe condition, District

may arrange for other work forces to secure the required safe work environment. (Such remedial

Work will be at the sole discretion of the District.) If this action is required, the District may

unilaterally terminate Work under the Contract, and will pay only for the quantities of Work

actually performed, less the cost of District’s remedial Work. In the event that Work is not halted,



the Contractor must take immediate steps to correct the situation. There will be no extra payment

for Work required to correct unsafe conditions.

D. The right of the District to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the District to

exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity. This right shall

be in addition to and not in restriction or derogation of District’s other rights under the Contract

Documents. The District’s right to stop the Work shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his

responsibilities under or pursuant to the Contract Documents.

END OF PART 2



PART 3 - CONTRACTOR

3.01 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR STATUS

A. The Contractor shall independently perform all Work required by the Contract Documents and

shall not be considered as an agent or employee of the District, nor shall the Contractor’s

Subcontractors or employees be considered as subagents of the District.

B. The Contractor and the Contractor’s Subcontractors shall be licensed in accordance with the laws

of the State of California.

3.02 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES AND SUPERVISION

A. Health and Safety Plan

Contractor shall designate a safety officer and have in place a health and safety plan in accordance

to the laws of State of California and conduct safety meetings and document them in accordance

to the law. Contractor shall have the safety record available for inspection during working hours

and shall submit job site safety meeting reports with Payment application.

B. Supervision

Contractor shall assign both a Project Manager and Site Superintendent to the project. The Site

Superintendent shall be assigned full time. Both individuals must be approved by the District and

not changed without written approval by the District. District reserves the right to require the

Contractor to release these individuals at its sole discretion and hire suitable replacements.

C. Special Inspections

Contractor shall hire an independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to the permitting

agencies and the District to perform all special inspections called for by the permitting agency.

Required inspection reports must accompany the Application for Payment for the work.

D. Beginning of Work

After the execution of the Agreement by both parties, the District will issue the Notice to Proceed

upon its determination that it is appropriate for the Contract Time to commence.

Within thirty (30) days after the effective date contained in the Notice to Proceed, and subject to

the requirements stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents regarding, among other things, the

submittal of Baseline Schedule, the Contractor shall commence Work at the site and shall

diligently and continuously prosecute the Work to final completion within the time limit provided

in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also achieve any and all Contract milestones as

described elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

The Contractor shall notify the District, in writing, of his intent to begin Work at the site.

The Contractor is not authorized to perform any Work until he/she has received a Notice to

Proceed from the District. Should the Contractor begin Work in advance of receiving the Notice

to Proceed, such Work shall be considered as having been done by him/her at his own risk and as

a volunteer.



E. Order of Work

When required by the Contract Documents, or by the needs of the District in its sole discretion,

the Contractor shall follow the sequence of operations as set forth therein.

Full compensation for conforming to such requirements will be considered as included in the

prices paid for the various Contract items of work, and no additional compensation will be

allowed therefore.

F. Disposal of Material Outside the Work Site

Unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, at its own

cost and expense, make its own arrangements for disposing of materials outside the work site.

When any material is to be disposed of outside the work site, the Contractor shall first obtain

written permission from the District to dispose of the material at the intended location. District’s

approval will be contingent upon Contractor obtaining a written permit from the property Owner

on whose property the disposal is to be made. Prior to the disposal of any material at the intended

location, Contractor shall submit said permit or a certified copy thereof to District, together with

a written release from the property Owner absolving the District from any and all responsibility

related to the disposal of material on said property.

Disposal of all Hazardous Materials must be done in accordance with all laws and regulations.

Copies of a required regulatory documentation including copies of final manifests shall be

supplied to the District

G. Access to the Work

The Contractor shall satisfy itself that the jurisdictions through which its operations and haul

routes pass will permit such operations with respect to the type of vehicle, laden weights,

frequency and dimensions of loads, hours of operation and required traffic control. All necessary

permits, licenses or bonds shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor.

H. Temporary Utilities

The Contractor shall make its own arrangements with utility companies for any temporary

services he may require in performance of the Work and shall pay all costs of these services

directly to these utility organizations.

I. Non-District Owned Facilities

The Contractor shall protect from damage those non-District owned facilities (e.g., utilities) that

are to remain in place, be installed, relocated or otherwise arranged.

Contractor’s attention is directed to the possible existence of facilities not shown, and of facilities

in a location different from that, which is indicated. The Contractor shall take steps to ascertain

the exact location of all facilities prior to doing any Work, which may damage such facilities or

interfere with their service. Where the location of a facility is indicated or inferred from the

presence of visible facilities such as buildings, meters and junction boxes, the Contractor shall



make such excavations and explorations as are necessary to ascertain the correct location. Unless

provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the cost of such excavations and explorations

will be considered as a part of the cost of other items of Work and no additional payment will be

made. Such excavations and exploratory Work shall not entitle the Contractor to an extension of

time.

If the Contractor discovers underground facilities not indicated or inferred, from the Contract

Documents, the Contractor shall immediately give the DDR written notification of the existence

of those facilities. The Contractor shall determine the exact location of the underground facilities

and the cost of the work will be paid for in accordance with the Contract documents. The

underground facilities shall be protected from damage as directed by the DDR and the cost of that

work will be paid for as extra work. The Contractor shall, if directed by the DDR, repair any

damage, which may occur to the underground facilities. The cost of that repair work, not due to

the failure of the Contractor to exercise reasonable care, will be paid for as extra work. Damage

due to the Contractor’s failure to exercise reasonable care shall be repaired at the Contractor’s

cost and expense.

Where it is determined by the District that the rearrangement of an underground facility, the

existence of which is not shown on the Contract Drawings, is essential in order to accommodate

the Work, the District will provide for the rearrangement of such facility by other forces or, when

so ordered by change order, such rearrangement shall be performed by the Contractor and will be

paid for as provided under a change order.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of all utility facilities placed by him in

temporary locations, and all utilities within the construction area not required to be relocated but

which are required to be shored or supported during the construction period. The cost of such

maintenance shall be borne by the Contractor, and no other compensation shall be due the

Contractor for this Work.

The cost of providing and maintaining all necessary or required temporary structures, of making

any necessary repairs, replacements, or similar operations, or furnishing indemnity or other

bonds, if required, and all costs required by this Section shall be paid by the Contractor and shall

be included in the prices bid in the schedule for other items of work.

J. Lines and Grades

Contractor shall perform all construction staking using a land surveyor licensed in the State of

California. Contractor shall provide a staking plan prior to commencement of work for District’s

review and maintain monuments, stakes, and marks, and shall update the plan as necessary. The

DDR may verify the field condition. Errors or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents

discovered by the Contractor shall be reported to the DDR within twenty-four (24) hours and

prior to constructing forms or related improvements. Any work installed with this requirement

shall be subject to removal and replacement at the Contractor’s expense.

K. Archaeological Discoveries

Upon discovery of prehistoric or historic artifacts, or other indicators or examples of cultural

resources discovered during the course of site preparation, grading, excavation, construction or

other development activities, all operations within fifty (50) feet of the find shall cease until such



time as the District provides the services of a qualified archaeologist to evaluate the finds and

recommend appropriate action.

Prehistoric materials can include flaked stone tools (e.g. projectile points, knives and choppers)

or tool making debris of obsidian, chert, quartzite and other materials; culturally darkened soil

(i.e. midden, which often contains heat affected rock, ash and charcoal, shellfish remains, and

cultural materials); and stone milling equipment such as mortars, pestles and hand stones.

Historic material may include wood, stone, concrete or adobe footings, walls and other structural

remains; debris filled wells or privies; and deposits of wood, metal, glass ceramics and other

refuse.

L. Conformity with Contract Documents

Work and materials shall conform to the lines, grades, cross sections, dimensions and material

requirements, including tolerances, required by the Contract Documents. Although measurement,

sampling and testing may be considered evidence as to such conformity, the District shall be the

sole judge as to whether the Work or materials deviate from the Contract Documents. At its

option, District may elect to accept deviations from the Contract Documents with appropriate

back-charge assessments against the Contractor, and, if such an election is made, District will

provided written notice to Contractor of such acceptance.

3.03 LABOR AND MATERIALS

A. Labor Code Requirements

At its own cost and expense, Contractor shall comply with all laws, rules and regulations that

pertain to Contractor’s work force. Attention is directed to the following requirements of the

California Labor Code:

1. Hours of Labor

Eight hours labor constitutes a legal day's work. The Contractor or subcontractor shall,

as a penalty to the state or political subdivision on whose behalf the Contract is made

or awarded, forfeit $25 for each worker employed in the performance of the Contract

by the Contractor or any subcontractor under it for each calendar day during which

the worker is required or permitted to work more than 8 hours in any one calendar

day and 40 hours in any one calendar week in violation of the provisions of the Labor

Code Section 1813.

Notwithstanding the provisions of Sections 1810 to 1814, inclusive, of the Labor

Code and notwithstanding any stipulation inserted in any contract pursuant to the

requirements of these sections, work performed by employees of the Contractor or

subcontractor in excess of 8 hours per day and 40 hours during any one week shall be

permitted upon compensation for all hours worked in excess of 8 hours per day and

in excess of 40 hours during any one week at not less than 1½ times the basic rate of

pay, as provided for in Section 1815. In addition, contractor/subcontractor may be

required to pay double the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of 12 hours

in any workday and under other circumstances. (See California Code of Regulations

sections 16100(c)(6), 16200(a)(3)(F) and applicable prevailing wage determinations.)



2. Labor Non-Discrimination

Section 1735 of the Labor Code states that the Contractor shall not discriminate in the

employment of persons upon public works on any basis listed in subdivision (a) of

Section 12940 of the Government Code, as those bases are defined in Sections 12926

and 12926.1 of the Government Code, except as otherwise provided in Section 12940

of the Government Code. Every contractor for public works who violates this section

is subject to all the penalties imposed for a violation of this chapter.

3. Prevailing Wages

See Section 00 73 43 Prevailing Wages.

4. Payroll Records

The Contractor's attention is directed to the following provisions of Labor Code

Section 1776. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with these

provisions by its subcontractors.

a. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall keep accurate payroll records,

showing the name, address, social security number, work classification,

straight time and overtime hours worked each day and week, and the actual

per diem wages paid to each journeyman, apprentice, worker, or other

employee employed by him or her in connection with the public work.

b. The payroll records enumerated under subdivision (a) shall be certified

and shall be available for inspection at all reasonable hours at the principal

office of the Contractor on the following basis:

(1) A certified copy of an employee's payroll record shall be made

available for inspection or furnished to such employee or his or her

authorized representative on request.

(2) A certified copy of a contractor’s payroll record shall be sent

electronically to the District’s Contract Compliance Officer on a

weekly basis over the course of the entire project, from the

commencement of work through project completion. If needed,

contractors shall be afforded the requisite training by the District on

how to submit said records.

(3) A certified copy of all payroll records enumerated in subdivision (a)

shall be made available for inspection or furnished upon request to a

representative of the District, the Division of Labor Standards

Enforcement and the Division of Apprenticeship Standards of the

Department of Industrial Relations.

(4) A certified copy of all payroll records enumerated in subdivision (a)

shall be made available upon request to the public for inspection or

copies thereof made; provided, however, that a request by the public



shall be made through either the District, the Division of

Apprenticeship Standards or the Division of Labor Standards

Enforcement. If the requested payroll records have not been provided

pursuant to paragraph (b), the requesting party shall, prior to being

provided the records, reimburse the costs of preparation by the

Contractor, subcontractor and the entity through which the request

was made. The public shall not be given access to such records at the

principal office of the Contractor.

(5) The certified payroll records shall be on forms provided by the

Division of Labor Standards Enforcement or shall contain the same

information as the forms provided by the Division.

(6) Contractor and each subcontractor shall file a certified copy of the

records enumerated in subdivision (a) with the entity that requests

such records within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request.

(7) Any copy of records made available for inspection as copies and

furnished upon request to the public or any public agency by the

District or the Division of Apprenticeship Standards or the Division

of Labor Standards Enforcement shall be redacted in such a manner as

to prevent disclosure of an individual's name, address and social

security number. The name and address of the Contractor shall not be

redacted.

(8) The Contractor shall inform the District of the location of records

enumerated under subdivision (a), including the street address, city

and county, and shall, within five (5) working days, provide a notice

of a change of location and address.

(9) The Contractor shall have fifteen (15) days in which to comply

subsequent to receipt of written notice requesting the records

enumerated in subdivision (a). Failure to comply after such fifteen

(15) day period will subject Contractor to a penalty to the state or the

political subdivision on whose behalf the contract is made or awarded,

in the amount of $100 for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for

each worker, until strict compliance is effectuated. Upon the request

of the Division of Apprenticeship Standards or the Division of Labor

Standards Enforcement, such penalties shall be withheld from

progress payments then due.

(10) Upon the request of the Division of Apprenticeship Standards or the

Division of Labor Standards Enforcement, the penalties specified in

subdivision (9) above for noncompliance with the provisions of said

Section 1776 may be withheld from any monies due or which may

become due to the Contractor.



(11) The Contractor and each subcontractor shall preserve their payroll

records for a period of three (3) years from the date of completion of

the Contract.

5. Apprentices

The Contractor shall fully comply with the requirements of Sections 1777.5 and

1777.6 of the California Labor Code and the regulations of the California

Apprenticeship Council. In accordance with Section 1777.5, the Contractor shall

secure the necessary certificates and shall contribute to the apprenticeship fund or

funds, as provided for therein. The Contractor shall require each subcontractor who

will perform work or labor or render service to the Contractor in or about the

construction of the work to comply fully with Sections 1777.5 and 1777.6 of the Labor

Code. Information relative to apprenticeship standards, wage schedules and other

requirements may be obtained from the State Division of Apprenticeship Standards

and its branch offices.

6. Materials on Hand

The District may, in its sole and exclusive discretion, make payment for materials or

equipment not yet incorporated into the Work if, at or prior to the time of the

Contractor's submittal of an Application for Progress Payment incorporating therein

a request for payment of such materials or equipment if all of the following are

complied with:

a. The materials or equipment have been delivered to the Site and the

Contractor can submit to the District the Contractor’s proof of payment

b. Adequate arrangements, reasonably satisfactory to the District, have been

made by the Contractor to store and protect such materials or equipment

at the Site including without limitation, insurance reasonably satisfactory

to the District, covering and protecting against the risk of loss, destruction,

theft or other damage to such materials or equipment while in storage if

such coverage is not afforded under the policy of Builder’s Risk insurance

obtained by the District pursuant to the Contract Documents; and

c. The establishment of procedures reasonably satisfactory to the District by

which title to such materials or equipment will be vested in the District

upon the District's payment therefor. The Contractor acknowledges that

the discretion to make, or not to make, payment for materials or equipment

delivered or stored at the site of the Work pursuant to the preceding

sentence shall be exercised exclusively by the District; the District's

exercise of discretion not to make payment for materials or equipment

delivered or stored at the Site, but not yet incorporated into the Work shall

not be deemed the District's default hereunder. In the event that the District

shall elect to make payment for materials or equipment delivered and

stored at the Site, the costs and expenses incurred to comply with the

requirements of (b) and (c) of this Article shall be borne solely and

exclusively by the Contractor and no payment shall be made by the District



on account of such costs and expenses. No payments shall be made by the

District for materials or equipment to be incorporated into the Work where

such materials or equipment have not been delivered or stored at the Site.

3.04 GUARANTY OF WORK

A. Notwithstanding inspections and acceptance by the District of Work furnished under the Contract

Documents, the Contractor warrants to the District that all materials and equipment furnished will

be of good quality and new, that the Work will be free from defects in material or workmanship,

and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not

conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized,

may be considered defective.

B. This warranty by the Contractor is in addition to any warranties or guarantees required elsewhere

in the Contract Documents. This warranty shall be in effect notwithstanding any disclaimers, or

limiting or conditional terms contained in such separate warranties furnished by manufacturers or

suppliers.

C. Contractor agrees to correct all defective Work discovered by District during a period of one (1)

year after the acceptance of the Contract by District or Relief from Maintenance whichever occurs

first, or for such periods of time as set forth elsewhere in the Contract Documents. In addition to

making such corrections, repairs and/or replacements of any defective Work, Contractor shall

correct, repair and/or replace any components of the Work that are damaged as a result of such

defective materials, equipment and/or workmanship. Such corrective work shall be at the sole

expense of Contractor and shall be performed in a timely manner at the reasonable convenience

of District.

D. All work performed for warranty purposes, whether by the general contractor, a subcontractor or

a third party, must include an invoice listing hours, parts and their specific costs, and shall only

show charges not covered under the warranty.

E. All warranties set forth in the Contract Documents shall be deemed cumulative and not alternative

or exclusive. Nothing contained in this Section shall be construed to establish a period of

limitation with respect to any other obligation, which Contractor has under the Contract

Documents or under any separate warranty or guaranty required thereby. The establishment of a

specific warranty period relates only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct defective

Work, and it has no relationship to the time within which its obligation to comply with the

Contract Documents or applicable provision of law may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time

within which proceedings may be commenced to establish Contractor’s liability with respect to

its obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. Without limiting the foregoing, it is

understood and agreed that Contractor shall remain responsible for latent defects with its work,

regardless of the expiration of any warranty period set forth in the Contract Documents.

3.05 PAYMENT OF TAXES

A. Contractor shall pay all taxes and duties applicable to and assessable against any Work,

equipment, materials, services, processes, and operations incidental to or involved in the Contract,

including but not limited to, retail sales and use, transportation, export, import, business, and

special taxes. The Contractor is responsible for ascertaining and acquainting itself with such taxes



and making all necessary arrangements to pay them. The Contractor will maintain records that

are auditable records, and these records shall be subject to District’s review to verify that

Contractor’s tax payments are current at all times.

B. The Contract prices paid for the Work shall include full compensation for all taxes, which the

Contractor is required to pay, whether imposed by Federal, State or local government, including,

without being limited to, Federal excise tax. No tax exemption certificate nor any document

designed to exempt the Contractor from payment of any tax will be furnished to the Contractor

by the District, as to any tax on labor, services, materials, transportation, or any other items

furnished pursuant to the Contract.

C. The Contractor shall withhold and pay any and all sales and use taxes, withholding taxes, whether

Federal, State or local, Social Security taxes, State Unemployment Insurance charges and all other

taxes which are now or hereafter may be required to be paid or withheld under any laws.

3.06 PERMITS AND LICENSES

A. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that, prior to the submission of its bid for the Work, it

fully familiarized itself with the requirements of all applicable federal, state, county, and

municipal laws, codes, rules, and regulations, as well as the conditions of any required licenses

and permits.

B. The Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses, including any applicable building permits,

(except those procured or to be procured by the District which are listed elsewhere in the Contract

Documents), pay all charges and fees, and give all required notices necessary and incidental to

the prosecution of the Work.

C. The Environmental Quality Act (Public Resources Code, Section 21000 to 21176) may be

applicable to permits, licenses and other authorizations which the Contractor must obtain from

State or local agencies in connection with performing the Work. The Contractor shall comply

with the provisions of that Act in obtaining such permits, licenses and other authorizations, and

all permits, licenses and other authorizations shall be obtained in sufficient time to prevent delays

to the Work.

D. The Contractor shall procure all building permits required in order to perform the Work, and shall

procure a Certificate of Occupancy as a condition of final completion (if required by the local

jurisdiction).

3.07 SUPERINTENDENCE BY THE CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, which shall be performed in accordance with

the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for

implementation of all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and

for coordination of all portions of the Work under the Contract. The Contractor shall be solely

responsible for the safety of its employees, Subcontractors of any tier, Suppliers, visitors to the

Contractor, and other third parties associated with the Contractor.

B. Before issuance of the NTP, the Contractor shall designate, in writing, the Project Manager and

Site Superintendent on the project. The District must approve the designation of these positions



before issuance of NTP. Reasons including but not limited to instances of misconduct, contract

non-compliance, unsatisfactory performance, or incompetence shall be grounds for the District to

direct Contractor to dismiss the Superintendent and/or Project Manager, as well as any other

jobsite staff from the project; Contractor shall immediately comply with District’s request, at no

cost to the District, and shall designate a replacement according to the above designation

procedure.

C. Superintendent shall be assigned to the site full time and the Project Manager shall be present at

the work site whenever actions of the elements necessitate his or her presence to take measures

necessary to assure contract compliance and to protect the Work, persons or property. Any order

or communication given to the Project Manager or Site Superintendent shall be deemed delivered

to the Contractor.

D. In the event the Contractor does not assign a full time Project Manager to the work site as required

in the Contract Documents, the District may deduct from any progress payment due the costs plus

markups for the times the Project Manager is away from the work site, plus the cost of any

additional monitoring and reporting performed by the District. The District may also suspend the

Work for cause if the Project Manager or Site Superintendent is not present at the work site, with

no cost, claim or damages accruing to the District for such action. Suspension of work shall mean

an order by the District to cease all construction activities.

E. When the Contractor has more than one construction Contract with the District, each Contract

shall be independent of all others as to Field Offices, Field Staff, and Superintendence.

3.08 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK

A. Attention is directed to Section 01 32 00 for specific requirements concerning the Construction

Schedule and Commencement of the Work.

B. During Construction period, Contractor should provide a look-ahead schedule no less than three

(3) weeks in duration.

3.09 DOCUMENTS ON WORK SITE

A. The Contractor shall keep one copy of all Contract Documents (including Change Orders),

approved Shop Drawings, correspondence, meeting minutes, approved progress payments, and

all other records relating to the Work at the work site. These records shall be maintained in good

order, and they shall be available to the District and its authorized representatives for review,

inspection and copying.

3.10 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES; SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Provision regarding shop drawings, product data and samples are addressed in Division 01 of

the Contract Documents.

B. Substitutions During Construction

Contractor shall have followed the Approved Equal Procedure set forth in the Instructions to

Bidders to obtain District approval for any proposed substitution. However, upon the showing



by Contractor of changed circumstances subsequent to the bid opening that, in the sole discretion

of District, justifies consideration of substitutions during construction, the Contractor may use the

substitution procedure as set forth below.

For convenience in designation in the Contract Documents, certain articles or materials to be

incorporated in the Work may be designated under a trade name or the name of a manufacturer

and his catalog information. Except in those instances where the product is designated to match

others in use in a particular improvement, either completed or in the course of completion, the

use of an alternative article or material which is of equal quality and of the required characteristics

for the purpose intended will be permitted, subject to the following requirements:

1. The Contractor shall submit his request in writing for an alternative article or material.

Such request shall be made in ample time to permit review and approval without

delaying the Work. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment of the Contract

Time or an increase in the Contract Price based on any Contractor-proposed

substitution.

2. No such request will be considered unless accompanied by complete information and

descriptive data necessary to determine whether the offered materials, articles, or

equipment is equal to the specification in the Contract Documents. Samples shall be

provided when requested by the District. The Contractor shall satisfy the District as

to the equal quality, suitability or performance of the offered materials, articles or

equipment. In the event that the District rejects the use of such alternative materials,

articles or equipment, then one of the particular products designated by brand name

will be furnished.

3. The burden of proof as to the quality and suitability of alternatives shall be upon the

Contractor, and he shall furnish all information necessary as required by the District.

The District shall be the sole judge as to the quality and suitability of alternative

articles or materials and his decisions shall be final. Where use of an alternative

material involves redesign of, or changes to, other parts of the Work, the cost and the

time required to effect such redesign or changes will be considered in evaluating the

suitability of the alternative material. Cost of redesign by the District will be borne

by the Contractor.

4. Whenever classification, rating or other certification by a body such as UL or NEMA

is a part of the specification for any material, Contractor’s request for use of

alternative articles or materials shall be accompanied by reports from the listed or

equivalent independent testing laboratory indicating compliance with the Contract

Documents. The cost of all testing required to prove equality of the material proposed

shall be borne by the Contractor. Approval of an alternative shall be only for the

characteristics or use named in such approval, and shall not be used to change or

modify any requirement of the Contract Documents.

5. At its election, District reserves the right to consider any Contractor proposed

substitution as a Cost Reduction Proposal under Section 6.2 “COST REDUCTION

PROPOSALS” of these General Conditions in the event that there is a significant

savings resulting from the substitution.



3.11 WORK SITE MAINTENANCE

A. Air Pollution Control

The Contractor shall comply with all air pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances and

statutes which apply to the Work, including any air pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances

and statutes specified in Section 11017 of the Government Code.

Material to be disposed of shall not be burned inside or outside the worksite with the exception

of incineration at a licensed hazardous waste facility.

B. Water Pollution Control

The Contractor shall exercise every reasonable precaution to protect streams, lakes, reservoirs,

bays and coastal waters from pollution by fuels, oils, bitumen, calcium chloride and other harmful

materials and shall conduct and schedule his operations so as to avoid or minimize muddying and

silting of said streams, lakes, reservoirs, bays and coastal waters. Care shall be exercised to

preserve roadside vegetation beyond the limits of construction.

Water pollution control work is intended to provide prevention, control, and abatement of water

pollution to streams, waterways and other bodies of water, and shall conform to the

requirements, which may be shown elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

C. Sound & Light Control Requirements

The Contractor shall comply with all applicable local, state and federal rules and regulations

regarding sound control, noise level, and light control.

Each internal combustion engine, used for any purpose on the Project or related to the Project,

shall be equipped with a muffler of a type recommended by the manufacturer. The muffler shall

be in good working condition. No internal combustion engine shall be operated on the Project

without said muffler.

D. Use of Pesticides

The Contractor shall comply with all local, state and federal rules and regulations of the

Department of Food and Agriculture, the Department of Health, the Department of Industrial

Relations and all other agencies, which govern the use of pesticides required in the performance

of the Work.

Pesticides include but shall not be limited to herbicides, insecticides, fungicides, rodenticides,

germicides, nematocides, bactericides, inhibitors, fumigants, defoliants, desiccants, soil sterilants,

and repellents.

Any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing, repelling, mitigating or

destroying weeds, insects, diseases, rodents or nematodes and any substance or mixture of

substances intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant or desiccant shall be considered as

pesticide.



E. Weight Limitations

Unless expressly permitted elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall not operate

construction equipment or vehicles of any kind which, laden or unladen, exceed the maximum

weight limits set forth in Division 15 of the Vehicle Code over completed or existing base,

surfacing, pavement or structures.

3.12 ACCESS TO WORK

A. Observation of Construction

The District, and all of its authorized representatives, shall at all times have safe access to the

Work, and shall be furnished with every reasonable facility for ascertaining that the workmanship

and materials are in accordance with the requirements and intentions of the Contract Documents.

All Work done and all materials furnished shall be subject to the DDR’s on-site and off-site

observation.

The observation and/or approvals of the workmanship or materials by the DDR shall not relieve

the Contractor of any obligations to fulfill the requirements of the Contract Documents.

Workmanship and materials not meeting such requirements shall be corrected, and unsuitable

Work or material may be rejected, notwithstanding that such Work or materials have been

previously observed and/or approved by the District, or that payment therefor has been included

in a progress estimate.

The DDR may order re-examination of questioned Work at any time before final acceptance. If

so ordered, the Contractor shall uncover the Work. If such work is found to be in accordance

with the Contract Documents, the District will pay for the cost of uncovering, removing,

recovering and replacing the parts removed; but if such Work so exposed or examined is not in

accordance with the Contract Documents, the uncovering, removal, recovering and replacement

shall be at the Contractor's expense. Work, which has been covered prior to observation by the

District, does not qualify as re-examined work; the District may order such work uncovered for

observation without payment of any costs.

3.13 INDEMNIFICATION

A. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Alameda-Contra Costa Transit

Authority and its respective directors, officers, employees, and agents, including the DDR, and

the successors and assigns of any of them (collectively referred to as "Indemnities") from and

against all claims, demands, liability, suits, actions, costs or expenses for any and all loss or

damage, including, but not limited to, personal injury, property damage, or economic loss, arising

out of or resulting from allegations of (i) Contractor’s use of District's property or any activities

or Work performed hereunder by Contractor; (ii) Contractor’s performance of the Work under the

Contract; or (iii) Contractor’s breach of any provision of the Contract. The duty of Contractor to

indemnify and save harmless includes the duties to defend as set forth in Section 2778 of the Civil

Code. The only exception to these provisions is that Contractor’s obligations under this section

will not apply to the extent that the claims, demands, liability, suits, actions, costs or expenses are

caused by Indemnities’ gross negligence, willful misconduct or criminal acts. Contractor waives

any and all rights to any type of express or implied indemnity against Indemnities. This indemnity

shall survive termination or acceptance of the Contract.



B. Any person, firm or corporation that Contractor authorizes to Work on District's property,

including Subcontractors, shall be deemed to be an agent of the Contractor for purposes herein,

shall be subject to all the applicable terms herein, and shall be within the scope of Contractor’s

indemnity obligation described herein.

END OF PART 3



PART 4 - SUBCONTRACTORS

4.01 SUBCONTRACTING

A. The Contractor shall give its personal attention to the fulfillment of the Contract Documents and

shall keep all Work under its control.

1. No subcontractor will be recognized as such and nothing in the Contract Documents

shall create any contractual relationship between the District and any subcontractor.

The Contractor is as fully responsible to the District for the acts and omissions of its

Subcontractors of any tier as the Contractor is for the acts and omissions of persons

or entities that it directly employs.

2. When a portion of the Work, which has been subcontracted by the Contractor, is not

being prosecuted in a manner satisfactory to the District, or if the subcontractor

violates one of the District’s rules, the subcontractor may be removed immediately

upon the request of the District, and may not again be employed with respect to the

Work.

3. The on-site production of materials produced by other than the Contractor’s own

forces shall be considered as subcontracted. The erection, establishment or reopening

of on-site plants for production of materials and the operation thereof in the

production of materials for use on the Work shall conform to the requirements relating

to labor set forth in the Contract Documents.

B. The Contractor shall also be responsible for coordinating the Work performed by

Subcontractors and Suppliers.

C. Approval of Substitutions of Subcontractor:

1. The Contractor shall notify the District in writing of any request to substitute a

Subcontractor in place of a Subcontractor listed in Contractor's Bid. Prior to such

substitution, for Work that is greater than or equal to one-half of one percent (0.5%)

of the Contract Price or if the Contractor proposes to substitute an SBE firm, the

Contractor shall secure the written approval from the District’s Contracts Compliance

Officer. The Contractor shall submit the following information in a form similar to

the Bid/Submittal Form entitled, “LIST OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS,”

contained in the Contractor's Bid Forms. The District will review the information

submitted relative to each Subcontractor in accordance with the requirements of the

Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act and transmit written notification to

the Contractor concerning its decision regarding approval of the proposed

substitution. Information submitted by the Contractor shall include at least the

following:

a. Name of the Subcontractor

b. Location and Phone Number of Place of Business

c. Contact Person



d. Contractor's License(s) number and expiration date

e. SBE status (if applicable)

f. The portion of the Work that will be performed by each Subcontractor and

its dollar value

g. Reason(s) for the proposed substitution

D. Prompt Payment to Subcontractors

1. The Contractor shall pay any Subcontractor approved by the District for work that has

been satisfactorily performed no later than seven (7) days from the date of the

Contractor's receipt of progress payments by the District.

2. In the event the District holds retainage from the Contractor, it shall make prompt and

regular incremental acceptances of portions of the contract work, as determined by

the District, and pay retainage to the Contractor based on these acceptances. The

Contractor or Subcontractor shall return all monies withheld from all Subcontractors

within thirty (30) days after receiving payment for work satisfactorily completed and

accepted including incremental acceptances of portions of the contract work by the

District. Any delay or postponement of payment may take place only for good cause

and with the District's prior written approval.

3. Any violation of these provisions shall subject the violating Contractor to the

penalties, sanctions and other remedies specified in Section 7108.5 of the California

Business and Professions Code. This requirement shall not be construed to limit or

impair any contractual, administrative, or judicial remedies otherwise available to the

Contractor or Subcontractor in the event of a dispute involving late payment, or

nonpayment by the Contractor, or deficient subcontractor’s performance, or

noncompliance by a Subcontractor.

4. Assembly Bill 626 (“AB 626” or the “Bill”) which creates significant new

requirements for administering the claims process for public works projects in the

State of California is now effective. Please refer to Part 7, Dispute Resolution for

more information regarding this Bill.

E. In the event the Contractor does not make progress payments or release retentions to the

Subcontractors in accordance with the time periods in this section, the Contractor will be

subject to a charge of two percent (2%) per month on the untimely or improperly withheld

payment.

END OF PART 4



PART 5 - COORDINATION AND ACCESS

5.01 GENERAL

A. The Contractor acknowledges that the District may award, or has already awarded, other

construction contracts for additional work or may perform additional work with its own forces

and that such work may affect the Work under this Contract. Additionally the Contractor

acknowledges that the State and other Public and Private Agencies may be granted a right-of-

entry by District for the purpose of constructing facilities within and adjacent to the work site. It

is the obligation of the Contractor to coordinate its Work with the work of others working within

or adjacent to the District's property.

B. During the performance of its Work, the Contractor shall not have exclusive access to or use of

the work areas. The District may also require that certain facilities and areas be used concurrently

by the Contractor and by other contractors working in the area. When two or more contractors

are employed on related or adjacent District work, each shall conduct his operations in such a

manner as not to cause any unnecessary delay or hindrance to the other. Each contractor shall be

responsible to the other for all damage to any work, to persons or property caused to the other by

his operations, and for loss caused the other due to any unnecessary delays or failure to finish the

work within the time specified for completion.

C. If any part of the Contractor's Work depends on the work of any other contractor and/or the

District for proper execution and/or results, the Contractor shall promptly notify the District of

any discrepancies and/or defects in said other work that would render its work unsuitable for

proper execution and/or results prior to proceeding with the Contractor's own Work. If it becomes

necessary, the District will resolve coordination and access problems.

D. Contractor and its representative in charge of the Work shall familiarize themselves with District's

property and work site, and adjacent surroundings in the vicinity of said Work, and any private

or public operations on adjoining properties.

END OF PART 5



PART 6 - CHANGES IN THE WORK

6.01 CHANGES

A. General:

1. The District may make at any time, and without notice to Contractor’s surety and

without invalidating the Contract, alterations, deviations, additions to or deletions of

the Contract Documents, and may increase or decrease the quantity of any item or

portion of the Work, or delete any item or portion of the Work, and may require extra

work, as determined by the District to be necessary or advisable. All such changes

shall be performed under the terms of the Contract Documents.

2. Any changes will be set forth in a written Contract Change Order issued by the

District. The Contract Change Order will specify:

a. the Work to be done in connection with the change to be made;

b. the amount, if any, of the adjustment of the Contract Price, and the basis

for compensation for the changed work ordered; and

c. The extent, if any, of the adjustment in the Contract Time.

d. A Contract Change Order shall not become effective until an authorized

representative of the District has signed it. Upon receipt of an approved

Contract Change Order, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the

ordered work, unless otherwise provided in the approved Contract Change

Order.

B. Contractor Initiated Changes

1. Request for Change (RFC): A RFC is a request initiated by the Contractor and

submitted to the District identifying Contractor’s proposed revisions to the Contract

Documents. The Contractor’s RFC may request a revision to the Contract Time,

Contract Price and/or Construction Schedule. The RFC shall be based on a material

and significant change to the requirements of the Contract Documents; however, in

no event may Contractor submit a RFC for a change that was caused by Contractor’s

failure to comply with the Contract Documents in the performance of the Work under

the Contract.

The District will issue a written decision concerning the RFC. Contractor’s RFC must

be supported by sufficient documentation submitted by Contractor to support the costs

and/or time requested by the RFC. Any RFC approved by the District will result in a

Contract Change Order, and Contractor shall not proceed with the proposed RFC

work until the District has issued a Contract Change Order.

If the Contractor's RFC is denied by the District and the Contractor disagrees with the

assessment and still believes that a revision to the Contract Time, Contract Price,



and/or Construction Schedule is warranted, the Contractor may submit a claim

pursuant to Part 7, “Dispute Resolution” of these General Conditions.

Unless otherwise allowed by the District, the costs associated with implementing an

approved RFC shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Such costs shall include

coordination with all Subcontractors, and delays and disruption arising from the

incorporation of the change or alternative into the Work.

C. District Initiated Changes

1. Contract Change Order: The District may issue a Contract Change Order at any time

during the course of the project, informing the Contractor of a change to the Work

required under the Contract. The District may: 1) notify the Contractor of the

impending issuance of an approved Contract Change Order issued unilaterally by the

District without input from the Contractor and with or without an adjustment of the

Contract price or time; 2) notify the Contractor of the impending issuance of an

approved Contract Change Order issued unilaterally by the District and authorizing

additional payment on a force account basis; or 3) seek the Contractor’s input

regarding an adjustment to the Contract price based on the change to the Work through

a Request for Quotation.

2. Request for Quotations: The District may issue a Request for Quotation (“RFQ”),

which requests the Contractor to provide a quotation concerning a proposed change.

RFQ’s will be numbered sequentially, specifying the time required for the Contractor

to respond with a proposal. A RFQ shall not be considered as authorization to proceed

with any change, nor shall such request justify any delay in executing existing Work.

Contractor shall, upon receipt of a RFQ, promptly, within the time frame specified in

the RFQ, provide quotations for increases or decreases in the Contract Price and the

Contract Time resulting from the proposed change. Quotations shall be in the form

specified by the District and shall include substantiating documentation with an

itemized breakdown of Contractor and Subcontractor costs to perform the change,

including labor, materials, rentals, services, overhead and profit as set forth in this

contract. The cost of preparing such quotations is included in the Contract Price, and

Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional compensation for preparing them.

3. Approved Contract Change Order: A Contract Change Order shall not be effective

unless signed by an appropriately authorized representative of the District, at which

time it is considered an “approved Contract Change Order.” Upon receipt of an

approved Contract Change Order, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the

ordered Work.

4. In the event Contractor disagrees with the terms of an approved Contract Change

Order, it may submit a written protest within ten (10) days of receipt of the approved

Contract Change Order pursuant to the “Protest Procedures” delineated later in this

Part of the General Conditions.

5. Executed Contract Change Order: A Contract Change Order signed by both parties

is an “executed Contract Change Order.” By signing the Contract Change Order, the

Contractor agrees that the specified compensation constitutes full compensation for



the changed Work, including payment for interruption, disruption, acceleration,

extended overhead, delay or any other "impact" claim or "ripple effect" claim.

Contractor specifically understands and agrees that its execution of the Contract

Change Order shall constitute a waiver of any right for Contractor to claim any

additional compensation with respect to the subject matter of the Contract Change

Order.

6. Field Change Notice: A Field Change Notice (“FCN”) is a written directive issued

by the DDR ordering a minor addition, deletion, modification, or revision to the Work

which does not constitute a change in Contract Documents and cannot be handled

through a Change Notice or Request for Change process due to the urgent nature of

the work. Upon receipt of the Field Change Notice, the Contractor shall promptly

proceed with the Work set forth in the notice. The FCN may include the method of

payment for the affected Work. To the extent a FCN requires a change to the Contract

Documents, the District will issue a Contract Change Order to incorporate the change.

7. A FCN may include a not-to-exceed cost. The Contractor and DDR shall, on a daily

basis, diligently monitor the costs associated with the FCN and inform the DDR when

such costs are within twenty-five percent (25%) of the not-to-exceed amount

stipulated in the FCN. When such costs are within twenty-five percent (25%) of the

not-to-exceed amount, the DDR and Contractor’s representative shall review the

balance of the work to be completed and all anticipated costs. If the DDR and

Contractor are in agreement, a revised FCN will be issued with a revised not-to-

exceed amount. A change order will be processed in case there is a cost or schedule

impact or the work will be handled through force account at District’s discretion.

D. Continuance of Construction

Any disagreement by the Contractor with the District's determination of the need for, or amount

of, an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time associated with an approved Contract

Change Order (or disagreement by the Contractor with the District's determination that a change

has not occurred and no Contract Change Order is needed) shall not, under any circumstances,

relieve the Contractor from its obligation to promptly begin and diligently prosecute the Work,

including the change that is described in the approved Contract Change Order. Should such

disagreement occur, the Contractor’s attention is directed to the provisions relating to “Protest

Procedure” set forth elsewhere in these General Conditions.

E. Differing Site Conditions

Within twenty-four (24) hours of discovery of any purported differing site conditions and before

such conditions are disturbed, the Contractor shall notify the District in writing of: (1) material

that the Contractor believes may be hazardous waste, as defined in California Health and Safety

Code Section 25117, that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II or Class III disposal site

in accordance with provisions of existing law, (2) subsurface or latent physical conditions at the

site differing materially from information made available to the Contractor before the submission

of its bid, or (3) unknown physical conditions at the site, of an unusual nature, differing materially

from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character

provided for in this Contract.



In the event conditions as described in (1), (2) or (3) above are discovered, the Contractor shall

continue to diligently prosecute the work in the other portions of the site not affected by such

conditions. The Contractor shall also use its best efforts to prevent and/or minimize delays or

disruptions to the affected portions of the work.

The District will promptly investigate the purported differing site conditions. If the District finds

that such conditions do materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost

of, or the time required for, performance of any part of the Work under this Contract, an equitable

adjustment shall be made and the Contract will be modified in accordance with the change order

procedures set forth herein. In the event of any dispute between the District and the Contractor

over the significance or existence of the changed conditions, the Contractor shall not be excused

from the scheduled completion date set forth herein, but shall retain such rights as provided

elsewhere in these Contract Documents.

No claim of the Contractor under this clause shall be allowed unless the Contractor has given the

notice required by this Section. No claim by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment hereunder

shall be allowed if asserted after final payment under this Contract.

F. Contract Price Adjustment

If a Contract Change Order provides for an adjustment to the Contract Price, the increased

amount owed to Contractor, or the credit due the District, shall be determined by one of the

following methods, or a combination thereof, as determined by the District and at its sole

discretion:

1. Unit Prices: The unit prices (if applicable) set forth in the Contractor’s Schedule of

Bid Prices will be utilized where they are applicable. If the actual quantities of an

item of work are greater or lesser than the DDR’s Estimate of quantity for such item

of Work by more than twenty-five percent (25%) within a project segment, such that

the application of unit prices in the Bid Form will cause substantial inequity to the

District or Contractor, the unit prices will be adjusted by mutual agreement or, based

on verifiable documentation made available by either party or, in the absence of

agreement, documentation as determined by the District in the same manner as if the

work that is greater or less than twenty-five percent (25%) of the estimated quantities

were to be paid for on a force account basis. District’s determination shall be subject

to protest by the Contractor pursuant to the provisions relating to “Protest Procedure”

set forth elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

Unit prices for new items included in the Contract Change Order shall be as mutually

agreed upon or, in the absence of agreement, as determined by the District in the same

manner if the work were to be paid for on a force account basis. District’s

determination shall be subject to protest by the Contractor pursuant to the provisions

relating to “Protest Procedure” set forth elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

2. Eliminated Items. The District reserves the right to delete any bid item of Work in its

entirety. The District makes no representation that any work under a bid item of Work

will be performed, and all work may be subject to a Contract Change Order that

deletes such work. Bid items are distinct and severable from the other bid items, and

Contractor shall not be entitled to any anticipated profit, unabsorbed overhead, or



other indirect expense attributable to the deleted item, except as provided immediately

below with regard to force account mark-ups on the direct and verifiable costs

incurred prior to the District’s order the deletes the work.

Should any bid item of Work be eliminated in its entirety and not accounted for in

Sub-paragraph 1 above and, in the absence of an executed Contract Change Order

covering such elimination, payment will be made to the Contractor for actual direct

and verifiable costs incurred in connection with such eliminated bid item if incurred

prior to the date of notification in writing by the District of such elimination. If

acceptable material is ordered by the Contractor for the eliminated item prior to the

date of notification of such elimination by the District, and if orders for such material

cannot be canceled, it will be paid for at the actual direct and verifiable cost to the

Contractor. Actual direct costs shall include documented vendor shipping fees,

supplier restocking fees, if applicable, and Contractor handling costs directly related

to the eliminated item(s). In such case, the material paid for shall become the property

of the District and the actual cost of any further handling will be paid for. If the

material is returnable to the vendor and if the District so directs, the material shall be

returned and the Contractor will be paid for the actual direct cost of charges made by

the vendor for returning the material. The actual direct cost of handling returned

material will also be paid for. The actual direct and verifiable costs to be paid by the

District as provided herein will be computed in the same manner as if the work were

to be paid for on a force account basis, including the application of force account

mark-ups to said costs.

3. Changes in Character of Work. If an order by the DDR materially changes the

character of the work from that indicated in the original Contract Documents, and if

the change materially increases or decreases the actual unit cost of performing

changed item as compared to the estimated unit cost of performing the work in

accordance with the plans and specifications originally applicable thereto, an

adjustment in compensation therefor will be made in accordance with the following:

a. The basis of such adjustment in compensation will be the difference

between (i) an estimate of the reasonable unit cost to perform the work

under the bid item or portion thereof involved in the change as originally

planned and (ii) the actual unit cost of performing the work of said item or

portion thereof involved in the change, as changed. Actual unit costs will

be determined by the DDR in the same manner as if the work were to be

paid for on a force account basis or such adjustment will be as agreed to

by the Contractor and the DDR. Any such adjustment will apply only to

the portion of the work of said item actually changed in character. At the

option of the DDR, the work of said item or portion of item, which is

changed in character, will be paid for by force account.

b. If the compensation for an item of work is adjusted under this Section

“Changes in Character of Work”, the costs recognized in determining such

adjustment shall be excluded from consideration in making and

adjustment for such item of work under Section “Unit Prices”.



c. Failure of the DDR to recognize a change in character of the work at the

time the approved contract change order is issued shall in no way be

construed as relieving the Contractor of his duty and responsibility of

filing a written protest pursuant to Section “Protest Procedure”.

d. Under no circumstances will work, that is considered to be a change in

character, commence until the DDR and the Contractor agree on a lump

sum, unit price amount, or other price adjustment. No work shall

commence until a Change Order is executed, or a Field Change Notice

(FCN) is issued directing the Contractor to perform the work. However,

the Contractor shall diligently prosecute all portions of the work that are

not affected by the pending Change Order and shall use its best efforts to

prevent and/or minimize delays or disruptions (if any) to the entire work

caused by the pending Change Order.

e. Under no circumstance shall Contractor be entitled to claim a Change in

the Character of Work to compensate for errors or deficiencies in

Contractor’s original estimate for the work or to seek additional

compensation for extra costs attributable to its own mismanagement or

supervision of the work.

4. Extra Work. New and unforeseen work will be classed as extra work when

determined by the District that such work is not covered by any of the various items

for which there is a bid price or by combinations of such items. In the event portions

of such work are determined by the District to be covered by some of the various

items for which there is a bid price or combinations of such items, the remaining

portion of such work will be classed as extra work.

The Contractor shall perform such extra work and furnish labor, material, and

equipment therefor upon receipt of an approved Contract Change Order, and in the

absence of such approved Contract Change Order, Contractor shall not be entitled to

payment for such extra work. Payment for extra work required to be performed

pursuant to the provisions in this section, in the absence of an executed Contract

Change Order, will be made by force account.

G. Protest Procedure

1. If the Contractor disagrees with any terms or conditions set forth in an approved

Contract Change Order, it shall submit a written protest to the DDR within ten (10)

days after receipt of such approved Contract Change Order, but in no event after

commencement of the Work covered by such approved Contract Change Order. The

protest shall state Contractor’s points of disagreement with respect to the change

order, including any and all specific references to portions of the Contract Document

at issue. The Contractor’s protest shall also propose a modification of the items with

which Contractor does not agree. If a written protest is not submitted within the time

period set forth herein, payment will be made as described in the approved Contract

Change Order. Contractor’s failure to timely submit a written protest shall constitute

a waiver of Contractor’s right to claim any additional compensation beyond the

amount stated in the approved Contract Change Order for the changed work.



Approved Contract Change Orders which are not protested within such time period

will be considered as executed Contract Change Orders, and payment made

thereunder will constitute full compensation for all work resulting from the change.

2. When the protest of an approved Contract Change Order relates to compensation, the

Contractor shall keep full and complete records of the work that is the subject of the

protest. Contractor shall make all cost data pertaining to changed work available to

the Engineer upon request. The Contractor shall submit substantiating cost data with

the protest Contractor’s failure to submit cost data shall constitute a waiver of

Contractor’s right to claim any additional compensation for the disputed work.

3. The Contractor shall cooperate with the DDR to reach agreement at the earliest

practical date with respect to the disputed work. If an agreement has been reached, a

revised Contract Change Order will be approved by the District and issued to the

Contractor for signature. Unless and until the District and Contractor agree upon the

terms of compensation incorporated in a revised executed Contract Change Order, the

compensation shall be as specified under the protested approved Contract Change

Order.

4. When the protest of an approved Contract Change Order relates to an adjustment of

Contract Time for the completion of the Work, those disputes will be determined in

accordance with the provisions of ”Delays and Extensions of Time” elsewhere in

these Contract Documents.

5. If the Contractor's protest is denied by the District and the Contractor disagrees with

the assessment and wishes to pursue the dispute further, the Contractor may submit a

claim pursuant to Part 7, “Dispute Resolution” of these General Conditions.

H. Force Account Payment

When Work performed pursuant to a Change Order is to be paid for on a force account basis,

the Contractor’s labor, materials and equipment used in the performance of such Work shall be

subject to the approval of the District, and the compensation will be determined as set forth

below in this section.

1. Work Performed by Contractor

The Contractor will be paid the direct costs for labor, materials and equipment used

in performing the Work determined as hereafter provided.

To the total of the direct costs computed as provided in Sections (1), "Labor," (2),

"Materials" and (3), "Equipment Rental" below, there will be added a negotiated

markup, with a maximum of fifteen percent (15%) to the cost of labor, ten percent

(10%) to the cost of materials, five percent (5%) to rented equipment and ten

percent (10%) to subcontractors.

The above markups shall constitute full compensation, covering the costs of all

supervision, overhead, profit and any other general expense not specifically

designated as a direct cost in Sections (1), (2) and (3) below. The total payment



made as provided above (i.e., direct cost plus applicable markups) shall be deemed

to be the actual cost of such work and shall constitute full compensation therefor.

Contractor specifically understands and agrees that such payment shall include any

Contractor costs for interruption, disruption, and acceleration, extended overhead,

change order management, delay or other “impact” claim or “ripple effect” claim.

When work paid for on a force account basis is performed by forces other than the

Contractor's own forces, the Contractor’s maximum mark-up for its own account

shall be fifteen percent (15%) of the labor costs. The maximum allowable mark-

ups for the subcontractors’ costs shall be fifteen percent (15%) to the cost of labor,

ten percent (10%) to the cost of materials, and five percent (5%) to rented

equipment. However, in the event that any force account work is also performed

by sub-tier subcontractors, the Contractor shall reach agreement with such

Subcontractors or other sub-tier subcontractors as to an equitable distribution of

the total mark-up payments to be made by the District for such force account work.

The District shall not be obligated to make any additional payment for force

account mark-ups by reason of the performance of the force account work by sub-

tier subcontractors.

a. Labor. The Contractor will be paid the cost of labor for the workmen

(including foremen when authorized by the DDR), used in the actual and

direct performance of the Work. All labor costs associated with

overhead, whether field or home office, are specifically excluded herein,

as those labor costs are covered by the above mark-ups. The cost of

labor, whether the employer is the Contractor, Subcontractor or other

forces, will be the sum of the following:

b. Actual Wages: The actual wages paid shall include any employer

payments to or on behalf of the workmen for health and welfare, pension,

vacation and similar purposes.

c. Labor Surcharge. To the actual wages, as defined in Section (a), will be

added a labor surcharge set forth in the California Department of

Transportation (“Caltrans”) publication entitled Labor Surcharge and

Equipment Rental Rates, which is in effect on the date upon which the

work is accomplished. Said labor surcharge shall constitute full

compensation for all payments imposed by State and Federal laws and for

all other payments made to, or on behalf of, the workmen, other than actual

wages as defined in Section (a) and subsistence and travel allowance as

specified in Section (c). Labor rates submitted for work under time and

materials shall include the labor surcharge:

(1) Subsistence and Travel Allowance. The actual subsistence and travel

allowance paid to such workmen. No markup will be allowed on

subsistence and travel expense.

d. Materials. The District reserves the right to furnish such materials as it

deems advisable, and the Contractor shall have no claims for costs and



markup on such materials. Only materials furnished by the Contractor and

necessarily used in the performance of the Work will be paid for. The cost

of such materials will be the cost to the purchaser, whether Contractor,

Subcontractor or other forces, from the Supplier thereof, except, as the

following are applicable:

(1) If a cash or trade discount by the actual Supplier is offered or available

to the purchaser, it shall be credited to the District notwithstanding the

fact that such discount may not have been taken.

(2) If materials are procured by the purchaser by any method which is not

a direct purchase from and a direct billing by the actual Supplier to

such purchaser, the cost of such materials shall be deemed to be the

price paid to the actual supplier as determined by the District plus the

actual costs, if any, incurred in the handling of such materials.

(3) If the materials are obtained from a supply or source owned wholly or

in part by the purchaser, the cost of such materials shall not exceed the

price paid by the purchaser for similar materials furnished from said

source on Bid items or the current wholesale price for such materials

delivered to the job site, less any discounts as provided in Section (1),

whichever is lower.

(4) If the cost of such materials is, in the opinion of the District, excessive,

then the cost of such material shall be deemed to be the lowest current

wholesale price at which such materials were available in the

quantities concerned delivered to the job site, less any discounts as

provided in Section (1).

(5) If the Contractor does not furnish satisfactory evidence of the cost of

such materials from the actual supplier thereof within sixty (60) days

after the date of delivery of the materials or within fifteen (15) days

after acceptance of the Contract, whichever occurs first, the District

reserves the right to establish the cost of such materials at the lowest

current wholesale prices at which such materials were available in the

quantities concerned delivered to the location of the work, less any

discounts as provided in Section (1).

e. Equipment. Within fifteen (15) days after Notice to Proceed is issued to

the Contractor, the Contractor shall submit a list of equipment intended to

be used on the contract for review and approval by the District. The

equipment list will identify all pieces of the equipment to be used on the

project and will include the make, model number, serial number and all

attachments for each piece of equipment. The equipment submittal will

include hourly rates (excluding operators) for (i) equipment operated for

40 hours and less per week; (ii) equipment operated for more than 40 hours

per week; and (iii) equipment not operated and on standby. In determining

a suitable rental rate for equipment, the DDR shall take into consideration

the applicable Schedule of Equipment Rates issued by Caltrans, as well as



Contractor’s proposed rate(s) and supporting documentation. Standby

rates will apply for equipment operating over eight (8) hours in any given

twelve (12) hour shift.

Equipment located at a work site and utilized on non-force account work

shall not be eligible for standby payment, and shall be charged on a force

account basis only when solely performing pre-approved force account

work tasks.

If it is deemed necessary by the District to use equipment not listed in the

approved Equipment Submittal, outside rentals may be utilized.

Contractor shall provide copies of invoicing from the rental agency as part

of the force account documentation. If the equipment is used on contract

work during the same rental period, only that portion, based on the actual

hours of operation, will be applied to the force account work.

The rental rates paid as above provided shall include the cost of fuel, oil,

lubrication, supplies, small tools, necessary attachments, repairs and

maintenance of any kind, depreciation, storage, insurance and all

incidentals.

Operators of rented equipment will be paid for as provided in Section (1),

"Labor."

All equipment shall, in the opinion of the DDR, be in good working

condition and suitable for the purpose for which the equipment is to be

used. Prior to beginning force account work, the District and Contractor

shall agree on all equipment to be used for the work described in the daily

time and material form.

Individual pieces of equipment or tools not listed in said publication and

having a replacement value of $1000 or less, whether or not consumed by

use, shall be considered to be small tools and no payment will be made

therefor.

No payment will be made on a force account basis for equipment that is

inoperative due to breakdown, servicing or repair or is not functioning

according to the manufacturer’s performance standards or is not being

operated by a qualified operator.

For the use of equipment not listed on the approved Equipment Submittal

that is moved in on the work and used exclusively for extra work to be

paid for on a force account basis, the Contractor will be paid at the actual

rental rates verified by the Contractor or rates charged for similar

equipment listed in the Equipment Submittal. The cost of transporting the

equipment to the location of the work and its return to its original location,

will be paid in accordance with the following provisions. The original

location of the equipment to be hauled to the location of the work will be

agreed to by the District in advance. The District will pay the costs of

loading and unloading such equipment. The cost of transporting



equipment in low bed trailers shall not exceed the hourly rates charged by

established haulers. The cost of transporting equipment shall not exceed

the applicable minimum established rates of the Public Utilities

Commission.

Equipment charges shall begin at the time the equipment is unloaded at

the site of the extra work, shall include each day of the work week

(defined elsewhere in the Contract Documents) that the equipment is at

the site of the extra work, excluding legal holidays, unless the equipment

is used to perform the extra work on such days, and shall terminate at the

end of the day on which the District directs the Contractor to discontinue

the use of such equipment.

Equipment operated less than thirty (30) minutes shall be considered to be

one-half (1/2) hour of operation charged accordingly.

Should the Contractor desire the return of the equipment to a location other

than its original location, the District will pay the cost of transportation in

accordance with the above provisions; provided such payment shall not

exceed the cost of moving the equipment to the Work site.

Payment for transporting, and loading and unloading equipment, as above

provided, will not be made if the equipment is used on the Work in any

other way than upon extra work paid for on a force account basis.

When extra work, other than Work specifically designated as extra work

in the Contract Documents, is to be paid for on a force account basis and

the District determines that such extra work requires the Contractor to

move on to the work site equipment which could not reasonably have been

expected to be needed in the performance of the Contract, the District may

authorize payment for the use of such equipment at equipment rental rates

in excess of those listed as applicable for the use of such equipment subject

to the following conditions:

(1) The District shall specifically approve the necessity for the use of

particular equipment on such Work,

(2) The Contractor shall establish to the satisfaction of the District that

such equipment cannot be obtained from his normal equipment source

or sources and those of his Subcontractors,

(3) The Contractor shall establish to the satisfaction of the District that the

proposed equipment rental rate for such equipment from his proposed

source is reasonable and appropriate for the expected period of use.

(4) The District shall approve the equipment source and the equipment

rental rate to be paid by the District before the Contractor begins Work

involving the use of said equipment.



2. Work Performed by Special Forces or Other Special Services

When the DDR and the Contractor, by agreement, determine that a special service or

an item of extra work cannot be performed by the forces of the Contractor or those of

any of his Subcontractors, such service or extra work item may be performed by a

specialist. Invoices for such service or item of extra work on the basis of the current

market price thereof may be accepted without complete itemization of labor, materials

and equipment rental costs when it is impracticable and not in accordance with the

established practice of the special service industry to provide such complete

itemization.

In those instances wherein a Contractor is required to perform extra work

necessitating a fabrication or machining process in a fabrication or machine shop

facility away from the job site, the charges for that portion of the extra work performed

in such facility may, by agreement, be accepted as a specialist billing.

To the specialist invoice price, less a credit to the District for any cash or trade

discount offered or available, whether or not such discount may have been taken, will

be added five percent (5%) in lieu of the percentages provided in, “Force Account

Payment, Work Performed by Contractor” elsewhere in these General Conditions.

3. Records

The Contractor shall maintain its records in such a manner as to provide a clear

distinction between the direct costs of extra work paid for on a force account basis

and the costs of other operations.

From the above records, the Contractor shall furnish the District completed daily extra

work reports, on forms furnished by the District, for each day’s extra work to be paid

for on a force account basis. The daily extra work reports shall itemize the materials

used, and shall cover the direct cost of labor and the charges for equipment rental,

whether furnished by the Contractor, subcontractor, or other forces, except for charges

described in Section 2, “Work Performed by Special Forces or Other Special

Services.” The daily extra work reports shall provide names or identifications and

classifications of workmen, the hourly rate of pay and hours worked, and also the size,

type and identification number of equipment, and hours operated. Daily extra work

and force account reports (actual or claimed) shall be signed by both the District’s and

Contractor’s representatives within twenty-four (24) hours of the performance of the

work.

Valid copies of vendor’s invoices shall substantiate material charges. Such invoices

shall be submitted with the daily extra work reports, or if not available, they shall be

submitted with subsequent daily extra work reports. Should said vendor’s invoices

not be submitted within sixty (60) days after the date of delivery of the material or

within fifteen (15) days after the acceptance of the Contract, whichever occurs first,

the District reserves the right to establish the cost of such materials at the lowest

current wholesale prices at which said materials were available in the quantities

concerned delivered to the location of work less any discounts as provided in Section

6.01.E.1 (2).



The Contractor or his authorized representative shall sign said daily extra work

reports.

The District will compare his records with the completed daily extra work reports

furnished by the Contractor and make any necessary adjustments. When these daily

extra work reports are agreed upon and signed by both parties, said reports shall

become the basis of payment for the work performed, but shall not preclude

subsequent adjustment based on a later audit by the District.

The Contractor’s cost records pertaining to Work paid for on a force account basis

shall be open to inspection or audit by representatives of the District, during the life

of the Contract and for a period of not less than three (3) years after the date of contract

completion and recording. The Contractor shall retain such records for that period.

Where payment for materials or labor is based on the cost thereof to forces other than

the Contractor, the Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to insure that the

cost records of such other forces will be open to inspection and audit by

representatives of the District on the same terms and conditions as the cost records of

the Contractor. If an audit is to be commenced more than sixty (60) days after the

date of acceptance of the Contract, the Contractor will be given fifteen (15) days’

notice of the time when such audit is to begin.

6.02 COST REDUCTION PROPOSALS

A. The District encourages the Contractor to submit Cost Reduction Proposals whenever the

Contractor identifies areas and/or instances in which there can be savings to the Work. Contractor

may submit to the District, in writing, proposals for modifying the plans, specifications or other

requirements of the Contract for the sole purpose of reducing the total cost of construction,

including the time for completion of the Work. The Cost Reduction Proposal shall not impair, in

any manner, the essential functions or characteristics of the project, including but not limited to

service life, economy of operation, ease of maintenance, desired appearance, or design and safety

standards.

B. Cost Reduction Proposals shall contain the following information:

1. A description of both the existing Contract requirements for performing the Work and

the proposed changes, together with advantages and disadvantages of each changed

item.

2. An itemization of the Contract requirements (e.g., plans and specifications) that must

be changed if the proposal is adopted.

3. Justification for changes in function or characteristics of each affected item, and the

effect of the change on the performance of the completed Work.

4. A detailed estimate of the cost of performing the Work under the existing Contract

and under the proposed change. The estimates of cost shall be determined in the same

manner as if the Work were to be paid for on a force account basis as provided in,

“Force Account Payment” contained elsewhere in the Contract Documents.



5. A statement of the time within which the District must make a decision thereon.

6. The Bid items of Work affected by the proposed changes, including any quantity

variation attributable thereto.

7. Contractor’s submittal of its Cost Reduction Proposal shall include a certification by

Contractor as follows: “Under the penalty of law for perjury or falsification and with

specific reference to the California False Claims Act, Government Code Section

12650 et seq., the undersigned hereby certifies that the information contained herein

is a true, accurate and complete statement of all features relating to the Cost Reduction

Proposal.”

C. The provisions of this section shall not be construed to require the District to consider any Cost

Reduction Proposal, which may be submitted hereunder. The District will not be liable to the

Contractor for failure to accept or act upon any Cost Reduction Proposal submitted pursuant to

this section nor for any delays to the Work attributable to any such proposal. If a Cost Reduction

Proposal is similar to a change in the plans or specifications under consideration by the District

for the project at the time said proposal is submitted, the District will not accept such proposal,

and the District reserves the right to make such changes without compensation to the Contractor

under the provisions of this section.

The Contractor shall continue to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract until an approved Contract Change Order, incorporating the cost reduction proposal have

been issued. If an approved Contract Change Order has not been issued by the date upon which

the Contractor’s Cost Reduction Proposal specifies that a decision thereon should be made, or

such other date as the Contractor may subsequently have specified in writing, such Cost

Reduction Proposal shall be deemed rejected.

The District shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of a cost reduction proposal and of the

estimated net savings in construction costs from the adoption of all or any part of such proposal.

In determining the estimated net savings, District reserves the right to disregard the Contract bid

prices if in the judgment of the District, such prices do not represent a fair measure of the value

of Work to be performed or to be deleted.

The District reserves the right, where it deems such action appropriate, to require the Contractor

to share in the District’s costs of investigating a Cost Reduction Proposal submitted by the

Contractor as a condition of considering such proposal. Where such a condition is imposed, the

Contractor shall indicate his acceptance thereof in writing, and such acceptance shall constitute

full authority for the District to deduct amounts payable to the District from any monies due or

that may become due to the Contractor under the Contract.

D. If the Contractor’s Cost Reduction Proposal is accepted in whole or in part, such acceptance will

be by an approved Contract Change Order, which shall specifically state that it is executed

pursuant to this Section. Such change order shall incorporate the changes in the plans and

specifications which are necessary to permit the Cost Reduction Proposal or such part of it as has

been accepted to be put into effect, and shall include any conditions upon which the District’s

approval thereof is based if the approval of the District is conditional.



The change order shall also set forth the estimated net savings in construction costs attributable

to the cost reduction proposal effectuated by the change order, and shall further provide that the

Contractor be paid fifty percent (50%) of said estimated net savings amount. The Contractor’s

cost of preparing the Cost Reduction Proposal and the District’s costs of investigating same,

including any portion thereof paid by the Contractor, shall be excluded from consideration in

determining the estimated net savings in construction costs.

The Contractor is not entitled to share in either concurrent, collateral or future savings arising

from the Cost Reduction Proposal. Collateral savings are those measurable net reductions in

District’s costs of operation that result from the Cost Reduction Proposal, including maintenance,

logistics, and District-furnished equipment.

Acceptance of the Cost Reduction Proposal and performance of the Work thereunder shall not

adjust the time of completion of the Contract unless specifically provided for in the approved

Contract Change Order authorizing the use of the Cost Reduction Proposal.

The amount specified to be paid to the Contractor in the approved Contract Change Order which

effectuates a Cost Reduction Proposal shall constitute full compensation to the Contractor for the

Cost Reduction Proposal and the performance of the Work thereof pursuant to the change order.

The Contractor shall include appropriate Cost Reduction Proposal provisions in all Subcontracts

of $5,000 or greater, and may include those provisions in any subcontract. Subcontracts shall

state that any benefits accruing to the Contractor as a result of an accepted Cost Reduction

Proposal initiated by a Subcontractor shall be shared by the Contractor and the Subcontractor in

a manner specified in the agreement between them.

END OF PART 6



PART 7 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION

7.01 TIMELY NOTICE OF CLAIM

A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing written notice to District of any claims for

additional compensation and/or time in accordance with the provisions of the Contract

Documents. It is District’s intent to investigate and attempt to resolve any Contractor claims

before the Contractor has performed any disputed Work. In addition, District desires to mitigate

its responsibility (if any) for any Contractor claims before the disputed Work is performed.

Therefore, Contractor’s failure to provide written notice within the time limitations set forth below

shall constitute a waiver of Contractor’s claims for additional compensation and/or time.

7.02 NOTICE OF POTENTIAL CLAIM

A. The Contractor shall not be entitled to the payment of any additional compensation for any cause,

including any act, or failure to act, by the District (including the failure or refusal to issue a Change

Order), or the happening of any event, thing or occurrence, unless he shall have given the District

due written notice of potential claim as hereinafter specified, provided, however, that compliance

with this section shall not be a prerequisite as to matters within the scope of the Contract Change

Order protest provisions in, “Protest Procedure,” or the notice provisions in, “Delays and

Extension of Time,” elsewhere in these Contract Documents, nor to any claim which is based on

differences in measurement or errors of computation as to correct quantities.

B. The written notice of potential claim shall set forth the reasons for which the Contractor believes

additional compensation will or may be due, the nature of the costs involved and, insofar as

possible, the amount of the potential claim. If based on an act or failure to act by the District,

such notice shall be given to the District prior to the time that the Contractor has started

performance of the Work giving rise to the potential claim for additional compensation, but in no

event more than three (3) days after the occurrence that gives rise to the Contractor’s claim. In

all other cases, notice shall be given within three (3) days after the happening of the event or

occurrence giving rise to the potential claim.

C. The Contractor hereby agrees that he shall have no right to additional compensation for any claim

that may be based on any such act, failure to act, event, thing or occurrence for which a written

notice of potential claim as herein required was not timely filed.

D. If there is a dispute over any claim, the Contractor shall continue to Work during the dispute

resolution process in a diligent and timely manner as directed by the District, and shall be

governed by all applicable provisions of the Contract.

E. The Contractor shall maintain cost records of all Work, which is the basis of any dispute. On a

daily basis, Contractor shall submit to District completed daily forms, the format of which will be

supplied by District, with respect to the Contractor’s costs of performing the disputed work. These

daily forms shall itemize all Contractor costs in performing the disputed work, including, but not

limited to, all costs relating to materials, labor and equipment with respect to the disputed work.

These daily forms shall provide names or identification and classification of affected workmen,

the hourly rate of pay and hours worked, and also the size, type, and identification number of

equipment and hours operated. Said daily work forms shall be duly signed and verified by the

Contractor or his authorized representative. District’s receipt of Contractor’s daily forms shall



not constitute an approval of the Contractor’s protest. Contractor’s failure to submit the daily

forms on a daily basis shall constitute a waiver of Contractor’s right to claim any additional

compensation for the disputed work.

F. Each Contractor claim shall include full and complete information concerning the Claim.

Contractor shall provide a clear, concise recital of the basis, upon which the claim is asserted,

including a designation of the provisions of the Contract Documents upon which the claim is

based. Contractor shall also include a statement as to the amount of time and/or compensation

sought pursuant to the claim; if Contractor’s claim arises from an ongoing occurrence, Contractor

shall so state in its claim including a description of the specific Work activities affected by the

claim. All costs, expenses or damages and extensions of time claimed shall be described in

reasonable detail under the circumstances together with complete supporting documentation.

G. The District will review any timely claim submitted by Contractor. In conducting this review, the

District shall have the right to require the Contractor to submit such additional or supporting

documents, data and other information as the District may require. The District will review any

timely claim within fifteen (15) days after receipt by the District of all requested additional or

supporting documents.

H. If an agreement can be reached which resolves the Contractor claim, the parties will execute a

Contract Change Order to document the resolution of the claim. If the parties cannot reach

agreement with respect to the Contractor claim, Contractor shall still be obligated to comply with

the claim identification provisions identified in the section entitled “Final Payment and Claims”,

elsewhere in these General Conditions.

I. In the event that a subcontractor or supplier asserts a claim against the Contractor under its

agreement with Contractor, the subcontractor or supplier shall look only to the Contractor for any

payment or relief. Subcontractors and suppliers shall have no claim or cause of action against the

District if such claim or cause of action arises out of the subcontractor’s or supplier’s agreement

with Contractor.

7.03 PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE CLAIM PROCEDURE

Contractor is directed to Section 7.02 of these contract documents regarding the notice provisions

applicable to a construction claim. In the event the District and Contractor cannot resolve claims

of three hundred seventy-five thousand dollars ($375,000) or less, the claims provisions of

California Public Contract Code sections 20104-20104.6 shall apply, which provisions are

summarized below. Any claim submitted by the Contractor shall be in writing and include the

documents necessary to substantiate the claim.

For claims of less than fifty thousand dollars ($50,000), the District shall respond in writing

within forty-five (45) days of receipt of the claim, or request additional documentation supporting

the claim within thirty (30) days of receipt of the claim. If additional documentation is requested,

District will respond in writing to the claim within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the additional

documentation, or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the claimant in producing

the additional information, whichever is greater.

For claims of over $50,000 and less than or equal to $375,000, District shall respond in writing

within sixty (60) days of receipt of the claim, or request additional documentation supporting the



claim within thirty (30) days of receipt of the claim. If additional documentation is requested,

District will respond in writing to the claim within thirty (30) days of receipt of the additional

documentation, or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the claimant in producing

the additional information, whichever is greater.

7.04 CLAIMS PROCESS (PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE § 9204)

A claim is a separate demand by the Contractor for one or more of the following: (i) a time extension

for relief from damages or penalties for delay, (ii) payment of money or damages arising from work

done pursuant to the contract for a public work, or (iii) payment of an amount disputed by the

District. A claim must be sent by registered or certified mail, and upon receipt of a claim sent by

registered or certified mail, the District will review it and, within 45 days, provide a written

statement identifying the disputed and undisputed portions of the claim. The 45-day period may be

extended by mutual agreement or, until after the next Board of Directors meeting, if the Board must

approve the disputed and undisputed portions of the claim. Any payment due on the undisputed

portion of the claim must be processed within 60 days.

If the claimant disputes the District’s written response or if the District fails to respond to a claim

within the time prescribed, the claimant must demand a meet and confer for settlement of the issues

in dispute. The District must then schedule a meet and confer conference within thirty (30) days

for settlement of the dispute. Any disputed portion of the claim that remains in dispute after the

meet and confer conference will be subject to nonbinding mediation, as specified. The District can

also require arbitration of disputes under private arbitration or the Public Works Contract

Arbitration Program, if the mediation does not resolve the dispute.

If the District fails to respond to a claim from a contractor within the above referenced time periods,

the claim is deemed rejected in its entirety. Unpaid claim amounts which are not paid in a timely

manner shall accrue interest at 7% per annum.

To read the full AB 626 language, please refer to: http://www.leginfo.ca.gov/pub/15-

16/bill/asm/ab_0601-0650/ab_626_cfa_20160627_172317_sen_comm.html

END OF PART 7

http://www.leginfo.ca.gov/pub/15-16/bill/asm/ab_0601-0650/ab_626_cfa_20160627_172317_sen_comm.html

http://www.leginfo.ca.gov/pub/15-16/bill/asm/ab_0601-0650/ab_626_cfa_20160627_172317_sen_comm.html



PART 8 - TIME

8.01 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS TO THE WORK

A. Contractor must complete all Work within the time specified in Division 1 of these Contract

Documents. The Contractor will be granted an extension of time and will not be assessed with

liquidated damages or the cost of engineering and inspection for any delay in substantially

completing the Work (or parts thereof) beyond the time set forth in the Special Provisions

elsewhere in the Contract Documents, provided that such delay was caused by unforeseeable

causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor. Examples of

such causes include acts of public enemy, fire, floods, abnormal weather (as described below),

tidal waves, earthquakes, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, labor disputes and freight

embargoes fire, changes made pursuant to the provisions of “Changes in Work” elsewhere in the

Contract Documents or acts or neglect of the District not contemplated by the Contract

Documents. In all cases, any extension of time is conditioned on the following:

1. That the cause is not due to the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and the

Contractor has taken reasonable precautions to prevent the delays and minimize the

effects thereof; and

2. That the Contractor notifies the DDR in writing within three (3) days from the

beginning of such delay specifying the nature of the delay and the measures that have

been or will be taken to prevent or minimize the delay. Failure to submit written

notice within this time period shall constitute an absolute waiver of any claim for a

time extension.

B. No extension of time will be granted for a delay caused by a shortage of materials, unless the

Contractor furnishes to the District documentary proof that he has diligently made every effort to

obtain such materials from all known sources within reasonable reach of the work and further

proof, in the form of schedule data as required in “Project Scheduling Requirements” elsewhere

in the Contract Documents, that the inability to obtain such materials when originally planned did

in fact cause a delay in final completion of the entire Work which could not be compensated for

by revising the sequence of the Contractor’s operations. Only the physical shortage of material

will be considered as a cause for extension of time, and no consideration will be given to any

claim that material could not be obtained at a reasonable, practical or economical cost or price,

unless it is shown to the satisfaction of the District that such material could have been obtained

only at exorbitant prices entirely out of line with current rates, taking into account the quantities

involved and the usual practices in obtaining such quantities.

C. The term “shortage of materials,” as used in this section, shall apply only to materials, articles,

parts or equipment which are standard items and shall not apply to materials, parts, articles or

equipment which are processed, made, constructed, fabricated or manufactured to meet the

specific requirements of the Contract Documents.

D. No extensions of time will be granted for delays that have no measurable impact on the completion

of the Work (or parts thereof) under the Contract Documents. When extensions of time are

granted, they will be limited to the period equivalent to the actual number of days lost on the

critical path or controlling operations of the Construction Schedule, taking into account the extent

to which that delay could be decreased by reasonable mitigation measures by the Contractor. All



requests for extensions of time must be supported with a critical path analysis showing the critical

path and impacts to it. Contractor’s failure to submit this analysis will be sufficient cause for

denial of any request for a time extension.

E. Within a reasonable period of time after the Contractor submits the notice and information

required by this section, the District will determine whether an extension of time is justified and,

if so, the number of days for the extension.

F. Abnormal weather, if services are to be performed outside, may be a valid basis for a time

extension under the Contract. The term “abnormal weather” is defined as the occurrence of both

of the following two (2) conditions: (i) rain conditions that exceed the criteria set forth

immediately below; and (ii) rain conditions that cause the below specified impact to Contractor’s

operations.

G. Time extensions caused by abnormal weather, if applicable, will be allowed only if there is rain

in excess of 0.5 inch in a 24 hours period, as measured at the EW0993 Oakland weather station

maintained by the National Weather Service, for a number of days that exceeds the number of

allowable rain days for each particular month, as specified below:

Month # of Rain Days Month # of Rain Days

January 3 July 0

February 3 August 0

March 2 September 0

April 1 October 1

May 1 November 1

June 0 December 2

H. In addition, before a time extension may be granted for abnormal weather, Contractor must

establish that the rain either significantly impacted at least 60% of the planned work of the

controlling operations for a particular day or prohibited at least five (5) hours of work on the

controlling operations planned for that day. Contractor shall employ reasonable methods to

mitigate the impact of abnormal weather (i.e., dewatering, protection of site, etc.) The occurrence

of rain during non-work hours or having minimal impact to work on the controlling operation

shall not constitute a day of abnormal weather.

In the event that the project experiences favorable weather for a particular month (e.g., a number

of actual rain days in a month less than that indicated in the above table for allowable rain days

per month), the additional float resulting from such favorable weather shall accrue to the project.

I. Any Contractor claim for damages or additional compensation based on delay shall be limited to

only those circumstances where the Contractor has fulfilled each of the following three (3)

requirements:

1. Contractor has established its entitlement to a time extension pursuant to the

provisions described above regarding delay and extensions to the Work.

2. The delay was caused solely by the District by District’s issuance of changes made

pursuant to the provisions of “Changes in Work” elsewhere in these General

Conditions or by or acts or neglect of the District.



3. The delay was unreasonable under the circumstances and not within the

contemplation of the parties.

It is expressly understood and agreed that delays caused by the District will be non-

compensable when there are concurrent delays caused by the Contractor. Also,

Contractor shall have no entitlement to additional compensation for any delay where

there have been concurrent delays caused by non-compensable delays, including, but

not limited to, fire, floods, tidal waves, earthquakes, epidemics, quarantine

restrictions, strikes, labor disputes and freight embargoes.

In the event that the Contractor submits a claim for additional costs associated with

overhead, the Contractor shall, within sixty (60) calendar days of the DDR’s written

request, submit to the DDR an audit examination and report performed by an

independent Certified Public Accountant of the Contractor’s actual unanticipated

overhead costs. The independent Certified Public Accountant’s audit examination

shall be performed in conformance with the requirements of the American Institute of

Certified Public Accountants Attestation Standards. The audit examination and report

shall depict the Contractor’s project and company-wide financial records and shall

specify the actual overall average daily rates for both field and home office overhead

for the entire duration of the project, and whether the costs have been properly

allocated. The rates of field and home office overhead shall exclude all unallowable

costs as determined in the Federal Acquisition Regulations, 48 CFR, Chapter 1, Part

31. The audit examination shall determine if the rates of field and home office

overhead:

a. are allowable in conformance with the requirements of the Federal

Acquisition Regulations, 48 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 31;

b. are adequately supported by reliable documentation; and

c. related solely to the project under examination.

Upon the DDR’s written request, the Contractor shall make its financial records

available for audit by the District for the purpose of verifying the actual rate of

overhead specified in the audit submitted by the Contractor. The overhead specified

in the audit, submitted by the Contractor, will be subject to approval by the DDR.

J. Right of Way Delays

If, through the failure of the District to acquire or clear the right of way as specified in the Contract

Documents (if applicable), and the Contractor sustains loss which could not have been avoided

by the judicious handling of its Work, Contractor will be entitled to such amount as the District

may find to be fair and reasonable for such part of the Contractor’s actual loss, as, in the opinion

of the District was unavoidable, determined as follows:

1. Compensation for idle time of equipment will be determined in the same manner as

determinations are made for equipment used in the performance of extra work paid

for on a force account basis with the following exceptions:



1. The time for which such compensation will be paid will be the actual

normal working hours during which such delay conditions exists, but in

no case will exceed eight (8) hours in any one day.

2. The days for which compensation will be paid will be each calendar day

of the work week (defined elsewhere in the Contract Documents), and

legal holidays, during the existence of such delay, except that when rental

of the equipment is paid for under the provisions in “Force Account

Payment – Equipment”, no payment will be made for right of way delays

in accordance with the provisions in this section.

3. Actual loss shall be understood to include no items of expense other than

idle time of personnel, cost of extra moving of equipment, and cost of

longer hauls. Compensation for idle time of equipment will be determined

as provided in this section, “Delays and Time Extensions”, and

compensation for idle time of personnel will be determined pursuant to

“Force Account – Labor” elsewhere in the Contract Documents, and no

markup will be added in either case for overhead and profit. The cost of

extra moving of equipment and the cost of longer hauls will be paid for as

extra work as provided pursuant to “Changes to the Work” elsewhere in


4. In addition to the compensation described above, if performance of the

Contractor’s Work is delayed as a result of the failure of the District to

acquire or clear right of way, an extension of time determined pursuant to

the provisions in “Delays and Extensions to the Work”, will be granted.

8.02 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

A. It is agreed by the parties to the Contract that in case all the Work called for under the Contract in

all parts and requirements is not completed within the number of calendar days as set forth in

Section 00 52 13, damage will be sustained by the District, and that it is and will be impracticable

and extremely difficult to ascertain and determine the actual damage which the District will

sustain in the event of and by reason of such delay; and it is therefore agreed that the Contractor

will pay to the District, the sum of one hundred dollars ($100) per day for each and every calendar

days delay in completing the Work in excess of the number of calendar days prescribed and the

number of additional calendar days, if any, authorized by Contract Change Order; and the

Contractor agrees to pay said liquidated damages herein provided for, and further agrees that the

District may deduct the amount thereof from any monies due or that may become due the

Contractor under the Contract.

END OF PART 8



PART 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9.01 SCOPE OF PAYMENT

A. In consideration for the satisfactory performance of Work under the Contract Documents, District

shall pay Contractor the Contract Price identified in the Contract. The Contract Price may not be

changed except as specified in the Contract Documents.

If the “payment” clause in the Contract Documents relating to any unit price in the bid schedule

requires that said unit price cover and be considered compensation for certain work or material

essential to the item, this same work or material will not also be measured nor paid for under any

other pay item which may appear elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

9.02 PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A. Within fifteen (15) days after the effective date in the Notice to Proceed, but in any event prior to

the Contractor’s first Application for Payment, Contractor shall submit to District a detailed

Schedule of Values included with the bid.

Upon its approval, the Schedule of Values will form a basis for determining the compensation

payable to Contractor based on his actual progress of Work with respect to each Lump Sum Bid

Item. The District prior to any progress payment being made must approve the Schedule of

Values.

At the DDR's discretion the approved Schedule of Values may be used as the basis of calculating

the adjustment in compensation for a lump sum bid item due to changes ordered by the DDR.

When an ordered change increases or decreases the quantities shown in an approved Schedule of

Values, at the DDR’s discretion, the adjustment in compensation may be determined in the same

manner specified for increases and decreases in the quantity of a bid item of work in accordance

with Section 6.1 C 1, “Unit Prices” of the General Provisions.

B. On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in the form required by the

District. Contractor’s Applications shall be based on the Schedule of Values and on the Unit

Prices submitted with Contractor’s bid. These applications shall be supported by documentation

specified in Division 1. The Contractor shall certify that the Work for which payment is requested

has been accomplished. When requested by District, Contractor shall submit receipts, invoices

and other documentation that the District requires to be furnished for purpose of evaluating the

application.

C. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 20104.50, District will pay Contractor within thirty (30)

days of its receipt of an undisputed and properly submitted Application for Payment, after

deducting all previous payments, retention, and other sums as described in the Contract

Documents. Within seven (7) days of its receipt of Contractor’s Application for Payment, District

will determine whether it complies with the provisions of the Contract Documents. As

appropriate, District will return the application to the Contractor accompanied by a document

prepared by District setting forth the reasons for the rejection. Thereafter, Contractor shall correct

and resubmit the Application for Payment. Progress payments may be withheld for Work that is

not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents.



D. The District may deduct the following from each progress payment:

1. An amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the amount claimed under any

stop payment notice or other lien filed against the Contractor, plus an amount to

provide for the reasonable cost of any litigation thereunder.

2. Any liquidated damages or assessments that have accrued as of the date of the

application for payment.

3. Any sums expended by the District in performing any of the Contractor’s obligations

under the Contract that the Contractor has failed to perform.

4. Any other sums that the District is entitled to recover from the Contractor under the

terms of the Contract including damages to District property.

5. Any sums associated with Contractor not staffing the Project with Project

representatives as required in the Special Provisions of the Contract Documents.

6. The failure of the District to deduct any of the above identified sums from a progress

payment shall not constitute a waiver of the District’s right to such sums.

9.03 RETENTION ON PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A. From each progress payment estimate, five percent (5%) will be deducted and held in retention

by the District, the remainder less any deductions described above will be paid to the Contractor

as progress payments.

B. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 22300, the successful Bidder may submit Securities in

lieu of retention payments by the District. Upon Contractor’s request, District will make payment

of funds withheld from progress payments, pursuant to the requirements of California Public

Contract Code Section 22300, if Contractor deposits in escrow with District or with a bank

acceptable to District, securities eligible for investment under California Government Code

Section 16430, bank or savings and loan certificates of deposit, interest bearing demand deposit

accounts, standby letters of credit, or any other security mutually agreed to by Contractor and

District, upon the following conditions:

1. Contractor shall bear the expenses of District and the escrow agent in connection with

the escrow deposit made.

2. Securities or certificates of deposit to be placed in escrow shall be of a value at least

equivalent to the amounts of retention to be paid to Contractor pursuant to this section.

3. Contractor shall enter into an escrow agreement satisfactory to District, which

agreement shall be substantially similar to the form provided in California Public

Contract Code Section 22300.

4. Contractor shall obtain the written consent of the surety to such agreement.



9.04 RELIEF FROM MAINTENANCE AND BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY

A. Relief from Maintenance

1. Attention is directed to “Responsibility for Work and Materials” contained elsewhere

in these General Conditions regarding Contractor’s responsibility to rebuild, replace,

repair or restore the Work in the event of any injury, loss or damage to same. Upon

written request by the Contractor, District may relieve the Contractor of the

responsibility to maintain and protect certain portions of the Work which have been

completed in all respects in accordance with the requirements of this Contract ("Relief

from Maintenance"). Portions of the Work, for which the Contractor may be granted

Relief from Maintenance, shall be identified in Division 01.

2. Relief from Maintenance, if granted, and the scope thereof shall be documented in

writing. After District’s granting of Relief from Maintenance, Contractor shall still

be obligated to perform warranty work with respect to the portions of the Work

covered by the Relief from Maintenance. In addition, District’s granting of Relief

from Maintenance shall not be construed as an acceptance by the District of any latent

defects discovered with regard to Contractor’s work. Furthermore, Contractor’s

obligations under Section 3.13, “Indemnification,” shall still remain applicable after

District’s grant of Relief from Maintenance.

3. With respect to any portion of the Work covered by a District’s granting of Relief

from Maintenance, the warranty periods called for with respect to in the Contract

Documents shall not commence until the date of Relief from Maintenance.

B. Beneficial Occupancy

1. The District may at any time notify the Contractor in writing that it intends to take

Beneficial Occupancy of any portion of the Work even though the Work may not be

Substantially Complete. Unless the reason for District’s taking Beneficial Occupancy

is that the Contractor has not completed the Work (or portions thereof) in accordance

with the Contract Time (in such event Paragraph 3, below, applies), District’s

Beneficial Occupancy shall relieve the Contractor from its responsibility for

maintenance, loss or damage to that portion of the Work for which the District has

taken Beneficial Occupancy other than that resulting from the Contractor's act or

omission, negligence willful misconduct or breach of warranty.

2. Should the Work (or portion thereof) not be completed in accordance with the

Construction Schedule within the Contract Time (as adjusted under the terms of the

Contract Documents), the District shall have the right, but not the obligation, to take

Beneficial Occupancy of the Work. In such event, Contractor shall not be entitled to

any additional compensation on account of said occupancy by District, nor shall

Contractor be relieved of any of its responsibilities under the Contract Documents,

including, without limitation, Contractor’s obligation to complete the Work in

accordance with the Construction Schedule.

3. Beneficial Occupancy shall not be deemed an acceptance of the Work. Within a

reasonable time after District provides notice that it intends to take Beneficial



Occupancy, the Contractor and the District shall make an inspection of that portion of

the Work to determine its status of completion and will prepare a list of the items

remaining to be completed or corrected before the Work has achieved Final

Completion. During any Beneficial Occupancy of the Work, the District shall allow

the Contractor reasonable access to complete or correct items on the list and to

complete other related Work.

4. District’s Beneficial Occupancy shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility

to maintain all insurance and bonds required under the Contract Documents until the

entire Project is accepted by the District.

9.05 TITLE

A. Title to Work for which progress or other payments have been made shall pass to the District at

the time of payment. To the extent that title has not previously been vested in the District by

reason of progress payments, full title shall pass to the District at time of delivery or completion

of the Work. Work to which the District has received title by reason of progress payments shall

be segregated from other Contractor and/or Subcontractor materials related to the Work and

clearly identified as District property.

B. The title transferred as above shall in each case be good and free and clear from any and all

security interests, liens, and/or other encumbrances. The Contractor shall not pledge or otherwise

encumber any item in any manner that would result in any lien, security interest, charge, and/or

claim against said items.

C. The transfer of title as specified above shall not be deemed as an acceptance of the Work by the

District, nor relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the Work in accordance with

the Contract Documents. Contractor shall still be obligated to protect the work from damage until

District’s acceptance of work.

9.06 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK

A. When Contractor believes that the entire Work is fully and finally completed, including the

satisfactory completion of inspections, tests, and documentation specified in the Contract

Documents and the completion of all punch list and clean-up items, the Contractor shall submit

to the District a written request for Final Acceptance within fifteen (15) days thereafter, specifying

that the Work is fully and finally completed and the date on which it was completed. Within

fifteen (15) days after receipt of the request for Final Acceptance, the District will inspect the

Work and will either:

1. Reject the request for Final Acceptance, specifying the defective and/or uncompleted

portions of the Work, or

2. Issue an executed Notice of Final Acceptance and record a Notice of Completion with

the County Recorder.

B. If the District rejects the request for Final Acceptance; the Contractor shall promptly remedy the

defective and/or uncompleted portions of the Work. Thereafter, the Contractor shall again submit

a written request for Final Acceptance of the Work, specifying a new date based on the date the



defective and/or uncompleted portions of the Work were corrected. Thereafter, the foregoing

procedure shall apply successively until District has verified that the Work is fully and finally

completed and given the Contractor an executed Notice of Final Acceptance. Immediately upon

and after such formal written acceptance by the District, the Contractor will be relieved of the

duty of maintaining the Work as a whole.

All warranties commence upon Final Acceptance of the Work or Relief from Maintenance,

whichever occurs first.

District’s Final Acceptance of the Work shall not be construed as an acceptance by the District of

any latent defects discovered with regard to Contractor’s work. Furthermore, Contractor’s

obligations under Section 3.13, “Indemnification,” shall still remain applicable after District’s

grant of Final Acceptance of the Work.

C. Record Documents and Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Prior to issuance of the Notice of

Final Acceptance by the District, the Contractor shall submit to the District the Record Documents

and Operation and Maintenance Manuals as specified under Division 1.

9.07 FINAL PAYMENT AND CLAIMS

A. Final payment will be made only after Contractor has achieved Final Completion of the Work

pursuant to the provisions of the section titled “Final Inspection and Acceptance of the Work”

contained elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

B. Before final payment can be made, the Contractor shall have furnished the District with the

following:

1. All As-Built drawings, catalogues, instruction sheets and information as required by


2. One signed copy of the Release as discussed below in this section and on a form

furnished by the District.

C. Within thirty (30) days of the date of the District’s Notice of Final Acceptance, the Contractor

shall prepare and submit a proposed Final Invoice, showing the proposed total amount due the

Contractor, segregated by Bid item quantities, Change Order Work, and other basis for payments;

deductions made or to be made for prior payment; and amounts previously retained. Prior

invoices and payments shall be subject to correction in the proposed Invoice for Final Payment.

Payments to the Contractor will be made only for the actual quantities of the Contract items of

work constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

Submitted with Contractor’s proposed Final Invoice shall be his final documentation with respect

to any claims that the Contractor has elected to continue to pursue; if there are no such claims,

Contractor shall include a statement that there are no outstanding claims regarding the Work. The

District shall consider no Claim filed with the proposed Final Invoice unless the Contractor has

fully complied with the conditions of the Notice of Potential Claims, Protest Procedures and

Delays and Extensions of Time sections of the Contract Documents.



D. The District will review the Contractor’s proposed Final Invoice and necessary changes or

corrections will be forwarded to the Contractor. Within ten (10) days thereafter, the Contractor

shall submit a revised proposed Final Invoice incorporating changes or corrections made by the

District together with any new claims resulting therefrom. Upon approval by the District, the

corrected proposed Final Invoice will become the approved Final Invoice.

E. If no claims are submitted with the proposed Final Invoice, and agreements are reached on all

questions regarding the proposed Final Invoice, the District in exchange for an executed release,

satisfactory in form and substance to the District as provided below, will pay the entire sum found

due on the approved application. However, the District will withhold sums sufficient to pay all

unsettled claims for which stop payment notices have been filed pursuant to Section 9350 et seq.

of the California Civil Code, together with the reasonable cost of any litigation thereunder.

F. If the Contractor does submit claims with the proposed Final Invoice, then upon final

determination of all the Contractor’s claims, the District will pay the entire sum found due upon

the final invoice, including the amount, if any, allowed on claims, except that the District will

withhold sums sufficient to pay all unsettled claims for which stop payment notices have been

filed pursuant to Section 9350 et seq. of the California Civil Code, together with the reasonable

cost of any litigation thereunder.

Claims filed by the Contractor shall be fully supported and made in sufficient detail to enable

District to ascertain whether the basis and amount of said claims are valid. If additional

information or details are required by the District to determine the validity of the claims,

Contractor shall furnish such further information or details so that District receives the

information or details no later than seven (7) days after receipt of the written request from the

District. Failure to submit such information and details to the District within the time specified

will be sufficient cause for denying the claim.

Contractor shall maintain and submit full and complete records of the costs and additional time

incurred for the work for which a claim for additional compensation is made. District or its

designated claim investigator shall have access to any additional records as may be required by

the District to determine the facts and contentions involved in the claims. Failure to permit access

shall be sufficient cause for denying the claims.

A notarized certificate indicating the following language shall accompany claims submitted by

the Contractor:

Under the penalty of perjury or falsification and with specific reference to the

California False Claims Act, Government Code Section 12650 et seq., the

undersigned hereby certifies that the claim submitted herewith for additional

compensation and time, if any, made with respect to the Work on this Contract is

a true and accurate statement of the actual costs incurred and time sought, and is

fully documented and supported under the Contract between Contractor and

District.



Name

Title

Date

Notary

Failure to submit the notarized certificate will be sufficient cause for denying the claim.

Any claim for overhead type expenses or costs, in addition to being certified as stated

above, shall be supported by an audit report of an independent Certified Public Accountant.

Any such overhead claim shall also be subject to audit by the District, and Contractor shall

provide all records requested by the District in performing the audit.

Any costs or expenses incurred by the District in reviewing or auditing any claims that are

not supported by the Contractor’s cost accounting or other records shall be deemed to be

damages incurred by the District, shall be to the extent allowed under the California False

Claims Act, or other applicable law.

G. The release from the Contractor shall be from any and all claims arising from the Work under and

in connection with the Agreement and shall release and waive any claims against the District.

The release shall be accompanied by a certification by the Contractor.

1. That it has resolved any claims made by Subcontractors, Suppliers and other against

the Contractor or the Project.

2. That it has no reason to believe that any party has a valid claim against the Contractor

or the Project which has not been communicated in writing by the Contractor to the

District with the certification; and

3. That all warranties and guarantees are in full force and effect. The release and the

certification shall survive Final Payment.

H. Final payment will be made within thirty (30) days after receipt of an approved final invoice and

other required submittals referenced above and determination of all Contractor’s claims, or sixty

(60) days after acceptance of the work by the District, whichever is later, provided, however, that

if an approved final invoice has not been submitted within sixty (60) days after acceptance of the

work by the District, the District may elect to make payment of sums not in dispute without

prejudice to the right of either the District or the Contractor in connection with such disputed

sums.

The District may withhold from the Final Payment an amount not to exceed one hundred fifty

percent (150%) of any amount in dispute between the District and the Contractor.

I. The making of final payment shall not operate to release the Contractor or his sureties from

obligations arising under this Contract, the Contract bonds and warranties as herein provided.

Specifically, the making of final payment shall not constitute a waiver and release of claims by

the District arising from:



1. Unsettled or future liens

2. Failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents

3. The terms of any warranties required by or contained in the Contract Documents

4. The right to any insurance proceeds or the right to make any insurance or bond claims

5. Any claims with respect to Contractor’s obligation of indemnity with respect to

claims, asserted by third parties, or

6. Any latent deficiencies with the Work or Contractor’s fraud.

9.08 STOP PAYMENT NOTICES

A. The District will retain and withhold from payment to the Contractor sufficient sums to cover stop

payment notices filed pursuant to Section 9350 et seq. of the California Civil Code, including an

amount to provide for the reasonable cost of any litigation thereunder.

END OF PART 9



PART 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

10.01 SUBSURFACE EXCAVATIONS, NOTIFICATION

A. The Contractor shall contact the regional notification center, “Underground Service Alert,” and

schedule his Work to allow ample time for the center to notify its members and, if necessary, for

any member to field locate and mark its facilities. Without limiting the foregoing, Contractor’s

attention is directed to Government Code Sections 4216 to 4216.9, and in particular Section

4216.2, which provides, in part:

“Except in an emergency, every person planning to conduct any excavation shall contact

the appropriate regional notification center at least two (2) working days, but no more

than fourteen (14) calendar days, prior to commencing that excavation, if the excavation

will be conducted in an area which is known, or reasonably should be known, to contain

subsurface installations other than the underground facilities owned or operated by the

excavator, and, if practical, the excavator shall delineate with white paint or other suitable

markings the area to be excavated. The regional notification center shall provide an

inquiry identification number to the person who contacts the center and shall notify any

member, if known, who has a subsurface installation in the area of the proposed

excavation.”

10.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY PLAN

A. Attention is directed to California Labor Code Section 6705. At least five (5) days in advance of

excavation of any trench five feet or more in depth, the Contractor shall submit Working Drawings

to the DDR showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping and other provisions to be made for

worker protection from the hazard of caving ground during the excavation of such trench or

trenches. If such Working Drawings vary from the shoring system standards established by the

Cal-OSHA Construction Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety, the plan shall be

prepared and signed by a civil or structural engineer registered in the State of California. Nothing

in this section shall be deemed to allow the use of a shoring, sloping or protective system less

effective than that required by the Cal-OSHA Construction Safety Orders of the Division of

Industrial Safety.

Contractor’s Working Drawings shall be subject to approval insofar as the details affect the

character of the finished Work and for compliance with design requirements applicable to the

construction when specified or called for, but details of the design will be left to the Contractor

who shall be responsible for the successful construction of the Work. The DDR shall approve

working Drawings before any Work involving such drawings is performed. It is expressly

understood that approval of the Working Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his

responsibility under the Contract of his obligations under the Contract Documents.

10.03 HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS AND WASTES

A. The Contractor shall bear full and exclusive responsibility for any release of hazardous or non-

hazardous chemicals or substances during the course of the Work. The Contractor shall

immediately report any such release to the District. The Contractor shall be solely responsible

for all claims and expenses associated with the response to, removal and remediation of the

release, including, without limit, payment of any fines or penalties levied against the District by



any agency as a result of such release and shall hold harmless, indemnify and defend the District

from any claims arising from such release. For purposes of this section only, the term “claims”

shall include:

1. All notices, orders, directives, administrative or judicial proceedings, fines, penalties,

fees or charges imposed by any governmental agency with jurisdiction, and

2. Any claim, cause of action, or administrative or judicial proceeding brought against

the District, its directors, employees, and agents for any loss, cost (including

reasonable attorney’s fees), damage or liability, sustained or suffered by any person

or entity, including the District.

If the performance of the Work creates any hazardous wastes, those wastes shall be properly

disposed of according to federal, state and local laws, at the expense of the Contractor. The

Contractor shall dispose of the wastes under its own EPA Generator Number. In no event shall

the District be identified as the generator. The Contractor shall notify the District of any such

hazardous wastes and the District reserves the right to a copy of the results of any tests conducted

on the wastes and, at its cost, to perform additional tests or examine those wastes, prior to its

disposition. The Contractor shall hold harmless, indemnify and defend the District from any

claims arising from the disposal of the hazardous wastes, regardless of the absence of negligence

or other malfeasance by Contractor. Disposal of all Hazardous Materials must be done in

accordance with all laws and regulations. Copies of a required regulatory documentation

including copies of final manifests shall be supplied to the District

10.04 PUBLIC SAFETY

A. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for public safety during the performance of its

Work, and all costs arising therefrom shall be included in the Contract Price. Whenever the

Contractor’s operations create a condition hazardous to traffic or to the public, he shall furnish,

erect and maintain, at his expense, such fences, barricades, lights, signs and other devices and

take such other protective measures as are necessary to prevent accidents or damage or injury to

the public. The Contractor shall establish the pedestrian detours with comparable lighting to the

original pedestrian areas. The Contractor shall arrange for such flaggers as are necessary to give

adequate warning to traffic or to the public of any dangerous conditions affecting traffic. For

Work in a public right-of-way, the Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of the

State, County or local agency that owns the right-of-way.

B. The Contractor shall promptly and fully comply with and carry out, and shall without separate

charge therefor to the District, all safety and first aid requirements prescribed by all applicable

Federal, State and local laws and regulations, rules and orders. The Work shall be done in a safe

manner; and Contractor shall safeguard the safety and health of its employees, Subcontractors,

and the people of local communities. Contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring that its

Subcontractors comply with the provisions of this section.

Upon the failure of the Contractor to comply with any of the requirements of this section, the

District shall have the authority, but not the duty, to stop the Work until such failure is remedied.

Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Time or an increase in the

Contract Price due to any such suspensions.



C. When required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall construct, maintain and remove

detours for the use of public traffic, without additional cost to the District, unless separate payment

is specified in the Special Provisions.

The failure or refusal of the Contractor to construct and maintain detours at the proper time shall

be sufficient cause for closing down the work until such detours are in satisfactory condition for

use by public traffic.

D. Due care shall be exercised to avoid injury to existing improvements or facilities, utility facilities,

adjacent property and trees, shrubs and other plants that are not to be removed.

E. Trees, shrubs and other plants that are not to be removed, and pole lines, fences, signs, survey

markers and monuments, buildings and structures, conduits, pipe lines, sewer and waterlines,

highway facilities, and any other improvements or facilities, under or above ground, that are

within or adjacent to the work limit line shall be protected from injury or damage, and the

Contractor shall provide and install suitable safeguards to protect such objects from injury or

damage. If such objects are injured or damaged by reason of the Contractor’s operations, they

shall be replaced or restored at the Contractor’s expense. The facilities shall be replaced or

restored to a condition as good as when the Contractor entered upon the work site, or as good as

required by the Contract Documents if any such objects are a part of the Work. The District may

make or cause to be made such temporary repairs as are necessary to restore to service any

damaged facility. The cost of such repairs shall be borne by the Contractor, and the costs may be

deducted from any monies due or to become due to the Contractor under the Contract.

F. The fact that any underground facility may not be shown on the Contract Plans shall not relieve

the Contractor of his responsibility pursuant to “Non-District Facilities,” elsewhere in the

Contract Documents. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility, pursuant thereto, to ascertain the

location of such underground improvements or facilities, which may be subject to damage by

reason of his operations.

G. Full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and for

doing all the Work involved in protecting or repairing property as specified in this section, shall

be considered as included in the prices paid for the various Contract items of work and no

additional compensation will be allowed therefore.

10.05 EMERGENCIES

A. In an emergency affecting the safety of life, the Work, or adjoining property, the Contractor,

without special instructions or authorization from the District, shall act at his discretion to prevent

such threatened loss or injury. In such an emergency, the Contractor may perform such additional

work as is reasonably required. Any compensation claimed by the Contractor on account of Work

performed pursuant to an emergency shall be determined in accordance with the provisions

relating to Force Account payment contained elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

END OF PART 10



PART 11 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

11.01 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED

A. The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed concerning all requirements of law, including

but not limited to all State and Federal laws and county and municipal ordinances and regulations

which in any manner affect those engaged or employed in the Work, the materials used in the

Work, or which in any way affect the conduct of the Work, and of all such orders and decrees of

bodies or tribunals having any jurisdiction or authority over the same. If any discrepancy or

inconsistency is discovered in the Contract Documents for the Work in relation to any such

requirements, the Contractor shall immediately report the same to the District in writing.

The laws of the State of California shall govern the Contract Documents.

If any part of the Contract Documents is declared invalid by a court of law, such decision will not

affect the validity of the remaining portion, which shall remain in full force. In the event of a

dispute or breach of contract, venue shall be in Alameda County, California.

11.02 RIGHTS IN LAND AND IMPROVEMENTS

A. The Contractor shall make no arrangements with any person or entity to permit occupancy or use

of any land, structure or building within the limits of the Work, for any purpose whatsoever, either

with or without compensation, in conflict with any agreement between the District and any third

party District, former District or tenant of such land, structure or buildings. The Contractor shall

not occupy District-owned property outside the limit of the Work shown on the Contract Drawings

unless he obtains prior approval.

11.03 ANTITRUST CLAIMS

A. The Contractor’s attention is directed to the following provision of Public Contract Code Section

7103.5(b), which shall be applicable to the Contractor and his subcontractors:

“In entering into a public works contract or a sub-contract to supply goods, services

or materials pursuant to a public works contract, the Contractor or subcontractor

offers and agrees to assign to the awarding body all right, title and interest in and

to all causes of action it may have under Section 4 of the Clayton Act (15 U.S.C.

Sec. 15) or under the Cartwright Act (Chapter 2 [commencing with Section 16700]

of Part 2 of Division 7 of the Business and Professions Code), arising from

purchases of goods, services or materials pursuant to the public works contract or

the sub-contract. This assignment shall be made and become effective at the time

the awarding body tenders final payment to the Contractor, without further

acknowledgement by the parties.”

11.04 THIRD PARTY RIGHTS

A. No provisions of the Contract Documents shall in any way inure to the benefit of any third party

(including the public at large) so as to constitute such person a third party beneficiary of the

Contract or of any one or more of the terms and conditions of the Contract or otherwise give rise

to any cause of action in any person not a party to the Contract, except as expressly provided

elsewhere in the Contract Documents.



B. Pursuant to Public Contract Code section 9201, District shall have full authority to compromise

or otherwise settle any third-party claim relating to the Contract at any time.

C. District shall provide for timely notification to the Contractor of the receipt of any third-party

claim, relating to the contract. Notice shall be in writing and will be provided within thirty (30)

days.

D. District shall be entitled to recover its reasonable costs incurred in providing the notification

required by subdivision C.

11.05 ASSIGNMENT

A. The performance of the Contract may not be assigned except upon the written consent of the

District. Consent will not be given to any proposed assignment, which would relieve the original

Contractor or his surety of their responsibilities under the Contract, nor will the District consent

to any assignment of a part of the Work under the Contract.

The Contractor may assign monies due or to become due him under the Contract and such

assignment will be recognized by the District, if given proper notice thereof, to the extent

permitted by law, but any assignment of monies shall be subject to all proper set-offs in favor of

the District and to all deductions provided for in the Contract, and particularly all money withheld,

whether assigned or not, shall be subject to being used by the District for the completion of the

Work in the event that the Contractor should be in default therein.

11.06 RIGHTS TO DRAWINGS, TECHNICAL DATA AND PATENTS

A. Shop Drawings and Working Drawings submitted to the District by the Contractor, Subcontractor

or any lower tier Subcontractor pursuant to the Contract, are the property of the District and the

District may use, and disclose in any manner and for any purpose, Shop Drawings and Working

Drawings delivered under the Contract.

B. Technical Data including manuals or instructional materials, computer or microprocessor

software which are delivered or submitted to the District by the Contractor, Subcontractor, or any

lower tier Subcontractor pursuant to the Contract are the property of the District, and the District

may use or disclose same in any manner and for any purpose.

C. Patents. The Contractor shall assume all costs arising from the use of patented materials,

equipment, devices or processes, used on or incorporated in the Work and shall indemnify and

save harmless the District, and its duly authorized representatives, from all suits at law, or actions

of every nature for, or on account of, the use of patented materials, equipment, devices or

processes. In case such materials, equipment, devices or processes are held to constitute an

infringement and their use enjoined, the Contractor, at his expense, shall:

1. Secure for the District the right to continue using said materials, equipment, devices

or processes by suspension of the injunction or by procuring a license or licenses, or

2. Replace such materials, equipment, devices or processes, or



3. Modify them so that they become non-infringing or remove the enjoined materials,

equipment, devices or processes and refund the sums paid therefor without prejudice

to any other rights of the District.

11.07 GRATUITIES AND CONFLICT OF INTEREST

A. The Contractor shall not offer or provide gratuities in the form of gifts, entertainment, loans,

meals, rewards, and/or services to representatives of the District, including but not limited to,

employees, agents, Engineering Service Consultants, Consulting Engineers and Architects,

Inspectors and/or Testing Agencies retained by the District. If it is found that the Contractor has

violated this provision, the Contract may be subject to termination for default as defined elsewhere

in these General Conditions.

B. During the term of the Contract and until the final payment has been made to the Contractor, the

Contractor shall not employ or compensate in any manner whatsoever, the District’s Directors,

Officers, employees and authorized representatives, agents, and any Engineering Service

Consultants, Consulting Engineers and Architects, Inspectors, and/or Testing Agencies retained

by the District. Any exceptions to the employment or compensation to any of the above named

parties must be made in writing by the District. If the Contractor offers or provides employment

or compensation to those named above during the term of the Contract, the Contract may be

subject to termination for default.

11.08 PROHIBITED INTERESTS

No member, officer, Director or employee of the District during his or her tenure or for one (1)

year after that tenure shall have any interest, direct or indirect, in this Contract or proceeds under

this Contract.

END OF PART 11



PART 12 - TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT

12.01 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT FOR CAUSE

A. An “Event of Default” as referred to in this section shall occur if the Contractor:

1. Fails to maintain progress of the Work in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract Documents; or

2. Fails to prosecute the Work or any of its components in accordance with the Contract

Documents; or

3. Persistently or repeatedly fails or refuses to supply sufficient properly skilled workers

or proper material to permit the performance of the Work in accordance with the

Contract Documents; or

4. Fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or Suppliers in accordance with the

respective agreements between the Contractor and Subcontractor and Contractor and

Supplier; or

5. Fails to comply with applicable laws, ordinances or rules, regulations or orders of a

public authority having jurisdiction over the Work; or

6. Abandons, assigns or sublets the Contract without approval of the District; or

7. Becomes bankrupt or is subject to appointment of a receiver on behalf of Contractor;

or

8. Otherwise is guilty of a substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.

B. Upon the District’s reasonable belief that there has been an Event of Default by Contractor,

District may elect to give the Contractor written notice thereof. The Contractor thereafter shall

cure the default as soon as possible and in no event after ten (10) days from Contractor’s receipt

of District’s written notice.

C. If the Contractor does not timely cure its default, the District may, without waiver of any of its

other rights and remedies, elect to terminate the Contract, or portion thereof.

Upon the District's election to terminate the Contract, or portion thereof, the District shall have

the right to complete the Work, or the portion involved, by whatever means and methods it deems

expedient, including the hiring of others on such terms as the District deems advisable. The

District shall have the right to take possession of the Contractor's materials, plant, tools,

equipment and property of any kind provided by or on behalf of the Contractor for the purpose of

the Work, or a portion of them, without being responsible to the Contractor for fair wear and tear.

The Contractor shall have no rights in such property during its use by the District. The District

shall not be required to obtain the lowest prices for completing the Work or a portion of it but

shall make such expenditures as, in the District's sole judgment, best accomplish such completion.

The expense of completing such Work or portion thereof, together with a reasonable charge for

engineering, managerial and administrative services, as certified by the District, shall be charged



to the Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted by the District out of such monies

as may be due or may at any time thereafter become due to the Contractor. In case such expense

is more than the sum which otherwise would have been payable to the Contractor under the

Contract, then the Contractor or his surety or sureties shall promptly pay the amount of such

excess so due. When the District terminates the Contract under this section, the Contractor shall

not be entitled to receive any further payments until the Work is completed and there has been a

final settlement of costs of completing the Work covered by such notice of default.

D. The District will issue to the Contractor a written notice specifying that the Contract, or portion

thereof, is terminated. Upon receipt of said written notice and, except as otherwise directed in

writing by the District, the Contractor shall:

1. Stop all Work under the Contract; or if partial termination, stop Work relating to the

terminated portion of the Contract;

2. Perform Work the District deems necessary to secure the work site for termination

including measures to leave the worksite in a safe condition.

3. Remove equipment from the site of Work, as specified by the District.

4. Take such action as is reasonably necessary to protect materials from damage.

5. Notify all Subcontractors and Suppliers that the Contract or portion thereof is being

terminated and that their contracts or orders are not to be further performed unless

otherwise authorized in writing by the District.

6. Provide the District with an inventory list of all materials previously produced,

purchased or ordered from suppliers for use in the Work and not yet used in the Work,

including its storage location, and such other information as the District may request;

7. Dispose of materials not used in the Work as directed by the DDR. It shall be the

Contractor's responsibility to provide the District (a) with good title to all materials

purchased by the District hereunder, including materials for which partial payment

has been made by District and (b) with bills of sale or other documents of title for

such materials;

8. Subject to the prior written approval of the District, settle all outstanding liabilities

and all claims arising out of Subcontracts or orders for materials terminated

hereunder. To the extent directed by the District, the Contractor shall assign to the

District all rights, title and interests of the Contractor under subcontracts or orders for

materials terminated hereunder. District shall be at liberty to negotiate with and

engage any Subcontractors who had contracted with Contractor for the Work.

9. Furnish the District with the documentation required to be furnished by the Contractor

under the provisions of the Contract Documents, including, on projects as to which

federal funds are involved, all documentation required under the federal requirements

included in the Contract; and

10. Take such other actions as the District may direct.



E. If only a portion of the Work has been terminated, Contractor shall perform the remainder of the

Work in conformity with the Contract Documents and in such a manner as not to interfere with

District or others in their performance and completion of the portion of the Work which was

terminated.

F. District may recover from Contractor the amount of any loss or damage, including consequential

damages, suffered or incurred as a result of Contractor’s default.

12.02 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE OF THE DISTRICT

A. The District may terminate the Contract, in whole or in part, at any time and for any reason,

whenever the District shall determine that such termination is in the best interests of the District.

Any termination which is not based on the circumstances set forth in Section 12.1 above shall be

effected by delivery to the Contractor of a notice of termination specifying the extent to which

performance of Work under the Contract is terminated, and the date upon which such termination

becomes effective. In such event, Contractor shall be paid for all actual substantiated direct costs

of materials furnished and Work performed up to the date of termination and such additional

compensation as the District deems proper and reasonable to effect termination.

B. Upon Contractor's receipt of a written notice of termination for convenience, the Contractor shall

cease Work as to those portions of the project so terminated and shall undertake the steps outlined

in Section 12.01 above.

C. In the event that the District terminates this Contract under Section 12.1 above and it is determined

for any reason that there was not sufficient cause to do so, the District's termination automatically

will convert to a termination for convenience under this Section and the terms and conditions

outlined in this Section automatically will be applied to effectuate the Contract termination. Thus,

damages to which a Contractor may be entitled as a result of an improper default termination will

be limited to the amounts provided for in this section.

END OF PART 12



AC Transit SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA Section 00 73 00 – Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 73 00

SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS

The following Sections are supplemental to the General Conditions, Section 00 72 13.

SECTION DESCRIPTION

00 73 16 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

00 73 39 DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE) REQUIREMENTS

00 73 43 PAYMENT OF PREVAILING WAGES

00 73 73 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS



AC Transit INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA Section 00 73 16– Page 1 of 5

SECTION 00 73 16

INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

1.01 INSURANCE LIMITS

A. Workers’ Compensation (per statutory requirement).

1. Policy shall include a waiver of subrogation.

B. Employer’s Liability coverage

1. One Million Dollars ($1,000,000) per accident; and

2. One Million Dollars ($1,000,000) each employee by occupational disease.

C. Commercial General Liability coverage (including but not limited to premises and operations;

contractual liability; personal and advertising injury; explosion, collapse, and underground

coverage; products and completed operations, and; broad form property damage) of not less than:

1. One Million Dollars ($1,000,000) combined single limit per occurrence or claim; and

2. Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000) general aggregate.

3. Policy shall include a Waiver of Subrogation and Additional Insured endorsement.

4. Policy will also contain either a Cross Liability endorsement or Severability of

Interests Clause.

D. Business Automobile Liability Insurance coverage of not less than:

1. Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000) combined single limit occurrence.

2. Policy shall include a Waiver of Subrogation and Additional Insured endorsement.

E. Builder's Risk/ "All-Risk" insurance policy covering the full value of the work set forth in

invitation for Bid.

F. For all insurance types: If the Contractor maintains broader coverage and/or higher limits than the

minimums shown above, the District requires and shall be entitled to the broader coverage and/or

higher limits maintained by Contractor. Any available insurance proceeds in excess of the specified

minimum limits of insurance and coverage shall be available to the District.

1.02 GENERAL

A. Any person, firm or corporation Contractor authorizes to work upon the Property, including any

subcontractor, shall be deemed to be Contractor's agent and shall be subject to all the applicable

terms of this Section. Prior to entry upon the Property by such agents, Contractor shall provide

the District with satisfactory evidence (e.g., in the form of a Certificate of Insurance) that it and

its subcontractors or other agents who will perform work under this agreement are insured in

accordance with the following. Such insurance shall remain in effect throughout the term of this

Agreement and shall be at the sole cost and expense of Contractor (or its agents or subcontractors).



1.03 WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE

A. Contractor shall at its own cost and expense procure and maintain Workers' Compensation

coverage to its employees, as required by the California Labor Code. The Contractor shall also

maintain Employer's Liability coverage with minimum limits of $1 million.

B. The policy shall contain a waiver of subrogation in favor of the District and its respective officers,

directors, employees, volunteers and agents while acting in such capacity.

C. Prior to commencing work or entering onto the Property, Contractor shall provide the DDR with

a certificate evidencing coverage, and upon request, a certified duplicate original of the policy.

The certificate and policy shall also provide that the Contractors’ policy will not be cancelled

without thirty (30) days prior written notice to the DDR.

1.04 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY

A. Contractor shall, at its own cost and expense, procure and maintain Commercial General Liability

insurance which shall include, as additional insureds, the District, and their respective directors,

council-members, officers, employees, volunteers and agents while acting in such capacity.

B. The insurance shall provide bodily injury and property damage coverage with a combined single

limit for bodily injury and property damage of at least $1 million per occurrence or claim and a

general aggregate limit of at least $2 million. This insurance shall include but not be limited to

premises and operations; contractual liability, personal and advertising injury; explosion,

collapse, and underground coverage, products and completed operations, and broad form property

damage.

C. Prior to commencing work or entering onto the Property, Contractor shall provide the DDR with

a Certificate(s) of Insurance evidencing coverage, and upon request, a certified duplicate original

of the policy

D. The policy (or policies) shall indicate that it is primary to any other insurance and the insurance

company (or companies) providing such policies shall be liable thereunder for the full amount of

any loss or claim, up to and including the total limit of liability, without right of contribution from

any of the insurance effected or which may be effected by the District. The policies shall contain

a waiver of subrogation in favor of the District and its respective directors, officers, employees,

volunteers, agents while acting in such capacity.

E. The policy shall also contain either a Cross Liability endorsement or Severability of Interests

Clause and stipulate that inclusion of the District as additional insureds shall not in any way affect

the District’s rights either as respects any claim, demand, suit or judgment made, brought or

recovered against the Contractor. Said policy shall protect Contractor and the District in the same

manner as though a separate policy had been issued to it, but nothing in said policy shall operate

to increase the insurance company's liability as set forth in its policy beyond the amount or

amounts shown or to which the insurance company would have been liable if only one interest

had been named as an insured.



1.05 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY

A. Contractor shall, at its own cost and expense, procure and maintain Business Automobile Liability

insurance providing bodily injury and property damage coverage with a combined single limit of

at least $2 million per occurrence for all owned, non-owned and hired automobiles. This

insurance shall provide contractual liability covering all motor vehicles and mobile equipment to

the extent coverage may be excluded from commercial general liability insurance. Such insurance

shall include, as additional insureds, the District and its respective directors, officers, employees,

volunteers, and agents while acting in such capacity. Said policy shall contain a waiver of

subrogation in favor of the District and its respective directors, officers, employees, volunteers,

agents while acting in such capacity. Prior to commencing work or entering onto the Property,

Contractor shall provide the Director, Procurement & Materials of the District with a Certificate(s)

of Insurance evidencing coverage, and upon request, a certified duplicate original of the policy.

B. If Contractor's property is self-insured, Contractor hereby agrees to waive any subrogation rights

it may acquire in favor of the District and its respective directors, officers, employees, volunteers,

agents while acting in such capacity.

1.06 BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE

A. Contractor will be responsible for purchasing and maintaining an “All Risks” Builder’s Risk

policy, excluding earthquake and flood coverage, insuring the interests of the District, the

Contractor and subcontractors of all tiers. The Contractor will be responsible for any deductible

under this policy on each and every loss occurrence.

B. The policy will cover all materials, supplies and equipment that are intended for construction and

specific installation in the project, while such materials, supplies and equipment are located at the

project site, in transit and while temporarily located away from the project site. The policy will

also cover all physical loss to the work on a replacement cost basis with limits no less than the

total Contract value. Any loss under the insurance shall be payable to the District and the

Contractor as their interests appear in the damaged property.

C. Any property not covered by the Builder’s Risk insurance policy, such as the Contractor’s or any

subcontractor’s personal property, shall also be the Contractor’s responsibility. The District will

not be responsible for loss or damage to property of any kind owned or leased by the Contractor,

the Contractor’s subcontractors of all tiers, and/or the Contractor’s and subcontractors’ employees

or agents.

D. The Contractor shall provide a Certificate of Insurance to the District evidencing this insurance,

as well as a waiver of subrogation endorsement.

1.07 GENERAL INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Acceptable Insurance

1. All policies will be issued by insurers acceptable to the (generally with a Best’s Rating

of an A VIII or better). Upon evidence of financial capacity satisfactory to the

District, Contractor's obligation hereunder may be satisfied in whole or in part by

adequately funded self-insurance. All insurance specified above shall remain in force

until all work to be performed is satisfactorily completed, all of Contractor's personnel



and equipment have been removed from the Property, and the Work has been formally

accepted. The failure to procure or maintain required insurance and/or an adequately

funded self-insurance program will constitute a material breach of this Agreement.

2. Prior to commencing work or entering onto the Property, Contractor shall provide the

DDR with a Certificate(s) of Insurance evidencing the coverage listed above, and

upon request, a certified duplicate original of the policies. The Certificate shall

stipulate that the insurance company (or companies) issuing such policies shall give

written notice to the DDR of any material alteration or reduction in coverage of

aggregate limits, if such limits apply, and provide at least thirty (30) days' notice of

cancellation.

3. For all insurance types: If the Contractor maintains broader coverage and/or higher

limits than the minimums shown above, the District requires and shall be entitled to

the broader coverage and/or higher limits maintained by Contractor. Any available

insurance proceeds in excess of the specified minimum limits of insurance and

coverage shall be available to the District.

B. Claims-Made Insurance

1. If any insurance specified above shall be provided on a claim-made basis, then in

addition to coverage requirements above, such policy shall provide that:

a. Policy retroactive date coincides with or precedes the Contractor's start

of work (including subsequent policies purchased as renewals or

replacements).

b. Contractor shall make every effort to maintain similar insurance for at

least five (5) years following project completion, including the

requirement of adding all named insureds.

c. If insurance is terminated for any reason, Contractor agrees to purchase

an extended reporting provision of at least two (2) years to report claims

arising from work performed in connection with this Agreement or

Permit.

d. Policy allows for reporting of circumstances or incidents that might

give rise to future claims.

C. Failure to Procure or Maintain Insurance

1. The failure to procure or maintain required insurance and/or an adequately funded

self-insurance program will constitute a material breach of the agreement.

D. Regulatory Compliance

1. In addition to the requirements described above, Contractor shall comply with any

additional coverages required by the United States Department of Transportation, the

Environmental Protection Agency and/or related state and local laws, rules and

regulations. The Contractor and/or subcontractors shall obtain all permits, licenses



and other forms or documentation which are required and forward them with the

required evidence of insurance to District.

E. Terms of Policies

1. Except as provided in Section 1.06.B concerning claims made insurance policies, all

insurance specified above shall remain in force until all work to be performed is

satisfactorily completed, all of Contractor's personnel and equipment have been

removed from District's property, and the Work has been formally accepted.

F. Evidence of Insurance

1. The Contractor shall furnish to the District Certificates of Insurance or, upon request

a certified copy of all policies, for all specified coverages prior to commencing work

within ten (10) business days of award of Contract. All policies and certificates

required hereunder shall provide for thirty (30) days written notice to the District of

cancellation or reduction in limits. The certificates and policies shall also evidence

any specific requirements of coverage as set forth in this Section.

G. Reporting of Incidents, Losses or Claims

1. The Contractor agrees to immediately notify the DDR and the Construction Manager

following any accident or injury, which occurs in connection with the Work under

this Contract. In addition, the Contractor shall provide a detailed written report of the

accident or injury to the District within seven (7) days of its occurrence.



AC Transit DBE REQUIREMENTS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA Section 00 73 39– Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 73 39

DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE) REQUIREMENTS

A. This solicitation and resulting contract is subject to the requirements of Title 49, Code of Federal

Regulations, Part 26, Participation by Disadvantaged Business Enterprises in Department of

Transportation Financial Assistance Programs. The national goal for participation of

Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE) is 10%. The District's overall goal for DBE

participation is 8%. A separate contract goal has not been established for this procurement.

B. The contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the

performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part

26 in the award and administration of this DOT-assisted contract. Failure by the contractor to carry

out these requirements is a material breach of this contract, which may result in the termination of

this contract or such other remedy as the District deems appropriate. Each subcontract the

contractor signs with a subcontractor must include the assurance in this paragraph (see 49 CFR

26.13(b)).

C. The successful bidder/offeror will be required to report its DBE participation obtained through

race-neutral means throughout the period of performance

D. The contractor is required to pay its subcontractors performing work related to this contract for

satisfactory performance of that work no later than seven (7) days after the contractor's receipt of

payment for that work from the District.

E. The contractor must promptly notify the District whenever and prior to terminating a DBE

subcontractor performing work related to this contract; obtain written authorization from the

District’s Contracts Compliance Department to terminate a DBE firm,, and must make good faith

efforts to engage another DBE subcontractor to perform at least the same amount of work if granted

authorization to terminate a DBE firm. The contractor may not terminate any DBE subcontractor

and perform that work through its own forces or those of an affiliate without prior written consent

of the District.

F. Use of DBE Financial Institutions

a. Pursuant to 49 CFR §26.27, the District strongly encourages contractors and subcontractors

to utilize the services offered by DBE financial institutions A list of DBE financial

institutions can be found online at http.//www.fms treas.gov/mbdp/current list.html or

provided by the District’s Contracts Compliance Administrator, Phillip McCants via email

request to [email protected].




AC Transit PREVAILING WAGES February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA Section 00 73 43– Page 1 of 3

SECTION 00 73 43

PREVAILING WAGES

1.01 PAYMENT OF PREVAILING WAGES

A. This contract will be subject to Federal and California prevailing wage laws. The state

requirements are set forth below in Section 1.02.

1.02 CALIFORNIA PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS

A. General

1. The Contractor and any subcontractor shall comply with Labor Code Sections 1774

and 1775. Pursuant to Section 1775, the Contractor and any subcontractor shall, as a

penalty, forfeit to the state or political subdivision not more than $50 for each calendar

day, or portion thereof, for each worker paid less than the prevailing rate as

determined by the Director of Industrial Relations for the work or craft in which the

worker is employed under the contract. The amount of this forfeiture shall be

determined by the Labor Commissioner and shall be based on consideration of

whether the failure to pay the correct rate of per diem wages was due to the

Contractor’s good-faith mistake, and on the previous record of the Contractor or

subcontractor in meeting their respective prevailing wage obligations. In addition to

said penalty, the difference between such prevailing wage rates and the amount paid

to each worker for each calendar day or portion thereof for which each worker was

paid less than the prevailing wage rate shall be paid to each worker by the Contractor

or subcontractor.

2. If a worker employed by a subcontractor on a public works project is not paid at least

the general prevailing per diem wages by the subcontractor, the Contractor shall not

be liable for the penalties described above unless the Contractor had knowledge of

that failure of the subcontractor to pay the specified prevailing rate of wages to those

workers or unless the Contractor fails to comply with all of the following

requirements:

a. The contract executed between the Contractor and the subcontractor for

the performance of work on the public works project shall include a

copy of the provisions of Sections 1771, 1775, 1776, 1777.5, 1813, and

1815 of the Labor Code.

b. The Contractor shall monitor the payment of the specified general

prevailing rate of per diem wages by the subcontractor to the

employees, by periodic review of the certified payroll records of the

subcontractor.

3. Upon becoming aware of the subcontractor’s failure to pay at least the specified

prevailing rate of wages to the subcontractor’s workers, the Contractor shall diligently

take corrective action to halt or rectify the failure, including, but not limited to,

retaining sufficient funds due the subcontractor for work performed on the public

work project.


AC Transit PREVAILING WAGES February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA Section 00 73 43 – Page 2 of 3

4. Prior to making final payment to the subcontractor for work performed on the public

works project, the Contractor shall obtain an affidavit signed under penalty of perjury

from the subcontractor that the subcontractor has paid at least the specified general

prevailing rate of per diem wages to the subcontractor’s employees on the public

works project and any amount due pursuant to 1813 of the Labor Code.

a. Pursuant to Section 1775 of the Labor Code, the Division of Labor

Standards Enforcement shall notify the Contractor on a public works

project within fifteen (15) days of the receipt by the Division of Labor

Standards Enforcement of a complaint of the failure of a subcontractor

on that public works project to pay workers at least the general

prevailing rate per diem wages.

b. Pursuant to the provisions of Section 1773 of the Labor Code, the

District has obtained the general prevailing rate of wages applicable to

categories of workers the District anticipates will be utilized for this

project for straight time, overtime, Saturday, Sunday and holiday work.

The holiday wage rate listed shall be applicable to all holidays

recognized in the collective bargaining agreement of the particular

craft, classification or type of workers concerned, or if no collective

bargaining applies, those holidays identified in Government Code

Section 6700. Prevailing wage rates for this project are available at the

District Office of Contract Compliance at 1600 Franklin Street,

Oakland, CA 94612 (telephone number: (510) 891-5443. In the event

that the Contractor intends to utilize categories of workers different

from, or in addition to, those anticipated by the District, it shall be

Contractor’s responsibility to bring such categories of workers to the

District’ attention immediately, and to obtain the appropriate wage rate

from the Department of Industrial Relations (with the District’s

assistance if necessary). (See Title 8 California Code of Regulations

Section 16202.)

c. The Contractor shall post general prevailing wage rates at a prominent

place at the site of the work.

d. Pursuant to Labor Code Section 1773.6 and Title 8 California Code of

Regulations Section 16204, changes in general prevailing wage

determinations shall apply to the project only if issued by the Director

of Industrial Relations prior to the District’s bid issuance date.

1.03 FUTURE WAGE INCREASES

A. The District will not recognize any claim for additional compensation based on the payment by

the Contractor of any increased wage rate required during the term of the Contract to the state or

federal prevailing wage rate. The possibility of wage increases during the course of the Contract

is one of the elements to be considered by the Contractor in determining the bid, and such wage

increases will not, under any circumstances, be considered as the basis of a claim against the

awarding body with regard to the Contract.


AC Transit PREVAILING WAGES February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA Section 00 73 43 – Page 3 of 3

1.05 GENERAL WAGE DETERMINATIONS

A. The current rates are available at http://www.dir.ca.gov/OPRL/PWD/index.htm


http://www.dir.ca.gov/OPRL/PWD/index.htm


AC Transit FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA Section 00 73 73 – Page 1 of 13

SECTION 00 73 73

FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.01 GENERAL

This project will be financed in part by the Federal Transit Administration (“FTA”). Accordingly,

the following federal contract provisions, as required by the FTA, must be complied with in the

performance of this contract. To the extent the contract provisions required by the FTA, and State

law are inconsistent, the Contractor is responsible for complying with the more comprehensive or

stricter requirements.

PART 2 - FEDERAL TRANSIT ADMINISTRATION (FTA) REQUIREMENTS

2.01 BUY AMERICA REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor agrees to comply with 49 U.S.C. 5323(j) and 49 CFR Part 661, which provide that

Federal funds may not be obligated unless steel, iron, and manufactured products used in FTA-

funded projects are produced in the United States, unless a waiver has been granted by FTA or the

product is subject to a general waiver.

All proposers must submit the appropriate Buy America certification to AC Transit with their bids,

except those subject to a general waiver. Bids or offers that are not accompanied by a completed

Buy America certification must be rejected as non-responsive. This requirement does not apply to

lower tier subcontractors.

2.02 SEISMIC SAFETY

The Contractor agrees that any new building or additions to an existing building will be designed

and constructed in accordance with the standards for seismic safety required in Department of

Transportation Seismic Safety Regulations 49 CFR Part 41 and will certify to compliance to the

extent required by the regulation. The Contractor also agrees to ensure that all work performed

under this contract, including work performed by a subcontractor, is in compliance with the

standards required by the Seismic Safety Regulations and with the certification of compliance

issued on the project.

2.03 ENERGY CONSERVATION

The Contractor agrees to comply with mandatory standards and policies relating to energy

efficiency which are contained in the state energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the

federal Energy Policy and Conservation Act (42 U.S.C. 6321 et seq.).

2.04 CLEAN WATER AND AIR REQUIREMENTS.

A. The Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable standards, orders or regulations issued

pursuant to the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, 33 U.S.C. 1251 et. seq., and the

Clear Air Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 7401 et. seq. The Contractor agrees to report each violation

to AC Transit and understands and agrees that AC Transit will, in turn, report each violation as

required to assure notification to the FTA and the appropriate EPA regional office.



B. The Contractor also agrees to include these requirements in each subcontract exceeding one

hundred thousand dollars ($100,000) financed in part or in whole with federal assistance provided

by the FTA.

2.05 SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT

The prospective Contractor certifies, by submission of their bid or submittal, that neither it nor its

"principals" [as defined at 2 C.F.R. § 180.995] is presently debarred, suspended, proposed for

debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction by

any Federal department or agency. When the Contractor is unable to certify to the statements in

this certification, such Contractor shall attach an explanation to this submittal.

2.06 LOBBYING

Contractor shall file the certification required by 49 CFR part 20, “New Restrictions on Lobbying.”

Contractor shall certify that it will not and has not used Federal appropriated funds to pay any

person or organization for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any

agency, a member of Congress, officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a member of

Congress in connection with obtaining any Federal contract, grant or any other award covered by

31 U.S.C. 1352. Contractor shall also disclose the name of any registrant under the Lobbying

Disclosure Act of 1995 who has made lobbying contacts on its behalf with non-Federal funds with

respect to that Federal contract, grant or award covered by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Such disclosures shall

be forwarded to the District. Contractor shall ensure that all of its Subcontractors under this

Contract shall certify the same. Prior to execution of this Agreement, Contractor shall submit the

“Certification for Federal Aid Contracts,” included in the contract documents. District is

responsible for keeping the certification of the Contractor, who is in turn responsible for keeping

the certification forms of subcontractors.

2.07 ACCESS TO RECORDS AND REPORTS

Contractor shall provide all authorized representatives of the District, the FTA, and the Comptroller

General of the United States access to any books, documents, papers and records of the Contractor

which are directly pertinent to this Contract for the purposes of making audits, copies,

examinations, excerpts and transcriptions. Contractor also agrees to maintain all books, records,

accounts and reports required under this Contract for a period of not less than three years after the

date of termination or expiration of this Contract, except in the event of litigation or settlement of

claims arising from the performance of this Contract, in which case Contractor agrees to maintain

the same until the District, the FTA, the Comptroller General, or any of their duly authorized

representatives, have disposed of all such litigation, appeals, claims or exceptions related thereto.

2.08 FEDERAL CHANGES

Contractor shall at all times comply with all applicable FTA regulations, policies, procedures and

directives, including without limitation those listed directly or by reference in the Agreement (Form

FTA MA (6) dated October, 1999) between the District and the FTA, as they may be amended or

promulgated from time to time during the term of this Contract. Contractor’s failure to so comply

shall constitute a material breach of this Contract.



2.09 PREVAILING WAGE AND ANTI-KICKBACK

For all prime construction, alteration or repair contracts in excess of $2,000 awarded by FTA, the

Contractor shall comply with the Davis-Bacon Act and the Copeland "Anti-Kickback" Act. Under

49 U.S.C. § 5333(a), prevailing wage protections apply to laborers and mechanics employed on

FTA assisted construction, alteration, or repair projects. The Contractor will comply with the

Davis-Bacon Act, 40 U.S.C. §§ 3141-3144, and 3146-3148 as supplemented by DOL regulations

at 29 C.F.R. part 5, "Labor Standards Provisions Applicable to Contracts Governing Federally

Financed and Assisted Construction." In accordance with the statute, the Contractor shall pay

wages to laborers and mechanics at a rate not less than the prevailing wages specified in a wage

determination made by the Secretary of Labor. In addition, the Contractor agrees to pay wages not

less than once a week. The Contractor shall also comply with the Copeland "Anti-Kickback" Act

(40 U.S.C. § 3145), as supplemented by DOL regulations at 29 C.F.R. part 3, "Contractors and

Subcontractors on Public Building or Public Work Financed in Whole or in part by Loans or Grants

from the United States." The Contractor is prohibited from inducing, by any means, any person

employed in the construction, completion, or repair of public work, to give up any part of the

compensation to which he or she is otherwise entitled.

2.10 SUBCONTRACTS

The Contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR

5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as the Federal Transit Administration may by

appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these

clauses in any lower tier subcontracts.

2.11 CONTRACT TERMINATION

A. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the Contract

and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12.

B. Termination

Termination for Convenience (General Provision) - The District may terminate the resulting

agreement or contract, in whole or in part, at any time by written notice to the Contractor when it

is in the District’s best interest. The Contractor shall be paid its costs, including contract close-

out costs, and profit on work performed up to the time of termination. The Contractor shall

promptly submit its termination claim to the District to be paid the Contractor. If the Contractor

has any property in its possession belonging to the District, the Contractor will account for the

same, and dispose of it in the manner the District directs.

Termination for Default [Breach or Cause] (General Provision) - If the Contractor does not

deliver supplies in accordance with the resulting agreement or contract delivery schedule, or, if

the resulting agreement or contract is for services, the Contractor fails to perform in the manner

called for in the resulting agreement or contract, or if the Contractor fails to comply with any other

provisions of the resulting agreement or contract, the (Recipient) may terminate the agreement or

contract for default. Termination shall be effected by serving a notice of termination on the

Contractor setting forth the manner in which the Contractor is in default. The contractor will only

be paid the contract price for supplies delivered and accepted, or services performed in accordance

with the manner of performance set forth in the contract. If it is later determined by the District

that the Contractor had an excusable reason for not performing, such as a strike, fire, or flood,



events which are not the fault of or are beyond the control of the Contractor, the District, after

setting up a new delivery of performance schedule, may allow the Contractor to continue work,

or treat the termination as a termination for convenience.

Opportunity to Cure (General Provision) -The District in its sole discretion may, in the case of

a termination for breach or default, allow the Contractor 45 days in which to cure the defect. In

such case, the notice of termination will state the time period in which cure is permitted and other

appropriate conditions If Contractor fails to remedy to the District’s satisfaction the breach or

default of any of the terms, covenants, or conditions of the resulting agreement or contract within

45 days after receipt by Contractor of written notice from the District setting forth the nature of

said breach or default, the District shall have the right to terminate the agreement or contract

without any further obligation to Contractor. Any such termination for default shall not in any

way operate to preclude the District from also pursuing all available remedies against Contractor

and its sureties for said breach or default.

Waiver of Remedies for any Breach - In the event that the District elects to waive its remedies

for any breach by Contractor of any covenant, term or condition of the resulting agreement or

contract, such waiver by the District shall not limit the District's remedies for any succeeding

breach of that or of any other term, covenant, or condition of the agreement or contract.

2.12 DISPUTES

Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this Contract shall not be subject to the

general disputes clause of this Contract Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the

procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the

meaning of this clause include disputes between the Contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and

the contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives.

Disputes arising in the performance of the resulting agreement or contract which are not resolved

by agreement of the parties shall be decided in writing by the authorized representative of the

District’s General Manager. This decision shall be final and conclusive unless within ten (10)

days from the date of receipt of its copy, the Contractor mails or otherwise furnishes a written

appeal to the General Manager. In connection with any such appeal, the Contractor shall be

afforded an opportunity to be heard and to offer evidence in support of its position. The decision

of the General Manager shall be binding upon the Contractor and the Contractor shall abide be

the decision.

Performance During Dispute - Unless otherwise directed by District, Contractor shall continue

performance under the agreement or contract while matters in dispute are being resolved.

Claims for Damages - Should either party to the resulting agreement or contract suffer injury or

damage to person or property because of any act or omission of the party or of any of his

employees, agents or others for whose acts he is legally liable, a claim for damages therefor shall

be made in writing to such other party within a reasonable time after the first observance of such

injury of damage.

Remedies - Unless this contract provides otherwise, all claims, counterclaims, disputes and other

matters in question between the District and the Contractor arising out of or relating to the

resulting agreement or contract or its breach will be decided by arbitration if the parties mutually

agree, or in a court of competent jurisdiction within the State of California.



Rights and Remedies - The duties and obligations imposed by the resulting agreement or contract

documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a

limitation of any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.

No action or failure to act by the District or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or

duty afforded any of them under the agreement or contract, nor shall any such action or failure to

act constitute an approval of or acquiescence in any breach thereunder, except as may be

specifically agreed in writing.

2.13 CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT

A. Overtime

Neither the Contractor nor its subcontractors may permit any laborer or mechanic in any

workweek in which he or she is employed on such work under this Contract to work in excess of

forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate

not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty

hours in such workweek.

B. Violation; Liability for Unpaid Wages; Liquidated Damages

In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (A) of this Section the Contractor

and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition,

Contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States for liquidated damages. Such

liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic,

including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (A) of

this Section, in the sum of forty dollars ($40) for each calendar day on which such individual was

required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment

of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (A) of this Section.

C. Withholding for Unpaid Wages and Liquidated Damages

The District shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of

the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account

of work performed by Contractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with

Contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety

Standards Act, which is held by Contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to

satisfy any liabilities of Contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as

provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (B) of this Section.

D. Subcontracts

The Contractor shall insert in any subcontract the clauses set forth in this Section and also a clause

requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The

Contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor

with the clauses set forth in this Section.

E. Payrolls and Basic Records

Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the Contractor during the course

of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers 1937, or under the



Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall

contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct

classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for

bona fide fringe, benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B)

of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual

wages paid.

Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any

laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits

under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the Contractor

shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable,

that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been

communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs

anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits, the Contractor employ

apprentices or trainees under approved programs, it shall maintain written evidence of the

registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of

the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs.

2.14 COMPLIANCE WITH COPELAND ACT REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part 3, which are incorporated by

reference in this Contract.

2.15 NO GOVERNMENT OBLIGATION TO THIRD PARTIES

A. The District and Contractor acknowledge and agree that, notwithstanding any concurrence by the

Federal Government in or approval of the solicitation or award of the underlying contract, absent

the express written consent by the Federal Government, the Federal Government is not a party to

this Contract and shall not be subject to any obligations or liabilities to the District, Contractor,

or any other party (whether or not a party to that contract) pertaining to any matter resulting from

the underlying contract.

B. The Contractor agrees to include the above clause in each subcontract financed in whole or in part

with Federal assistance provided by FTA. It is further agreed that the clause shall not be modified,

except to identify the subcontractor who will be subject to its provisions.

2.16 PROGRAM FRAUD AND FALSE OR FRAUDULENT STATEMENTS AND RELATED

ACTS

A. The Contractor acknowledges that the provisions of the Program Fraud Civil Remedies Act of

1986, as amended, 31 U.S.C. § 3801 et seq. and U.S. DOT regulations, “Program Fraud Civil

Remedies,” 49 C.F.R. Part 31, apply to its actions pertaining to this Project. Upon execution of

the underlying contract, the Contractor certifies or affirms the truthfulness and accuracy of any

statement it has made, it makes, it may make, or causes to be made, pertaining to the underlying

contract or the FTA assisted project for which this Contract work is being performed. In addition

to other penalties that may be applicable, the Contractor further acknowledges that if it makes, or

causes to be made, a false, fictitious, or fraudulent claim, statement, submission, or certification,

the Federal Government reserves the right to impose the penalties of the Program Fraud Civil

Remedies Act of 1986 on the Contractor to the extent the Federal Government deems appropriate.



B. The Contractor also acknowledges that if it makes, or causes to be made, a false, fictitious, or

fraudulent claim, statement, submission, or certification to the Federal Government under a

contract connected with a project that is financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance

originally awarded by FTA under the authority of 49 U.S.C. § 5307, the Government reserves the

right to impose the penalties of 18 U.S.C. § 1001 and 49 U.S.C. § 5307(n)(1) on the Contractor,

to the extent the Federal Government deems appropriate.

C. The Contractor agrees to include the above two clauses in each subcontract financed in whole or

in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA. It is further agreed that the clauses shall not be

modified, except to identify the subcontractor who will be subject to the provisions.

2.17 PRIVACY ACT

The following requirements apply to Contractor and any of its employees that may administer any

system of records on behalf of the Federal Government under any contract:

1. The Contractor agrees to comply with, and assures the compliance of its employees

with, the information restrictions and other applicable requirements of the Privacy Act

of 1974, 5 U.S.C. §552a. Among other things, the Contractor agrees to obtain the

express consent of the Federal Government before the Contractor or its employees

operate a system of records on behalf of the Federal Government. The Contractor

understands that the requirements of the Privacy Act, including the civil and criminal

penalties for violation of that Act, apply to those individuals involved, and that failure

to comply with the terms of the Privacy Act may result in termination of the

underlying contract.

2. The Contractor also agrees to include these requirements in each subcontract to

administer any system of records on behalf of the Federal Government financed in

whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA.

2.18 CIVIL RIGHTS REQUIREMENTS

A. Nondiscrimination

In accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 2000d, section 303

of the Age Discrimination Act of 1975, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 6102, section 202 of the

Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, 42 U.S.C. § 12132, and Federal transit law at 49 U.S.C.

§ 5332, the Contractor agrees that it will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for

employment because of race, color, creed, national origin, sex, age, or disability. In addition, the

Contractor agrees to comply with applicable Federal implementing regulations and other

implementing requirements FTA may issue.

B. Equal Employment Opportunity

The following equal employment opportunity requirements apply to this Contract:

1. Race, Color, Creed, National Origin, Sex - In accordance with Title VII of the Civil

Rights Act; as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 2000e, and Federal transit laws at 49 U.S.C. §

5332, the Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable equal employment

opportunity requirements of U.S. Department of Labor (U.S. DOL) regulations,

“Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Equal Employment Opportunity,



Department of Labor,” 41 C.F.R. Parts 60 et seq., (which implement Executive Order

No. 11246, “Equal Employment Opportunity,” as amended by Executive Order No.

113 75, “Amending Executive Order 11246 Relating to Equal Employment

Opportunity,” 42 U.S.C. § 2000e note), and with any applicable Federal statutes,

executive orders, regulations, and Federal policies that may in the future affect

construction activities undertaken in the course of the Project.

2. During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows:

a. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for

employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The

contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are

employed, and that employees are treated during employment without

regard to their race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. Such action

shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading,

demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or

termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for

training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in

conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for

employment, notices to be provided setting forth the provisions of this

nondiscrimination clause.

b. The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees

placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants

will receive considerations for employment without regard to race, color,

religion, sex, or national origin.

c. The Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers

with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or

understanding, a notice to be provided advising the said labor union or

workers’ representatives of the contractor’s commitments under this

section, and shall post copies of the notices in conspicuous places available

to employees and applicants for employment.

d. The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246

of September 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations, and relevant orders

of the Secretary of Labor.

e. The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by

Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by rules, regulations,

and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit

access to his books, records, and accounts by the administering agency and

the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain

compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders.

f. In the event of the Contractor’s noncompliance with the nondiscrimination

clauses of this contract or with any of the said rules, regulations, or orders,

this contract may be canceled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part

and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government

contracts or federally assisted construction contracts in accordance with

procedures authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965,



and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as

provided in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule,

regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by

law.

g. The Contractor will include the portion of the sentence immediately

preceding paragraph (a) and the provisions of paragraphs (a) through (g)

in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempt by rules, regulations,

or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to section 204 of

Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions

will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The contractor will

take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the

administering agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions,

including sanctions for noncompliance: provided, however, that in the

event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation

with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the

administering agency the contractor may request the United States to enter

into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. In addition,

the Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements FTA

may issue.

3. Age

In accordance with section 4 of the Age Discrimination in Employment Act of

1967, as amended, 29 U.S.C. § 623 and Federal transit law at 49 U.S.C. § 5332,

the Contractor agrees to refrain from discrimination against present and

prospective employees for reason of age. In addition, the Contractor agrees to

comply with any implementing requirements FTA may issue.

4. Disabilities

In accordance with section 102 of the Americans with Disabilities Act, as

amended, 42 U.S.C. § 12112, the Contractor agrees that it will comply with the

requirements of U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, “Regulations

to Implement the Equal Employment Provisions of the Americans with Disabilities

Act,” 29 C.F.R. Part 1630, pertaining to employment of persons with disabilities.

In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements

FTA may issue.

5. Access Requirements for Individuals with Disabilities

The Contractor agrees to comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. § 5301(d)

which expresses the Federal policy that the elderly and persons with disabilities

have the same right as other persons to use mass transportation service and

facilities, and that special efforts shall be made in planning and designing those

services and facilities to implement those policies. Contractor also agrees to

comply with all applicable requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act of

1990 (ADA), 42 U.S.C. §§ 12101, et seq., and 49 U.S.C. § 322; § 504 of the

Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, 29 U.S.C. § 794; § 16 of the Federal

Transit Act, as amended; 49 U.S.C. App. § 612; and the following federal

regulations, including any amendments thereto:



a. U.S. DOT regulations, “Transportation Services for Individuals with

Disabilities (ADA),” 49 C.F.R. Part 37;

b. U.S. DOT regulations, “Nondiscrimination on the Basis of Handicap in

Programs and Activities Receiving or Benefiting from Federal Financial

Assistance,” 49 C.F.R. Part 27;

c. Joint U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance

Board/U.S. DOT regulations, “Americans with Disabilities (ADA)

Accessibility Specifications for Transportation Vehicles,” 36 C.F.R. Part

1192 and 49 C.F.R. Part 38;

d. U.S. DOJ regulations, “Nondiscrimination on the Basis of Disability in

State and Local Government Services,” 28 C.F.R. Part 35;

e. U.S. DOJ regulations, “Nondiscrimination on the Basis of Disability by

Public Accommodations and in Commercial Facilities,” 28 C.F.R. Part 36;

f. U.S. GSA regulations, “Accommodations for the Physically

Handicapped,” 41 C.F.R. Subpart 101-19;

g. U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, “Regulations in

Implement the Equal Employment Provisions of the Americans with

Disabilities Act,” 29 C.F.R. Part 1630;

h. U.S. Federal Communications Commission regulations,

“Telecommunications Relay Services and Related Customer Premises

Equipment for the Hearing and Speech Disabled,” 47 C.F.R. Part 64,

Subpart F;

i. FTA regulations, “Transportation for Elderly and Handicapped Persons,”

49 C.F.R. Part 609; and

j. Any other implementing federal regulations and requirements.

6. The Contractor also agrees to include these requirements in each subcontract financed

in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA, modified only if

necessary to identify the affected parties.

C. Notice of Requirement for Affirmative Action To Ensure Equal Employment Opportunity

(Executive Order 11246)

1. The Bidder's attention is called to the “Equal Opportunity Clause” and the “Standard

Federal Equal Employment Specifications” set forth herein.

2. The goals and timetables for minority and female participation, expressed in

percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate workforce in each trade on all

construction work in the covered area, are as follows:



Time- tables

Goals for minority participation for each trade

Goals for female participation in each trade

Annually 25.6% 6.9%

3. These goals are applicable to all the Contractor's construction work (whether or not it

is Federal or federally assisted) performed in the covered area. If the contractor

performs construction work in a geographical area located outside of the covered area,

it shall apply the goals established for such geographical area where the work is

actually performed. With regard to this second area, the contractor also is subject to

the goals for both its federally involved and non-federally involved construction.

4. The Contractor's compliance with the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR

part 60-4 shall be based on its implementation of the Equal Opportunity Clause,

specific affirmative action obligations required by the specifications set forth in 41

CFR 60-4.3(a), and its efforts to meet the goals. The hours of minority and female

employment and training must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the

contract, and in each trade, and the contractor shall make a good faith effort to employ

minorities and women evenly on each of its projects. The transfer of minority or

female employees or trainees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project

for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's goals shall be a violation of the

contract, the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR part 60-4. Compliance

with the goals will be measured against the total work hours performed.

5. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Director of the Office of

Federal Contract Compliance Programs within 10 working days of award of any

construction subcontract in excess of $10,000 at any tier for construction work under

the contract resulting from this solicitation. The notification shall list the name,

address and telephone number of the subcontractor; employer identification number

of the subcontractor; estimated dollar amount of the subcontract; estimated starting

and completion dates of the subcontract; and the geographical area in which the

subcontract is to be performed.

6. As used in this Notice, and in the contract resulting from this solicitation, the “covered

area” is (insert description of the geographical areas where the contract is to be

performed giving the state, county and city, if any).

[43 FR 49254, Oct. 20, 1978; 43 FR 51401, Nov. 3, 1978, as amended at 45 FR 65977,

Oct. 3, 1980]

2.19 DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES

This Contract is subject to the requirements of Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 26,

Participation by Disadvantaged Business Enterprises in Department of Transportation Financial

Assistance Programs. The national goal for participation of Disadvantaged Business Enterprises

(DBE) is 10%. The District's overall goal for DBE participation is 14%. A separate contract goal

has not been established for this procurement although it is the District’s expectation that in pursuit

of this project’s SBE goal, DBE firms are afforded strong consideration.

The Contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the

performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part

26 in the award and administration of this DOT-assisted contract. Failure by the contractor to carry



out these requirements is a material breach of this contract, which may result in the termination of

this contract or such other remedy as the District deems appropriate. Each subcontract the

contractor signs with a subcontractor must include the assurance in this paragraph (see 49 CFR

26.13(b)).

The Contractor will be required to report its DBE participation obtained through race-neutral means

throughout the period of performance.

The Contractor is required to pay its subcontractors performing work related to this contract for

satisfactory performance of that work no later than seven (7) days after the contractor's receipt of

payment for that work from the District.

The Contractor must promptly notify the District whenever and prior to terminating a DBE

subcontractor performing work related to this contract; obtain written authorization from the

District’s Contracts Compliance Department to terminate a DBE firm, and must make good faith

efforts to engage another DBE subcontractor to perform at least the same amount of work if granted

authorization to terminate a DBE firm. The contractor may not terminate any DBE subcontractor

and perform that work through its own forces or those of an affiliate without prior written consent

of the District.

Pursuant to 49 CFR §26.27, the District strongly encourages Contractors and Subcontractors to

utilize the services offered by DBE financial institutions A list of DBE financial institutions can be

found online at http.//www.fms treas.gov/mbdp/current list.html or provided by the District’s

Contracts Compliance Administrator, Phillip McCants via email request to

[email protected].

2.20 ADA REQUIREMENTS

In accordance with applicable laws, Contractor shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities

Act (ADA) including but not limited to:

Where applicable, ensuring that all wheelchair lifts meet ADA specifications.

Ensuring that operators verbally announce all major cross streets, transfer points, and

destination points.

Ensuring that operators, upon request, assist individuals with disabilities with

wheelchair securement systems, wheel chair ramps or wheelchair lifts.

Both parties hereby agree to mutually exchange all relevant ADA operational issues that will affect

services as it becomes available. The District shall be responsible for adopting system operating

policies which are in compliance with the ADA.

2.21 INCORPORATION OF FEDERAL TRANSIT ADMINISTRATION (FTA) TERMS.

The preceding provisions include, in part, certain Standard Terms and Conditions required by U.S.

DOT, whether or not expressly set forth in the preceding contract provisions. All contractual

provisions required by the U.S. DOT, as set forth in FTA Circular 4220. 1F, dated March 13, 2013,

are hereby incorporated by reference. Anything to the contrary herein notwithstanding, all FTA

mandated terms shall be deemed to control in the event of a conflict with other provisions contained

in this Agreement. The Contractor shall not perform any act, fail to perform any act, or refuse to




comply with any the District requests which would cause the District to be in violation of the FTA

terms and conditions.

2.22 NOTIFICATION OF FEDERAL PARTICIPATION

This contract may be financed in part by the Federal Transit Administration (FTA). Accordingly,

federal requirements apply to this contract. In the event that those requirements are revised during

the performance of this contract, the Contractor shall incorporate those revised provisions mandated

by the FTA.



AC Transit SUMMARY February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 01 10 00 -- PAGE 1 OF 6

SECTION 01 10 00

SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information

2. Work covered by Contract Documents

3. Construction Schedule Constraint

4. Work under separate contracts

5. District-furnished products

6. Access to site

7. Coordination with occupants

8. Work restrictions

9. Specification and drawing conventions

10. Miscellaneous provisions

B. Related Requirements:

1. Retain subparagraph below to cross-reference requirements Contractor might expect

to find in this Section but are specified in other Sections.

2. Section 01 31 00 “Project Management and Coordination”

3. Section 01 32 00 “Construction Progress Documentation”

4. Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures

governing temporary use of District’s facilities



1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: General Office Water Intrusion Repairs IFB #2018-1420

B. Project Location: 1600 Franklin Street, Oakland, CA 94612

C. Owner: AC Transit (referred to as the “District”), 1600 Franklin Street, Oakland, CA 94612

D. District’s Designated Representative: Alieza Bircher

E. Architect: Interactive Resources 117 Park Place Point Richmond, CA 94801

F. Construction Manager: TBD

1. Construction Manager may be engaged for this Project to serve as an advisor to

District and to provide assistance in administering the Contract for Construction

between District and Contractor, according to a separate contract between the District

and Construction Manager.

G. District’s Web-based Project Management Software: The District provides a web-based Project

Management Software to be used for purposes of managing communication and documents

during the construction stage.

1. See Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for

using the District’s Project Management Software.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. Demolishing, removing, repairing and/or replacing building envelope components

related to weather resistance and mechanical and electrical components and systems

related to building energy consumption.

2. Provide cranes and/or swing stage (s) as required and verify certification of existing

davits or have them certified

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS

A. This Water Intrusion Repair project requires disruption to daily employee parking for portions

of the scope of work. The work shall be implemented in a manner that will provide the least

possible impact. Contractor to provide a phasing schedule for these portions of work for review

by the Architect and approval by the District PM. Great care must be taken throughout the

project to ensure minimal impact on the on-going operation.



1.6 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. General: Coordinate and cooperate fully with separate contractors so that work on those

contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this

Contract or other contracts.

B. Work under other contracts, including but not limited to those listed in this section, may be

underway during the time of performance of this Contract. The Contractor must coordinate is

work with other Contracts as required by General Conditions Section 00 70 00, Part 9 and

Project Management and Coordination, Section 01 31 00.

C. There may possible be a project modifying the two northerly most maintenance bays going on at

the same time. The work of that project is mostly interior and on the roof but the subject trench

drain passes directly in front of those two maintenance bays. There may also be a project going

on at the same time to re-roof the Transportation Building. This is a roofing only project but it

may impact ground traffic and staging areas.

D. Information regarding work under other contracts may be obtained by inspection of documents

at the Project manager’s Office or the District’s Office, and copies may be obtained at the cost

of reproduction and handling upon Bidder’s request and payment. These documents are not part

of the Contract Documents.

E. Contractor shall include in its bid all costs associated with coordinating, scheduling and

sequencing its Work with the Work of the contracts listed herein. Contractor shall consider,

accept fully and account for in its bid prices, for the risk that these Contracts may not be

complete or be performed in the scope, time or duration anticipated.

1. In the event that the performance of Work on contracts other than those listed herein

shall occur and the performance of Work on such other contracts materially increases or

decreases the Contractor’s costs, the work and the amount to be paid therefore will be

appropriately adjusted as determined by the Project Manager.

1.7 DISTRICT FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. There are no District furnished products in this project.

1.8 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Construct Work in stages and at times to accommodate the District’s operational requirements

during the construction period, and coordinate the construction schedule with the Project

Manager.

B. The Contractor shall phase the Work in stages and at times such that the milestone dates for

completion are achieved in accordance with the approved schedule submitted pursuant to the

Agreement Section 00 52 00 (if applicable) and Section Construction Progress Documentation

Section 01 32 00.

C. Access through various areas of the worksite must be maintained for other contractor’s use

throughout the duration that the Contractor occupies the segment. The access must be aligned



with the corresponding falsework opening. Listed below are the locations and access

requirements the Contractor shall comply with.

1.9 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as

indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of

Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Parking: Based on approved phasing schedule, the District will allow the following areas

to remain free of parking use as needed. Coordination for available areas shall take place,

primarily during construction project meetings.

a. Level p-3

b. Level P-4

c. Level P-5

d. Level P-6

e. All ramps

2. Except as described above, keep driveways parking garage, loading areas, and entrances

serving premises clear and available to District, District’s employees, and emergency

vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials

3. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction

operations.

4. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and

equipment on-site.

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction

operations in a weather-tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused

by construction operations.

1.10 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Full District Occupancy: District will occupy site and existing building(s) during entire

construction period. Cooperate with District during construction operations to minimize

conflicts and facilitate District usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with District’s

day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used

facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used

facilities without written permission from District and approval of authorities having

jurisdiction.



2. Notify District not less than seventy-two (72) hours in advance of activities that will

affect District’s operations.

1.11 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of

6:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Weekend Hours: 6:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.

2. Hours of Core Drilling or other noisy activities: Notify Project Manager forty-eight (48)

hours in advance of start of core drilling or other noise centric activity to allow time to

notify District employees and the public, as well as to allow for coordination with

ongoing District operations within the building.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by District or

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary

utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify District not less than two (2) days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Obtain District’s written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and

vibration, odors, or other disruption to District occupancy with District.

1. Notify District not less than two (2) days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

2. Obtain District’s written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations, or

perform disruptive operations that result in noise of 60 dBa or more in any occupied

area on weekends or before 6:00 a.m. and after 5:00 p.m. on weekdays.

E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within twenty-five (25)

feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

F. Employee Identification: District will provide identification tags for Contractor personnel

working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.

1.12 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.

These conventions are as follows:



1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.

The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," indicate a mandatory requirement.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated

otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work

of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are

described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to

identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in

the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part

of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing

Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



AC Transit ALLOWANCES February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 01 21 00 -- PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 01 21 00

ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have

been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual

materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If

necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.

B. Types of allowances could include the following:

1. Contingency allowances

2. Permit fee allowance

3. Testing and inspecting allowances

1.3 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES

A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for District’s purposes and only by

Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.

B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by District

under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract

Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar

costs.

C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include

Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins.

D. Retain paragraph below to credit Owner with unused amounts remaining when Project is

complete. See Evaluations.

E. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to District by

Change Order.



1.4 PERMIT FEE ALLOWANCES

A. Permit fee allowances include the cost, not otherwise included in the Contract, of permits with

City, County, or other Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

B. This allowance includes only the direct cost of the permits without any Contractor’s mark-up.

C. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to obtain any permit. The cost for

incidental labor to obtain any permits shall be included in the Base Contract Sum.

D. Costs of services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the allowance.

E. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the Permit fee allowance to District by

Change Order.

1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCES

A. Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost, not otherwise included in the Contract, of

engaging testing agencies, actual tests and inspections, and reporting results.

B. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or costs for

retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure. The cost for incidental labor to assist

the testing agency shall be included in the Contract Sum.

C. Costs of services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the allowance.

D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the testing and inspecting allowance to

District by Change Order.

1.6 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based

on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement

of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting

losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.

1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the

allowance.

2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of

overhead costs and other margins claimed.

3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders

related to unit-cost allowances.

4. District reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent

quantity survey, measure, or count.



B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance

described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's

handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost

amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from

what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or

lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return

damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and

installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with

related work.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. Not applicable



AC Transit ALTERNATES February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 01 23 00 -- PAGE 1 OF 2

SECTION 01 23 00

ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined

in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if the

Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be

completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in


1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the

Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract

Sum to incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract

Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work

of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar

items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part

of alternate.

B. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

C. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections

referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described

under each alternate.


AC Transit ALTERNATES February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 01 23 00 -- PAGE 2 OF 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Add Alternate No. 1

1. Base Bid:

a. Replace one W16X31 Steel Beam (4/A1.8, 10/A1.9, 11/A1.9, 1)

2. Alternate:

a. Remove and replace concrete at a portion of the ramp, clean and paint steel and

fireproofing, replace gutter at trench drain: (2/A1.91 through 8/A9.1, 1/M1.2,

1/M2.2, 1/E1.2, 1/E2.2).

B. Add Alternate No. 2

1. Base Bid: Do not remove abandoned mechanical and electrical equipment, including vent

wall and door and provide fire sprinkler modifications

2. Alternate:

a. Remove abandoned mechanical and electrical equipment, including vent wall and

door, provide fire sprinkler modifications: (2/A1.7, 1/M1.6, M1.7, 1/M2.6,1/E1.6,

1/E1.7)

C. Add Alternate No. 3

1. Base Bid:

a. Provide accessibility upgrades only for 3rd Floor restrooms.

2. Alternate:

a. Provide accessibility upgrades for 2nd Floor Restrooms (Sheet A1.2A).

b. Delete accessibility upgrades for 3rd Floor Restroom.



AC Transit SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 01 25 00 -- PAGE 1 OF 5

SECTION 01 25 00

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.


1. Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to

changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or

unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or the District that are

not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to

Contractor or the District.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or

fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title

and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the

following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or

installation cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions

needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by

the District and separate contractors that will be necessary to

accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution

with those of the work specified. Include annotated copy of

applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include



attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect,

sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features

and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the

Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and

fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.

f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.

g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names

and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.

h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and

interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.

i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect

for Project, from current International Building Code.

j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using

proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including

effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of

construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include

letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of

receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the

Contract Sum.

l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with

requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in

substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is

appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may

subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed

substitution to produce indicated results.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.

Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager or District

Representative of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within fifteen (15)

days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt of additional information or

documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive,

or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the

Work.



Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time

allocated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution

with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility

tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.5 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved

substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for

change, but not later than fifteen (15) days prior to time required for preparation and review of

related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the

following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,

Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these

requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and

will produce indicated results.

b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that

specified product provided.

c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's

construction schedule.

e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities

having jurisdiction.

f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the

Work.

h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.



2. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is

compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within

sixty (60) days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be

considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the

following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,

Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these

requirements:

a. Requested substitution offers District a substantial advantage in cost,

time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting

additional responsibilities District must assume. District’s additional

responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign

and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by

District, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the

Contract Documents.

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and

will produce indicated results.

d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that

specified product provided.

e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's


g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities


h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the

Work.

j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested

substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is

uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is

acceptable to all contractors involved.

2. Review Costs: Contractor shall pay for costs of Architect to review substitution requests

at the Architect’s normal hourly rate for others services on this project.






AC Transit PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 01 31 00 -- PAGE 1 OF 10

SECTION 01 31 00

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures

2. Coordination drawings

3. Requests for Information (RFIs)

4. District’s Project Management Software

5. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility

are assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting

Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and

field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from District, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or

clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: See Section 00 20 00 – Instructions to Bidders.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within fifteen (15) days of starting construction operations, submit a list

of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at

Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and

telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail

addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as in the

absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each

temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.



1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate

construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper

installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before

or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and

accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures

required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees

at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for District and separate contractors if coordination of their

Work is required

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts

and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not

limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule

2. Preparation of the schedule of values

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls

4. Delivery and processing of submittals

5. Progress meetings

6. Pre-installation conferences

7. Project closeout activities

8. Startup and adjustment of systems

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with

consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of

temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually

incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials

that are designated as District’s property.



1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of

the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by

Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's

work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or

interpretation and the following:

1. Project name

2. Project number

3. Date

4. Name of Contractor

5. Name of Architect

6. RFI number, numbered sequentially

7. RFI subject

8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate

9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate

10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate

11. Contractor's suggested resolution: If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI

12. Contractor's signature

13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, product data, shop

drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe

items needing interpretation

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of

affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: RFI Forms will be generated upon entering information into the District’s Project

Management Software PMWeb.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.

Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect

after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals

b. Requests for approval of substitutions

c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods

d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the

Contract Documents

e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum



f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals

g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case

Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to

Section 00 70 00, Part 6 "Changes in the Work."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within

ten (10) days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.

Submit log weekly. Use Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) I Log Form 13.2B, or if

available, use software log that is part of District’s Project Management Software. Include the

following:

1. Project name

2. Name and address of Contractor

3. Name and address of Architect

4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.

5. RFI description

6. Date the RFI was submitted

7. Date Architect's response was received

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response

to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven (7) days if Contractor

disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.

2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as

appropriate.

1.6 District’s Web-based Project Management Software

A. The Contractor is required to use the District’s Project Management Software, currently PMWeb,

for document control and district workflows necessary for approval of all documents including,

but not limited to RFI’s submittals, change orders and other document types.

Final copies of all project documentation as listed below shall be uploaded and/or logged into the

software’s document manager and appropriate module within the folder structure as agreed upon

with the Project Manager:

1. Project directory

2. Project correspondence

3. Meeting minutes



4. Change Orders and logs

5. RFI’s and logs

6. Issues and risk logs

7. Photo documentation

8. Schedules

9. Submittals and logs

10. Payment applications

11. Drawing and specification documents

12. Project calendar

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, including individuals whose

presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify District and Architect of

scheduled meeting dates and times

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda and distribute to all invited attendees.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions

and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned,

including District and Architect, within three (3) days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference

before starting construction, at a time convenient to District and Architect, but no later than

fifteen (15) days after execution of the Contract.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the District, the District’s Commissioning

Authority, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major

subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference.

Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude

matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the

following:

a. Tentative construction schedule

b. Phasing

c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items

d. Designation of key personnel and their duties

e. Lines of communications

f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders

g. Procedures for RFIs

h. Procedures for testing and inspecting

i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment

j. Distribution of the Contract Documents

k. Submittal procedures



l. Preparation of record documents

m. Use of the premises and existing building

n. Work restrictions

o. Working hours

p. District’s occupancy requirements

q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls

r. Procedures for moisture and mold control

s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns

t. Construction waste management and recycling

u. Parking availability

v. Office, work, and storage areas

w. Equipment deliveries and priorities

x. First aid

y. Security

z. Progress cleaning

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting

minutes.

C. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and

installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise

Architect, and the District’s Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the

particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents

b. Options

c. Related RFIs

d. Related Change Orders

e. Purchases

f. Deliveries

g. Submittals

h. Review of mockups

i. Possible conflicts

j. Compatibility requirements

k. Time schedules

l. Weather limitations

m. Manufacturer's written instructions

n. Warranty requirements

o. Compatibility of materials

p. Acceptability of substrates

q. Temporary facilities and controls

r. Space and access limitations

s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction

t. Testing and inspecting requirements

u. Installation procedures



v. Coordination with other work

w. Required performance results

x. Protection of adjacent work

y. Protection of construction and personnel

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties

requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.

Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the

Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

A. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time

convenient to District and Architect, but no later than ninety (90) days prior to the scheduled

date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project

closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of District, District’s Commissioning Authority,

Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major

subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting.

Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude

matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,

including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents

b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion

and for final inspection for acceptance

c. Submittal of written warranties

d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data

e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare

parts

f. Requirements for demonstration and training

g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list

h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial

Completion and for final payment

i. Submittal procedures

j. Coordination of separate contracts

k. District’s partial occupancy requirements

l. Installation of District’s furniture, fixtures, and equipment

m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

B. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.



1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of District and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in

planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these

meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized

to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as

appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last

meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of

schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction

schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be

expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so.

Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current

and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

(1) Review schedule for next period

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the

following:

(1) Interface requirements

(2) Sequence of operations

(3) Resolution of Building Information Modeling (BIM)

component conflicts

(4) Status of submittals

(5) Deliveries

(6) Off-site fabrication

(7) Access

(8) Site utilization

(9) Temporary facilities and controls

(10) Progress cleaning

(11) Quality and work standards

(12) Status of correction of deficient items

(13) Field observations

(14) Status of RFIs

(15) Status of proposal requests

(16) Pending changes

(17) Status of Change Orders

(18) Pending claims and disputes

(19) Documentation of information for payment requests

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the

meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.



5. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress

meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised

schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

C. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at appropriate interval intervals.

Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such

as progress meetings and pre-installation conferences.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of District and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in

planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these

meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized

to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting.

Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for

discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress

since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract

is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to

combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how

construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments

from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions

are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be

completed within the Contract Time.

b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction

schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the

schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule

concurrently with report of each meeting.

c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including

the following:

(1) Interface requirements

(2) Sequence of operations

(3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts

(4) Status of submittals

(5) Deliveries

(6) Off-site fabrication

(7) Access

(8) Site utilization

(9) Temporary facilities and controls

(10) Work hours

(11) Hazards and risks

(12) Progress cleaning

(13) Quality and work standards

(14) Change Orders



3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and

to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.





AC Transit CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 01 32 00 -- PAGE 1 OF 10

SECTION 01 32 00

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of

construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Startup construction schedule

2. Contractor's construction schedule

3. Construction schedule updating reports

4. Daily construction reports

5. Material location reports

6. Site condition reports

7. Special reports


1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.

2. Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,

and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume

time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the

planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.

3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as

scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless

otherwise approved by Architect.

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction

project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations

determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network

schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.



E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either District or Contractor, but is a

jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet

schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting

the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without

adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of

an activity as scheduled.


A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated

2. PDF electronic file

3. Two paper copies

B. Startup construction schedule

1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of

schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction

period. Show logic ties for activities.

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule

for entire construction period.

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to

comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated)

and date on label.

E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format

for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource

loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date,

late finish date, and total float in calendar days.

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date,

or actual start date if known.



2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in

ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if

known.

3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float

4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from commencement of

the Work until most recent Application for Payment

F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment

G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals

H. Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals

I. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions

J. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event

K. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant


A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and

reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within twenty-four (24) hours

of Architect's request.

B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures

related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule,

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports

2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule

3. Discuss constraints, including phasing work stages area separations interim milestones

and partial District occupancy

4. Review delivery dates for Contract-furnished products

5. Review schedule for work of Contract’s separate contracts

6. Review submittal requirements and procedures

7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals

8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies

9. Review time required for Project closeout and Contract startup procedures, including

commissioning activities

10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule

11. Review procedures for updating schedule



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,

submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and

reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities

involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule

them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of

Substantial Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows

an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main

element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than twenty (20) days,

unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long

lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than sixty (60) days, as separate

activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to,

submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 01

33 00 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in

Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than fifteen (15) days for startup and

testing.

5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures

necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than thirty (30) days for

completion of punch list items and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and

as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.



1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase

2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract

3. Work by District: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by

District

4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include

delivery date indicated in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated

stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

5. District-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include

delivery date indicated in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated

stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction

b. Limitations of continued occupancies

c. Uninterruptible services

d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion

e. Use of premises restrictions

f. Provisions for future construction

g. Seasonal variations

h. Environmental control

7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the

Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Subcontract awards

b. Submittals

c. Purchases

d. Mockups

e. Fabrication

f. Sample testing

g. Deliveries

h. Installation

i. Tests and inspections

j. Adjusting

k. Curing

l. Building flush-out

m. Startup and placement into final use and operation

8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of

the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be

sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:

a. Structural completion

b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning

c. Permanent space enclosure



d. Completion of mechanical installation

e. Completion of electrical installation

f. Substantial Completion

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but

not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion

E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs.

On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and

actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.

1. See Section 00 70 00 General Conditions Part 9 "Payment Procedures" for cost

reporting and payment procedures.

F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or

commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues

2. Unanswered Requests for Information

3. Rejected or unreturned submittals

4. Notations on returned submittals

5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time

G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is fourteen (14) or more calendar

days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating

means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to

working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and

date by which recovery will be accomplished.

H. Computer Scheduling Software: If applicable, prepare schedules using current version of a

program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

1. Use Microsoft Project or Primavera P6. Provide native file format and PDF file of

required schedules in District’s project management software as specified in section 00

31 00.

2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within

seven days of date established for commencement of the Work.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of

each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90

days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash

requirement prediction based on indicated activities.



2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type,

Contractor's construction schedule within thirty (30) days of date established for commencement

of the Work. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information

received since the start of Project.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of

each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an

estimated completion percentage in ten (10%) percent increments within time bar.

2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.

B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within fourteen (14) days of date established for

commencement of the Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first ninety (90)

days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash

requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

C. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its

submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect

of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

D. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating

straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing

the following:

1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity

2. Description of activity

3. Main events of activity

4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities

5. Early and late start dates

6. Early and late finish dates

7. Activity duration in workdays

8. Total float or slack time

9. Average size of workforce

10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values)

E. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare a narrative report

containing the following:

1. Description of the current Critical Path and Near Critical Paths, including for each:

a. Description of change in Critical Path and Near Critical Paths, if any



b. Amount of Float associated with each, and progress made on each

during the reporting period, including explanation for lack of progress

on Critical Path activities that were planned to be performed

c. Description of critical activities schedule to be performed in the next

reporting period

2. Status of major project components (including percent complete, amount of time ahead

or behind schedule)

3. Listing of current and potential delays including cause of delay, actual/estimated impact

on delay on Contract Milestone Dates or other milestone completion dates, and

discussion of current/potential corrective/mitigated action(s) to address the issues/delays

4. Status of major material and equipment procurement

5. Explanation for any schedule revisions organized by Work grouping, including

identification of logic change, Activity Duration changes, and Activity

additions/deletions along with reasons for the changes

6. List of approved Change Orders incorporated or pending incorporation into the Current

Schedule and a report identifying the resultant changes in resource and/or cost loading

7. Identification of unplanned restrictions or conditions regarding labor, equipment or

material. Update of manual labor staffing plan, crew sizes, shifts per day, shift hours,

and major equipment usage plan showing actual “head count” and major equipment use

for the reporting period versus the most recently approved baseline construction

schedule (BCS).

2.5 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following

information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site

2. List of separate contractors at Project site

3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site

4. Equipment at Project site

5. Material deliveries

6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain

or snow

7. Accidents

8. Meetings and significant decisions

9. Unusual events (see special reports)

10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses

11. Meter readings and similar recordings

12. Emergency procedures

13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction

14. Change Orders received and implemented



15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented

16. Services connected and disconnected

17. Equipment or system tests and startups

18. Partial completions and occupancies

19. Substantial Completions authorized

B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of

materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials

previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on

and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project

site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:

1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage

2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed

3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage

C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and

the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for

Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with

recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to the District within one day(s) of an occurrence.

Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at

Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.

List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of

results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise the District in advance when these

events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting

using CPM scheduling.

1. In-House Option: The District may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if

Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting

techniques. Submit qualifications.

2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress,

alleged delays, and time impact.



B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect

actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one (1) week before each regularly

scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have

been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each

such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not

limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, District, separate contractors,

testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know

schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in

the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their

assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction

activities.



AC Transit SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 01 33 00 -- PAGE 1 OF 14

SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural

requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

1. Submittal Procedures

2. Submittal Review

3. Progress Schedules

4. Submittal Schedule

5. Proposed Products List

6. Product Data

7. Shop Drawings

8. Samples

9. Design Data

10. Test Reports

11. Certificates

12. Manufacturer’s Instructions

13. Manufacturer’s Field Reports

B. Related Requirements

1. Division 0, Section 00 70 00, Part 9 for submitting Applications for Payment and the

schedule of values.

2. Division 1, Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting

schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Division 1, Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation

and maintenance manuals.

4. Division 1, Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record

Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data and providing demonstration

of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's

responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification

Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not

require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with



requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification

Sections as "informational submittals."

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from

another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An

FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and

external users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used

for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-

layout document format.


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates

required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,

fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making

corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and

reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and

Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include

submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required

to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead

time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's


a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for

submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.

b. Specification Section number and title.

c. Submittal category: Action; informational.

d. Name of subcontractor.

e. Description of the Work covered.

f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.

g. Scheduled date of fabrication.

h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.

i. Scheduled dates for installation.

j. Activity or event number.



1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be

provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract

Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data

drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in

AutoCad 2013 or subsequent releases.

c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of

AIA Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,

and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless

partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification

Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for

coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination

with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.

Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract

Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work

to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time

if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor

when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as

initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals

may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15

days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being

returned to Contractor.



D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.

2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block

to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name of Architect.

d. Name of Construction Manager.

e. Name of Contractor.

f. Name of subcontractor.

g. Name of supplier.

h. Name of manufacturer.

i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

(1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a

decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals

shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,

061000.01.A).

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

m. Other necessary identification.

4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and

unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents,

initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number

of copies to Architect.

5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately

for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect

will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use AIA Document G810.

b. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following

information:

(1) Project name.

(2) Date.

(3) Destination (To:).

(4) Source (From:).

(5) Name and address of Architect.

(6) Name of Construction Manager.

(7) Name of Contractor.



(8) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

(9) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

(10) Category and type of submittal.

(11) Submittal purpose and description.

(12) Specification Section number and title.

(13) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for

each of multiple items.

(14) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

(15) Indication of full or partial submittal.

(16) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.

(17) Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

(18) Remarks.

(19) Signature of transmitter.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as

follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal

requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling

navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by

a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01).

Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,

LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval

markings and action taken by Architect.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic

project management software or electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the

following information:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name and address of Architect.

d. Name of Construction Manager.

e. Name of Contractor.

f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

h. Category and type of submittal.

i. Submittal purpose and description.

j. Specification Section number and title.

k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items.

l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

n. Related physical samples submitted directly.

o. Indication of full or partial submittal.



p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.

q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

r. Other necessary identification.

s. Remarks.

5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file

metadata:

a. Project name.

b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

c. Manufacturer name.

d. Product name.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's

letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by

Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,

including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related

submittal.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision.

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of

construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action

submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

1.5 SUBMITTAL REVIEW

A. Submittals will be reviewed for conformance with requirements of the Contract

Documents. Review of a separate item will not constitute review of an assembly in which

the item functions. Review will not relieve the Contractor from Contractor's responsibility

for accuracy of submittals; for conformity of submittals to requirements of Contract

Documents; for coordinating Work with that of other trades; for compatibility of described

product with contiguous products and the rest of the system; for conforming and

correlating quantities and dimensions; for selecting fabrication processes and techniques

of construction; for performing Work in a safe and satisfactory manner; and for

prosecution and completion of the Contract in accordance with the Contract Documents.



B. It must be understood that the provisions herein apply to Engineer's review, A/E's review,

District review, and review by other District representatives.

C. Review is only for the limited purpose of checking for general conformance with the

information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

1. Review is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of

details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions of installation

or performance. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's

responsibility. Submittals which do not include the Contractor's certification that the

information complies with the Contract Documents will be returned without action.

2. Review of submittals does not authorize variation from Contract Documents unless approval

of proposed variation has been expressly requested and specifically noted as a variation on

the submittal.

3. Review is only for items to be furnished by the submitting supplier and does not constitute

approval of any assemblage of which the submitted item is a component nor approval of

construction sequence or method.

D. The Engineer will indicate its reviews of submittals and the action taken by means of its

review stamp. The review stamp will be affixed by the Engineer, the action block will be

marked, and the stamp will be signed and dated. The review-stamp action-block marks

will have the following meanings:

1. The mark FURNISH AS SUBMITTED - NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN is an acceptance, and

means that every illustration and description appears to conform to the respective

requirements of the Contract Documents; that fabrication, assembly, manufacture,

installation, application, and erection of the illustrated and described product may proceed;

and that the submittal need not be resubmitted.

2. The mark FURNISH AS CORRECTED - RESUBMISSION NOT REQUIRED is an

acceptance, and means that every illustration and description appears to conform to the

respective requirements of the Contract Documents upon incorporation of the reviewer's

corrections/and that fabrication, assembly, manufacture, installation, application, and

erection of the illustrated and described product may proceed. Submittals so marked need

not be resubmitted unless the Contractor challenges the reviewer's exception.

3. The mark REVISE AND RESUBMIT - RESUBMISSION REQUIRED WITHIN DAYS is

an acceptance, and means that every illustration and description appears to conform to the

respective requirements of the Contract Documents, and that fabrication, assembly,

manufacture, installation, application, and erection of the illustrated and described product

may proceed after incorporation of the reviewer's corrections and verification by the

Engineer that the reviewer's corrections have been properly incorporated in the submittal.

Resubmission within the time period specified is also required if the Contractor challenges

the reviewer's corrections.

4. The mark SUBMIT SPECIFIED ITEM or REJECTED is a disapproval, and

means that the submittal does not comply with Contract Documents or is



deficient to the degree that the reviewer cannot correct the submittal with a

reasonable degree of effort, has not made a thorough review of the

submittal, and that the submittal needs revision and is to be corrected and

resubmitted. Do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the

submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity.

Contractor must make a new submittal. Submittals stamped SUBMIT

SPECIFIED ITEM or REJECTED are not to be used and not permitted on

the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by

individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification

Sections.

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site or Architect's

FTP site specifically established for Project.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an

electronic Project record document file.

2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an

electronic Project record document file.

3. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated.

Architect will return two copies.

4. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise

indicated. Architect will not return copies.

5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed

by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted

certificates and certifications where indicated.

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications

where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and

type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data

are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.



3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.

c. Standard color charts.

d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.

e. Testing by recognized testing agency.

f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.

g. Notation of coordination requirements.

h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.

c. Operational range diagrams.

d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

b. Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return

two copies.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base

Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless

submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.

b. Schedules.

c. Compliance with specified standards.

d. Notation of coordination requirements.

e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by

42 inches (750 by 1067 mm).

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:


b. Two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy(ies).



c. Three opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will retain two copies; remainder

will be returned.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between

submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together

in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.

c. Sample source.

d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic

submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and

identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-

control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be

used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual

Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time

of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's

property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern,

texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's

product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared

from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and

physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of

color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the

following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or

containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing

color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing

and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample

sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a

project record sample.



(1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be

demonstrated.

(2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in

material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of

paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the

following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract

Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.

3. Number and name of room or space.

4. Location within room or space.

5. Submit product schedule in the following format:


b. Three paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated. Architect

will return two copies.

F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100

"Project Management and Coordination."

G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200

"Construction Progress Documentation."

H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in

Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with

requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified

in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and

Maintenance Data."

L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of

firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact

information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply

with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification

and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel

certified.



N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is

authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of

manufacturing experience where required.

P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with

requirements in the Contract Documents.

S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation

of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on

comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.

Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization.

2. Date of evaluation.

3. Time period when report is in effect.

4. Product and manufacturers' names.

5. Description of product.

6. Test procedures and results.

7. Limitations of use.

U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation

of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before

installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation

needed for adhesion.

W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests

performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for

compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.



X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.

Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.

Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for

calculations. Include page numbers.

Y. Manufacturer’s Instructions:

1. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for

delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Engineer for

delivery to the District in quantities specified for Product Data.

2. Submit manufacturer's instructions for information for the limited purpose of assessing

conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract

Documents.

3. In dicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special

environmental criteria required for application or installation

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide

products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit

a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other

required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of

certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system

specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing

these services.

2. Prepare delegated-design drawings in the following format: Same digital data software

program, version, and operating system as the original Drawings.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with

other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections

and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700

"Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name

and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date

of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and

approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or

revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and

will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will

return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to

appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial

submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned

for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without

action.



AC Transit QUALITY REQUIREMENTS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 01 40 00 -- PAGE 1 OF 10

SECTION 01 40 00

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality

control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the

Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities

are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections

may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-

assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document

requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required

by Architect, District, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this

Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed

construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after

execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed

construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities

performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed

to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where

indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to

show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified

installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved

mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.



1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify

performance characteristics.

2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from

the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and

subassemblies.

3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling

finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and

lighting.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products

and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified

criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing

agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to

establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,

plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation

of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,

Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including

installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that

certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that

requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully

completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;

being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards

establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply

with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but

apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.



B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be

the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the

minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.

To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as

appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before

proceeding.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and

responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,

submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before

starting work on the following systems:

1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the

designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-

resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a

recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title

2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections

3. Description of test and inspection

4. Identification of applicable standards

5. Identification of test and inspection methods

6. Number of tests and inspections required

7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections

8. Requirements for obtaining samples

9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within ten (10) days of Notice of

Award, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format

acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and

forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities.

Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.



B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and

experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar

in nature and extent to those required for Project.

1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through

review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible

for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work

requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and

inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and

inspections

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the

"Statement of Special Inspections."

3. District-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during

construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and

inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into

compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved

mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of

approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or

defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with

requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other

Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue

2. Project title and number

3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency

4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections

6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method

7. Identification of product and Specification Section

8. Complete test or inspection data

9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting



11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements

12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector

13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information

documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other


1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product

3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements

4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken

5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements

6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty

7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting

manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other


1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative

making report

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements

3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements

4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty

5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For District’s records, submit copies of permits, licenses,

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee

payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well

as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient

production capacity to produce required units.



D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice

in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services

of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the

system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for

this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be

performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy

qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for

specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according

to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where

required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of

manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this

Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of

manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this

Project.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using

materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect.

2. Notify Architect seven (7) days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed.

3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers

that will be employed during the construction at Project.

4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.



5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven (7) days for initial review and each re-review of each

mockup.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

1.8 QUALITY CONTROL

A. District Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as District’s responsibility,

District will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. District will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing

agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to

perform.

2. Payment for these services will be arranged and paid for separately by the District.

3. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work

that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the

Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to District are

Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that

the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required

by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor

by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing

agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by District, unless

agreed to in writing by District.

3. Notify testing agencies at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of time when Work that

requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract

Documents are Contractor's responsibility.



6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,

when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal

Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical

representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services

include participation in pre-installation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions,

verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of

the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for

construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the

Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests

are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and

inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar

quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve

or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar

quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency

sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples



5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and

-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing

construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-

control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-

control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule.

Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to District, Architect, testing agencies, and each party

involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.9 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to conduct

special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of

District, and as follows:

B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency or special inspector as

required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and

as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures

and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed

in the Work during performance of its services.

a. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and

similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor

and to authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which

includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

4. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected

work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

5. Retesting and re-inspecting corrected work.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected

3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect

4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test

and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched

areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible

as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching

in Section 01 73 00 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.



AC Transit TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 01 50 00 -- PAGE 1 OF 6

SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and

protection facilities.


1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.2 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in

the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and

facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities


B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from District’s existing water system is

available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and

extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from District’s existing system is

available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and

extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for

construction personnel.

B. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having

jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention

program.

C. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and

construction from water absorption and damage.

1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water

absorption or water damage.

2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating

water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.



3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials,

plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these

operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to

permit installation of finish materials.

D. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the

dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame

for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be

inadequate. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work

2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing

3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge

4. Waste handling procedures

5. Other dust-control measures


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary

electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each

temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume

responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use

as a construction facility before District’s acceptance, regardless of previously assigned

responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick,

galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel

pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner

and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for

supporting posts.

B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil (0.25-mm) minimum thickness, with

flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.



C. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches (914 by

1624 mm).

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by

locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage

filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.

2.3 SWING STAGE

A. If a swing stage is used, verify, and if necessary obtain, certification of davits.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with

performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are

no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Parking: Use designated areas of District’s existing parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Comply with the City of Oakland “Construction and Demolition Debris Waste Reduction and

C. Recycling Requirements” (Chapter 15.34, Oakland Municipal Code.

D. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and

equipment" and not temporary facilities.

E. Existing Elevator Use: Use of District’s existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators

are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to District. At Substantial Completion,

restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide

shoes, and similar items of limited life.

1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.



2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect

elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become

damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of

correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make

required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

F. Existing Stair Usage: Use of District’s existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are

cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to District. At Substantial Completion, restore

stairs to condition existing before initial use.

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs

and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no

evidence remains of correction work.

3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and

other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be

removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air,

waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."

C. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line

of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems

from damage, flooding, and erosion.

D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

E. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and

as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress

and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.

Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

G. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration

and to separate areas occupied by District from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet on

each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet, extending

sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints.

Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated plywood.

H. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not less than 48

inches (1219 mm) between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in vestibule.



1. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

3.4 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible

signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject

to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage

2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water

3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete

4. Remove standing water from decks

5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full

enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of

moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with

high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.

3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.

4. Discard or replace water-damaged material.

5. Do not install material that is wet.

6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.

7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before

enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and

abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a twenty-four (24) hour basis where required to

achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,

when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial

Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been

delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed

surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.



1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.

District reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration

into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove

soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove

materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and

other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace

street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities


3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during

construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 77

00 "Closeout Procedures."



AC Transit PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 01 60 00 -- PAGE 1 OF 6

SECTION 01 60 00

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in

Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products;

special warranties; and comparable products.


1. Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken

from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment,"

"system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product

literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or

facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new

products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal

process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service

performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or

exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's

product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or

model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function,

dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for

purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the

specification.


A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.

Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification

Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.



1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable

Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product

request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable

product request within fifteen (15) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt

of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal

Procedures." Use product specified if Architect does not issue a

decision on use of a comparable product request within time

allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00

"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products

for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously

selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods

compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible

products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,

deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that

are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other

losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original

sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for

handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.



4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and

to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment.

5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by the Contractor’s construction forces. Coordinate location with District.

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on

product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract

Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to District.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide

specific rights for District.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and

identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a

written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for

submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are

undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used

successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. District reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict

with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make

selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications

establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or

"or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable

Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the

named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions

for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be

considered.

3. Products:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that

complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions

for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise

indicated.

b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of

both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the

products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with



requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"

Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers'

names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that

complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for

Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise

indicated.

b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available

manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed,

or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with

requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"

Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product

indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or

indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.

Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics

that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable

Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named

manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample",

provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's

decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other

specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution

Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect

from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with

requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's

product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable

product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,

Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these

requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents

that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,

and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.



2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the

Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,

durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.

5. Samples, if requested.




AC Transit EXECUTION February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 01 73 00 -- PAGE 1 OF 10

SECTION 01 73 00

EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the

Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.

2. Installation of the Work.

3. Cutting and patching, including exterior ceramic tile and stone paving.

4. Progress cleaning.

5. Starting and adjusting.

6. Protection of installed construction.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.

2. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of

the building.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of

other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after

installation of other work.


A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time

cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance

and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform

patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.

5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and

patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated

and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services

and systems will be disrupted.



a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during

interruption of permanent services and systems.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of

construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of

locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.

Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and

patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or

increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components

in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in

increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements

include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment.

b. Fire separation assemblies.

c. Air or smoke barriers.

d. Fire-suppression systems.

e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.

f. Control systems.

g. Communication systems.

h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems.

i. Conveying systems.

j. Electrical wiring systems.

k. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or

components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in

reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or

decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not

limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

b. Membranes and flashings.

c. Exterior curtain-wall construction.

d. Sprayed fire-resistive material.

e. Equipment supports.

f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.

g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual

evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner

that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and

replace construction that has 0been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.



B. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved

in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential

interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before

proceeding.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written

recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed

surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,

will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of

in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of utilities and construction indicated as existing

are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of

utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the

Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where

indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions

affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to

be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with

existing finishes or primers.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work

is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work.

2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.

3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.

4. Recommended corrections.



D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding

with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before

fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the

Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for

clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control

of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in

Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on

Drawings. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General:

C. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and

elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

1. Establish limits on use of Project site.

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required

dimensions.

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.

4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.

5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and

elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and

90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces.



B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in

applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.

Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction

items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory

prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate

provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size

and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with

other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and

type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at

heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with

integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to

Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,

arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered

hazardous.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed

with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their

original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to

void existing warranties.



C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide

protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during

cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free

passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to

requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems

are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting

to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or

adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply

with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering

and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum

disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-

core drill.

4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent

entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations

following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as

practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate

physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration

into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching

and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing

materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into

another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface

of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall

coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and

appearance.



a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and

intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final

paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional

coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane

surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a

weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

6. Ceramic Tile and Stone Walking Surfaces:

a. Thoroughly clean existing tile, stone and grout using pressure washing and methods

recommended by grout and grout sealer manufacturer.

b. Remove all existing grout that is damaged, missing or cracked away from surfaces

using saws and grinders being careful not to damage tile or stone units.

c. Install new grout where existing grout is removed following instructions of grout

manufacturer.

d. Install joint sealers.

e. Seal existing and new grout.

f. High-Performance Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.

(1) Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

Mapei Fast-setting sanded polymer-modified grout, “Ultracolor Plus.” or

comparable product by one of the following:

A. Ardex Americas.

B. Boiardi Products Corporation; a QEP company.

C. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.

D. Bostik, Inc.

E. C-Cure.

F. Custom Building Products.

G. Jamo Inc.

H. Laticrete International, Inc.

I. MAPEI Corporation.

J. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.

K. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

L. TEC; H. B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.

(2) Polymer Type: acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with

other dry ingredients.

g. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does

not change color or appearance of grout.

(1) Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following:

A. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer.

B. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard Sealer, Grout and Tile Sealer

or Grout Sealer.



C. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Grout Sealer or Clear Penetrating

Sealer & Grout Release.

D. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal or SL-99, Summitseal II.

E. TEC, H. B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.; Grout Guard Plus

Penetrating Grout Sealer, Grout Guard Penetrating Grout Sealeror

Guard All Invisible Penetrating Sealer.

(2) Grout sealers shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification.

h. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile and stone

surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

i. Remove grout residue from tile and stone as soon as possible.

j. Clean grout smears and haze from tile and stone according to tile and grout

manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use

only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after

determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other

surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of

cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

k. Protect installed tile and stone work with heavy covering during construction period

to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply

coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

l. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting

is completed.

m. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective

cleaner from tile surfaces.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,

mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements

strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and

debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if

the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark

containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors

are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for

proper execution of the Work.



1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire

work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials

specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning

materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure

freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down

sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000

"Temporary Facilities and Controls."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining

materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from

damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the

remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure

operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,

completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious

exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in

Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing."

B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning

units, replace with new units, and retest.

C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation

without binding.

D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements."



3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



AC Transit CLOSE OUT PROCEDURES February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 01 77 00 -- PAGE 1 OF 6

SECTION 01 77 00

CLOSE OUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but

not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.

2. Final completion procedures.

3. Warranties.

4. Final cleaning.

5. Repair of the Work.


1. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.

2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual

requirements and requirements for instructing Owner's personnel.

3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in

other Sections.



1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and

corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why

the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior

to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that

are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction

permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include

occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project

record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction

photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar

final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,

workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar

documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,

spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by

Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of

maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and

name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for

receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior

to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that

are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions.

3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.

4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.

5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in

Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.

7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders.

8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements.

9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.



D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a

minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and

tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of

unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after

inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items

identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final

completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment

Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial

Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and

dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed

or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage

complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of

10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On

receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled

requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify

Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by

construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary,

areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding

from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.



b. Date.

c. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.

b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.

c. Three paper copies. Architect will return two copies.

1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of

the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is

indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of

designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during

construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project

Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch

(215-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark

tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or

installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone

number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"

Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and

bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling

navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator

of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health

or property or that might damage finished surfaces.



1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable,

use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable

VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with

local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance

program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification

of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other

foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other

foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from

Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.

f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural

weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original

condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,

plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.

j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.

Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent.

l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign

substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces

of diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during

construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.



(1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01.

Provide written report on completion of cleaning.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities

and Controls." Prepare written report.

D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000

"Temporary Facilities and Controls."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of

Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective

parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting

operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide

replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore

damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other

damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including

mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and

identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede

operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and

noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for

new fixtures.



AC Transit OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 01 78 23 -- PAGE 1 OF 9

SECTION 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and

maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory

2. Emergency manuals

3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment

4. Product maintenance manuals

5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals


1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for

operation and maintenance manuals.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual

Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual

content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are

acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions

and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file.

Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with

applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked

operation and maintenance directory.



b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. Three (3) paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory.

Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two

copies.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least thirty (30) days before

commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and

content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for

Substantial Completion and at least fifteen (15) days before commencing demonstration and

training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of

each corrected manual within fifteen (15) days of receipt of Architect's and

Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and

training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance

data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information.

Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents

2. List of systems

3. List of equipment

4. Table of contents

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation

and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For

pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance

manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,

identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the

Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to

ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building

Systems."



2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each

system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.

Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page

2. Table of contents

3. Manual contents

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual

2. Name and address of Project

3. Name and address of District

4. Date of submittal

5. Name and contact information for Contractor

6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager

7. Name and contact information for Architect

8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority

9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals

10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to

the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project

Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to

accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each

volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by

system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment,

and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic

PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where

scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable

file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file

names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names

used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and

subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so

that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily

navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening

file.



F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness

necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm)

paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with

pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two (2) or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a

system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and

related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to

provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of

equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title

"OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or

name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification

Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for

multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual.

Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components

of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification

Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic

software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper.

5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text

pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place

drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual.

At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating

drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency

2. Emergency instructions

3. Emergency procedures

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include

instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:



1. Fire

2. Flood

3. Gas leak

4. Water leak

5. Power failure

6. Water outage

7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure

8. Chemical release or spill

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and

similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of District’s operating personnel for

notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping

2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency

3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits

4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems

5. Special operating instructions and procedures

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual

Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and

equipment indicated on Contract Documents

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility

3. Operating standards

4. Operating procedures

5. Operating logs

6. Wiring diagrams

7. Control diagrams

8. Piped system diagrams

9. Precautions against improper use

10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract

Documents

2. Manufacturer's name

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component

4. Equipment function

5. Operating characteristics

6. Limiting conditions

7. Performance curves

8. Engineering data and tests

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts



C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures

3. Routine and normal operating instructions

4. Regulation and control procedures

5. Instructions on stopping

6. Normal shutdown instructions

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems

9. Special operating instructions and procedures

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as

installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for

identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include

source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,

and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and

arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone

number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification

Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier

where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number

2. Manufacturer's name

3. Color, pattern, and texture

4. Material and chemical composition

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance

5. Repair instructions

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related

services.



F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source

information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance

and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and

warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,

identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,

list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,

and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or

schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential

maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions

2. Troubleshooting guide

3. Precautions against improper maintenance

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions

6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required

lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and

service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,

quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording

maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts

identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources

of maintenance materials and related services.



G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and

telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides

an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures

for use by emergency personnel and by District’s operating personnel for types of emergencies

indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and

maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not

part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional

manual for use by District’s operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only

sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or

component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,

identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data

applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and

where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or

systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and

flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to

ensure correct illustration of completed installation.



1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance

manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 01 78 39

"Project Record Documents."

3.2 Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and

maintenance documentation.



AC Transit PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS February 21, 2018 Oakland, CA SECTION 01 78 39 -- PAGE 1 OF 5

SECTION 01 78 39

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,

including the following:

1. Record Drawings

2. Record Specifications

3. Record Product Data

4. Miscellaneous record submittals


1. Section 01 70 00 "Execution and Closeout Requirements" for general closeout

procedures.

2. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one (1) set of marked-up record prints.

2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

3. Initial Submittal:

a. Submit one (1) paper-copy set of marked-up record prints.

b. Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file

prints.

c. Submit record digital data files and one set of plots.

d. Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

4. Final Submittal:

a. Submit three (3) paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.

b. Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and three (3)

set(s) of prints.

c. Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional

information were recorded.



B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and

contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one (1) paper copy of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,

submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-

keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit

one paper copy paper copies of each submittal.

E. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record

documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field

changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one (1) set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and

Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,

whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide

information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that

would be difficult to identify or measure and record later

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it

d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations

e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic

documentation

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings

c. Depths of foundations below first floor

d. Locations and depths of underground utilities

e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits

f. Revisions to electrical circuitry

g. Actual equipment locations

h. Duct size and routing

i. Locations of concealed internal utilities

j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive

k. Changes made following Architect's written orders



l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings

m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions

n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use

personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record

prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish

between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted

from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order

numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial

Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set

of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the

original Contract Drawings.

2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.

3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.

4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for

use in recording information.

a. See Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related

to use of Architect's digital data files.

b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in

separate layers.

C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings

where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are

suitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting

an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record

the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly

prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for

formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.



D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD

DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into

manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification

on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.

3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet

identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name

b. Date

c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."

d. Name of Architect

e. Name of Contractor

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and

equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to

provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in

operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic

file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.



1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where

applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic

file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and

title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file

miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic

file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section

number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record

document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do

not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the

field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record

documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,

dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record

documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



AC Transit SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Oakland, CA SECTION 02 41 19 - Page 1 of 6 10/06/17

SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.


1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, District-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS DISTRICTSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.



3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure District's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of District's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of

District's partial occupancy of completed Work.

D. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.

E. Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. District will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so District's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by District as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.



1. Hazardous materials will be removed by District before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and District. Hazardous materials will be removed by District under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the following:

1. Traffic coating on Penthouse Level.

B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by District. District does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.



D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. District will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to District.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.



1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling

specified in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.



8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.

B. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade and suspended slabs: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

C. Traffic coatings and flashings: Ensure that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. If needed, insert requirements for other materials, products, equipment, and services.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, crane or other device

that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.



AC Transit CONCRETE AND CMU REPAIR Oakland, CA SECTION 03 01 30 - Page 1 of 12 10/06/17

SECTION 03 01 30 CONCRETE AND CMU REPAIR

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Epoxy crack injection for CMU. 2. Corrosion-inhibiting treatment. 3. Crack patching using mortar in CMU. 4. Concrete repairs 5. Non-shrink grout

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 03 30 00 “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for concrete mixes used for repairs to cast-in-place concrete and overlays exceeding 1.5 inches in thickness.

2. Section 07 88 00 “Traffic Coatings” overlays not exceeding 1.5 inches in thickness


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to concrete maintenance including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Verify patching specialist's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

b. Materials, material application, sequencing, tolerances, and required clearances. c. Quality-control program. d. Coordination with building occupants.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, chemical composition, physical properties, test data, and mixing, preparation, and application instructions.



B. Samples: Cured Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's standard size appropriate for each type of work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Cured Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture.

1. Include sets of patching-material Samples in the form of briquettes, at least 3 inches (75 mm) long by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide representative of the range of concrete colors on the building. Document each Sample with product, mix, and or other information necessary to replicate it.

2. Include sets of Samples for epoxy crack-injection adhesive and capping adhesive in the form of injection-treated, whole, dense concrete block or brick units representative of the range of required adhesive colors.

D. Samples for Verification: Cured Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

1. Include Samples of each required type, color, and texture of patching material in the form of patches in drilled holes or sawed joints in sample concrete representative of the range of concrete colors on the building.

2. Include Samples of epoxy crack-injection in the form of injection-treated, whole, dense concrete block or brick units representative of the range of required adhesive colors.


A. Qualification Data: For patching specialist and manufacturers.

B. Product Test Reports: For each manufactured bonding agent cementitious patching mortar joint-filler crack-injection adhesive, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Quality-Control Program: Submit before work begins.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Each manufactured bonding-agent packaged patching-mortar joint-filler crack-injection-adhesive, corrosion-inhibiting-treatment manufacturer shall employ factory-authorized service representatives who are available for consultation and Project-site inspection and on-site assistance.

B. Patching Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced concrete-maintenance firm that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer to apply packaged patching-mortar crack-injection adhesive, corrosion-inhibiting treatments to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. Experience in only installing or patching new concrete is insufficient experience for concrete-maintenance work.



1. Field Supervision: Concrete-maintenance specialist firm shall maintain experienced full-time supervisors on Project site during times that concrete-maintenance work is in progress.

C. Quality-Control Program: Prepare a written plan for concrete maintenance to systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly perform maintenance work, including each phase or process, protection of surrounding materials during operations, and control of debris and runoff during the Work. Describe in detail materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for each phase of the Work.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Epoxy Crack Injection: Perform epoxy crack injection in two separate areas , each approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements and other conditions for storage.

B. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates covered and in a dry location; maintain grading and other required characteristics and prevent contamination.


A. Environmental Limitations for Epoxies: Do not apply when air and substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by manufacturer. During hot weather, cool epoxy components before mixing, store mixed products in shade, and cool unused mixed products to retard setting. Do not apply to wet substrates unless approved by manufacturer.

1. Use only Class A epoxies when substrate temperatures are below or are expected to go below 40 deg F (5 deg C) within eight hours.

2. Use only Class A or B epoxies when substrate temperatures are expected to be between 40 deg F (5 deg C) and 60 deg F (16 deg C) any time within eight hours.

3. Use only Class C epoxies when substrate temperatures are above and are expected to stay above 60 deg F (16 deg C) for eight hours.

B. Cold-Weather Requirements for Cementitious Materials: Do not apply unless surface and air temperatures are above 40 deg F (5 deg C) and will remain so for at least 48 hours after completion of Work.



C. Hot-Weather Requirements for Cementitious Materials: Protect repair work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from patching materials. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks, and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F (32 deg C) and above.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: For repair products, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of product from single source and from single manufacturer with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

2.2 BONDING AGENTS

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. c. Dayton Superior

2.3 PATCHING AND REPAIR MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Patching Mortar Requirements:

1. Only use patching mortars that are recommended by manufacturer for each horizontal, vertical, or overhead use orientation.

2. Color and Aggregate Texture: Provide patching mortar and aggregates of colors and sizes necessary to produce patching mortar where indicated that matches existing, adjacent, exposed or CMU. Blend several aggregates if necessary to achieve suitable matches.

3. Coarse Aggregate for Patching Mortar: ASTM C 33/C 33M, washed aggregate, Size No. 8, Class 5S. Add to patching-mortar mix only as permitted by patching-mortar manufacturer.

2.4 PATCHING AND REPAIR MATERIALS MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design manufacturer and product: SikaGrout 212.

B. Acceptable Alternative Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, the following manufacturers are acceptable alternatives to the basis-of-design manufacturer:

1. BASF Construction Chemicals - Construction Systems. 2. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. 3. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 4. Dayton Superior



2.5 FORM-AND-POUR REPAIR MORTARS

A. Form-and-Pour Cementitious Repair Mortar, Pre-Extended: Packaged, dry mix, shrinkage-compensated Portland cement mortar, with blended coarse aggregates. Flowable consistency, able to be pumped or formed and poured.

B. Basis-of Design Product: SikaGrout 212.

C. Alternative Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, the following manufacturers are acceptable alternatives to the basis-of-design manufacturer:


2.6 HORIZONTAL REPAIR MORTARS

A. Horizontal Cementitious Repair Mortar: Packaged, dry mix, latex-modified, for horizontal repair of concrete; flowable consistency.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: SikaGrout 212.

B. Alternative Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, the following manufacturers are acceptable alternatives to the basis-of-design manufacturer:


2.7 EPOXY CRACK-INJECTION MATERIALS

A. Basis of Design: Epoxy Crack-Injection Adhesive: 100 percent solids, high modulus, low viscosity, moisture tolerant, epoxy polymer, for gravity feed or pressure injection of concrete cracks. ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type I, Type II or Type IV, free of VOCs.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV, for pressure injection and Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel for sealing of cracks and porting devices, as manufactured by Sika Corporation, 1682 Marion Williamsport Road, Marion, Ohio 43302 or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. c. Dayton Superior

2. Color: Provide epoxy crack-injection adhesive and capping adhesive as indicated by manufacturer's designations that blend with existing, adjacent CMU and do not stain surface.



2.8 CORROSION-INHIBITING MATERIALS

A. Corrosion-Inhibiting Treatment: Epoxy modified cementitious product that forms a protective film on steel reinforcement.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem, or products by one of the following:

a. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems. b. Cortec Corporation. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. d. MAPEI Corporation. e. Dayton Superior

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Water: Potable.

2.10 MIXES

A. General: Mix products, in clean containers, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Do not add water, thinners, or additives unless recommended by manufacturer. 2. When practical, use manufacturer's premeasured packages to ensure that materials are

mixed in proper proportions. When premeasured packages are not used, measure ingredients using graduated measuring containers; do not estimate quantities or use shovel or trowel as unit of measure.

3. Do not mix more materials than can be used within time limits recommended by manufacturer. Discard materials that have begun to set.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PATCHING

A. Have patching work performed only by qualified concrete-maintenance specialist.

B. Comply with manufacturers' written instructions for surface preparation and product application.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that supervisory personnel are on-site and on duty when concrete maintenance work begins and during its progress.

B. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being repaired, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm resulting from concrete maintenance work.



1. Comply with each product manufacturer's written instructions for protections and precautions. Protect against adverse effects of products and procedures on people and adjacent materials, components, and vegetation.

2. Use only proven protection methods appropriate to each area and surface being protected. 3. Provide temporary barricades, barriers, and directional signage to exclude public from

areas where concrete maintenance work is being performed. 4. Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and

vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during course of concrete maintenance work.

5. Contain dust and debris generated by concrete maintenance work and prevent it from reaching the public or adjacent surfaces.

6. Use water-mist sprinkling and other wet methods to control dust only with adequate, approved procedures and equipment that ensure that such water will not create a hazard or adversely affect other building areas or materials.

7. Protect floors and other surfaces along haul routes from damage, wear, and staining. 8. Provide supplemental sound-control treatment to isolate removal and dismantling work

from other areas of the building. 9. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment by covering them with heavy polyethylene film

and waterproof masking tape. If practical, remove items, store, and reinstall after potentially damaging operations are complete.

10. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off District's property. 11. Dispose of debris and runoff from operations by legal means and in a manner that

prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.

C. Existing Drains: Prior to the start of work in an area, test drainage system to ensure that it is functioning properly. Notify Architect immediately of inadequate drainage or blockage. Do not begin work in an area until the drainage system is in working order.

1. Prevent solids such as aggregate or mortar residue from entering the drainage system. Clean out drains and drain lines that become sluggish or blocked by sand or other materials resulting from concrete maintenance work.

2. Protect drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing only clean water to pass.

3.3 CONCRETE REMOVAL

A. Do not overload structural elements with debris.

B. Saw-cut perimeter of areas indicated for removal to a depth of at least 1/2 inch (13 mm). Make cuts perpendicular to concrete surfaces and no deeper than cover on reinforcement.

C. Remove deteriorated and delaminated concrete by breaking up and dislodging from reinforcement.

D. Remove additional concrete if necessary to provide a depth of removal of at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) over entire removal area.



E. Where half or more of the perimeter of reinforcing bar is exposed, bond between reinforcing bar and surrounding concrete is broken, or reinforcing bar is corroded, remove concrete from entire perimeter of bar and to provide at least 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance around bar.

F. Test areas where concrete has been removed by tapping with hammer, and remove additional concrete until unsound and disbonded concrete is completely removed.

G. Provide surfaces with a fractured profile of at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) that are approximately perpendicular or parallel to original concrete surfaces. At columns and walls, make top and bottom surfaces level unless otherwise directed.

H. Thoroughly clean removal areas of loose concrete, dust, and debris.

3.4 BONDING AGENT APPLICATION

A. Epoxy Bonding Agent: Apply to concrete by brush, roller, or spray according to manufacturer's written instructions, leaving no pinholes or other uncoated areas. Apply to reinforcing bars in at least two coats, allowing first coat to dry before applying second coat. Place patching mortar or concrete while epoxy is still tacky. If epoxy dries, recoat before placing patching mortar or concrete.

3.5 PATCHING MORTAR APPLICATION

A. Place patching mortar as specified in this article unless otherwise recommended in writing by manufacturer or where dry-pack mortar is indicated.

1. Provide forms where necessary to confine patch to required shape. 2. For cementitious mortar applications only, wet substrate and forms thoroughly and then

remove standing water (SSD condition).

B. Pretreatment: Apply specified bonding agent.

C. General Placement: Place patching mortar by troweling toward edges of patch to force intimate contact with edge surfaces. For large patches, fill edges first and then work toward center, always troweling toward edges of patch. At fully exposed reinforcing bars, force patching mortar to fill space behind bars by compacting with trowel from sides of bars.

D. Placing in Lifts: Where conditions or design require patching materials to be placed to a total depth that exceeds maximum single-lift depth recommended by manufacturer, apply material in two or more lifts.

1. Comply with manufacturer's maximum depth recommendations for each specific product when applying in multiple lifts.

E. Consolidation: After each lift is placed, consolidate material and screed surface.

F. Multiple Lifts: Where multiple lifts are used, score surface of lifts to provide a rough surface for placing subsequent lifts. Allow each lift to reach final set before placing subsequent lifts.



G. Finishing: Allow surfaces of lifts that are to remain exposed to become firm and then finish to a smooth surface with a wood or sponge float surface matching adjacent concrete.

H. Curing: Wet-cure cementitious patching materials, including polymer-modified cementitious patching materials, for not less than seven days by water-fog spray or water-saturated absorptive cover.

3.6 FORM-AND-POUR MORTAR APPLICATIONS

A. Use for Cracks in excess of ¼ inch width.

B. Form repair mortar patches and structures using tight-fitting, smooth-faced forms. Apply form release coating to interior form faces.

C. Seal forms to existing substrate to prevent bleed out and leakage at form perimeters.

D. Design formwork for either gravity feed or pressure pumping applications.

E. Fill forms to completely fill voids in substrate, including around anchors, reinforcing bars, and other embedments.

F. Remove forms only after repair material has set up adequately to maintain shape without sag or deflection.

G. For flush repairs, grind perimeter of repair areas flush with adjacent surfaces. Remove overfill and bleed out.

H. Wet-cure patch for not less than seven days by water-fog spray or water-saturated absorptive cover.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place concrete according to Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and as specified in this article.

B. Pretreatment: Apply epoxy-modified bonding agent to concrete substrate.

C. Standard Placement: Place concrete by form-and-pump method unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use vibrators to consolidate concrete as it is placed. 2. At unformed surfaces, screed concrete to produce a surface that when finished with

patching mortar will match required profile and surrounding concrete.

D. Form-and-Pump Placement: Place concrete by form-and-pump method where indicated.

1. Design and construct forms to resist pumping pressure in addition to weight of wet concrete. Seal joints and seams in forms and where forms abut existing concrete.

2. Pump concrete into place from bottom to top, releasing air from forms as concrete is introduced. When formed space is full, close air vents and pressurize to 14 psi (96 kPa).



E. Wet-cure concrete for not less than seven days by leaving forms in place or keeping surfaces continuously wet by water-fog spray or water-saturated absorptive cover.

F. Fill placement cavities with dry-pack mortar and repair voids with patching mortar. Finish to match surrounding concrete.

3.8 EPOXY CRACK INJECTION

A. Use for cracks up to ¼ inch width.

B. Mixing the epoxy resin adhesive for sealing the cracks & porting devices: Premix each com-ponent. Proportion equal parts by volume of Component “A” and Component “B” into a clean, dry mixing pail. Mix thoroughly for 3 minutes with a jiffy paddle on a low-speed (400-600 rpm) drill. Mix only that quantity of material that can be used within its potlife (60 minutes @ 73F).

C. Mixing of the epoxy resin adhesive used for the pressure injection grouting:

1. Manual: Proportion two parts by volume of Component “A” to one part Component “B” into a clean, dry mixing pail. Mix thoroughly for 3 minutes with a jiffy paddle on a low-speed (400-600 rpm) drill. Mix only that quantity of material that can be used within its potlife (20-30 minutes 73F).

C. Placement procedure:

1. The epoxy resin adhesive for sealing the cracks & porting device: Set the porting de-vices as required by the equipment manufacturer. Spacing of the porting devices shall be accomplished as required to achieve the travel of the epoxy resin for the pressure injection grouting between ports and fill the cracks to the maximum. On structures open on both sides, provide porting devices on opposite sides at staggered elevations. Apply the mixed epoxy resin adhesive for sealing over cracks and around each porting device to provide an adequate seal to prevent the escape of the epoxy resin adhesive for the injection grouting. Where required by the Engineer, apply the epoxy resin ad-hesive for sealing in such a manner that minimal defacing or discoloration of the sub-strate shall result.

2. The epoxy resin adhesive for the pressure injection grouting:

Manual: Load the mixed epoxy resin adhesive for grouting into a disposable caulking cartridge or bulk-loading caulking gun. Inject the prepared cracks with a constant pressure in order to achieve maximum filling & penetration without the inclusion of air pockets or voids in the epoxy resin adhesive. Begin the pressure injection at the wid-est part of the crack being injected and continue until there is the appearance of epoxy resin adhesive at an adjacent port, thus indicating travel. When travel is indicated, to discontinue or continue the pressure injection from that port should be made by the contractor based on his experience, with the approval of the Engineer. Continue pro-cedure until pressure injectable cracks has been filled.

Automated: Dispense the epoxy resin adhesive for grouting under constant pressure in accordance with procedures recommended by the equipment manufacturer as required to achieve maximum filling and penetration of the prepared cracks without the inclu-sion of air pockets or voids in the epoxy resin adhesive. The pressure injection of sin-gle or multiple ports, by use of a manifold system, is possible. This decision should be made by the contractor, with the approval of the Engineer. Continue the approved procedure until all pressure injectable cracks have been filled.



D. If penetration of any cracks is impossible, consult the Architect before discontinuing the injec-tion procedure. If modification of the proposed procedure is required to fill the cracks, sub-mit said modification in writing to the Engineer for acceptance prior to proceeding.

E. Adhere to all limitations and cautions for the epoxy resin adhesive in the manufacturers current printed literature.

A. Clean areas to receive capping adhesive of oil, dirt, and other substances that would interfere with bond.

B. Place injection ports as recommended by epoxy manufacturer, spacing no farther apart than thickness of member being injected. Seal injection ports in place with capping adhesive.

C. Seal cracks at exposed surfaces with a ribbon of capping adhesive at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick by 1 inch (25 mm) wider than crack.

D. Inject cracks wider than 0.003 inch (0.075 mm) to a depth of 8 inches (200 mm).

E. Inject epoxy adhesive, beginning at widest part of crack and working toward narrower parts. Inject adhesive into ports to refusal, capping adjacent ports when they extrude epoxy. Cap injected ports and inject through adjacent ports until crack is filled.

F. After epoxy adhesive has set, remove injection ports and grind surfaces smooth.

3.9 CORROSION-INHIBITING-TREATMENT APPLICATION

A. Apply corrosion-inhibiting treatment to any reinforcing bars exposed during repair that have surface corrosion..

B. Apply by brush, roller, or airless spray in two coats at manufacturer's recommended application rate. Remove film of excess treatment by high-pressure washing before patching treated concrete.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Packaged, Cementitious Patching Mortar: randomly selected sets of samples for each type of mortar required, tested according to ASTM C 928/C 928M.

2. Concrete: As specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3. Joint Filler: Core-drilled samples to verify proper installation.

a. Testing Frequency: One sample for each 100 feet (30 m) of joint filled. b. Where samples are taken, refill holes with joint filler.

4. Epoxy Crack Injection: Core-drilled samples to verify proper installation.



a. Testing Frequency: Three samples from mockup and one sample for each 100 feet (30 m) of crack injected.

b. Where samples are taken, refill holes with epoxy mortar.

C. Product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Manufacturers Field Service: Engage manufacturers' factory-authorized service representatives for consultation and Project-site inspection and to provide on-site assistance when requested by Architect.

1. Have manufacturers' factory-authorized service representatives perform the following number of Project-site inspections to observe progress and quality of the Work, distributed over the period of product installation, regardless of on-site assistance requested by Architect:

a. Joint-Filler Installation: One inspection. b. Crack-Injection-Adhesive Preparation and Installation: One inspections.



AC Transit CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Oakland, CA SECTION 03 30 00 - Page 1 of 12 10/06/17

SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Fill over metal decks.


1. Section 07 18 00 "Traffic Coatings" for traffic coatings over concrete substrates and cementitious toppings.

2. Section 03 01 30 “Concrete and CMU Repair” for removing and replacing existing concrete, repairing cracks in CMU and non-shrink mortars.

3. Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealers” for Preformed Joint Seals

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.



1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal.


A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Bonding agents. 4. Adhesives. 5. Joint-filler strips. 6. Repair materials.

B. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.


D. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.



E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. Sections 1 through 5 and Section 7, "Lightweight Concrete."

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. e. Special concrete finish subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, steel reinforcement installation, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.


A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES



A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete.

B. CONCRETE MATERIALS

C. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, gray.

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

D. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.

E. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

F. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.3 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

C. Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CN-CI. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete CNI. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; ARRMATECT EUCON

BCN EUCON CIA. d. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI. e. Sika Corporation; Sika CNI.



D. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-set-accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.


a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete 222+. b. Cortec Corporation; MCI- 2000 2005NS. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI-S. d. Sika Corporation; FerroGard 901.

2.4 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

2.6 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.



B. Cementitious Materials: Fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume may be used to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent

portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. 5. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not

exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. 7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag, and Silica

Fume: 50 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures.

E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Concrete Toppings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd. (309 kg/cu. m). 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch (25-mm)

nominal maximum aggregate size.

2.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."



2.10 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.2 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.



D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.4 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Parking areas to receive traffic coatings: Trowel and Light-Broom Finish - Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a light broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces. Verify required substrate conditions with traffic coating manufacturer and applicator.

C. Ramps in Parking Areas: Broom Finish:



1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

2. Ramps shall have a coefficient of friction of 0.50 or more.

3.5 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3.6 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one-part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.



3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

D. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

E. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:



1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.



12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.



AC Transit STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Oakland, CA SECTION 05 12 00 - Page 1 of 8 10/06/17

SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel.


1. Section 05 31 00 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck. 2. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications, fixed ladders

and other steel items not defined as structural steel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

B. Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of structural members indicated as "Protected Zone" on Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural elements to protected zones are limited.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.





B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.

5. Identify members and connections of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System. 6. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones. 7. Identify demand critical welds.

C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing qualified by testing, including the following:

1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, shop-painting applicator, testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

E. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. 5. Shop primers.

F. Survey of existing conditions.

G. Source quality-control reports.

H. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD, or is accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC 172)].



B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE.

C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P3 or to SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification.

E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided District's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345)

B. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.



2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts;

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible-washer type with plain finish.

B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex or round head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.

C. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

D. Primer: Comply with Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting," Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting," and Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings."

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.



2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.4 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. 6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection.

Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: District will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325."

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.



4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

C. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.



1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

D. Splice members only where indicated.

E. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

G. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Pretensioned

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.


A. Special Inspections: District will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325."

D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.



1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

E. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting".



AC Transit STEEL DECKING Oakland, CA SECTION 05 31 00 - Page 1 of 5 10/06/17

SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck. 2. Composite floor deck.


1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight and lightweight structural concrete fill over steel deck.

2. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors. 3. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous

steel shapes.


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:

D. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.

E. Field quality-control reports.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation to maintain insulation free of moisture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company. 2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc. 3. CMC Joist & Deck. 4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group. 5. Cordeck. 6. DACS, Inc. 7. Epic Metals Corporation. 8. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. 9. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 10. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group. 11. Roof Deck, Inc. 12. Verco Manufacturing Co. 13. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

B. Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230), G60 (Z180) zinc coating.

2. Profile Depth: 2 inches (51 mm) 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: as noted on plans 4. Span Condition: Double span min.



2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

D. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

E. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile [indicated] [recommended by SDI Publication No. 31 for overhang and slab depth].

F. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.

G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780, SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.



A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

1. Align cellular deck panels over full length of cell runs and align cells at ends of abutting panels.



E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

3.3 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm), nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches (914 mm), and as follows:

1. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) long welds.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] , with end joints as follows:

1. Lapped or butted at Contractor's option.

D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.



3.5 PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



AC Transit METAL FABRICATIONS Oakland, CA SECTION 05 50 00 Page 1 of 8 10/06/2017

SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections. 3. Metal ladders – aluminum.

B. Related Sections 1. Section 09 91 13 – “Exterior Painting” for painting galvanized steel items.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.



3. Metal ladders.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded tread.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders.

B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders, including landings, shall withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.



1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

F. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.

G. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.

H. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

I. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide hot dipped galvanized fasteners or stainless-steel fasteners for hot dip galvanized

items.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1 (A1).

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

D. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in



concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.


A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.



I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous framing and supports.

2.7 METAL LADDERS

A. General:

1. Metal ladder shall be fabricated from aluminum. 2. Comply with ANSI A14.3.

B. Aluminum Ladders:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. ACL Industries, Inc. b. Alco-Lite Industrial Products. c. Halliday Products. d. O'Keeffe's Inc. e. Precision Ladders, LLC. f. Royalite Manufacturing, Inc. g. Thompson Fabricating, LLC.

2. Space siderails 24 inches (605 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated. 3. Siderails: Continuous extruded-aluminum channels or tubes, not less than 2-1/2 inches

(64 mm) deep, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick. 4. Rungs: Extruded-aluminum tubes, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep and not less than

1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, with ribbed tread surfaces. 5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; fasten by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners or

brackets and aluminum rivets.



6. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from pressure-locked aluminum bar grating or extruded-aluminum plank grating, supported by extruded-aluminum framing. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in least dimension.

7. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with welded or bolted aluminum brackets.

2.8 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.10 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with primers specified in Section 099113 "Painting."

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

1. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section Section 09911, "Painting: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2.11 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M12.

B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, AA-M12C22A41.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting."



B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.



AC Transit COLD FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING Oakland, CA SECTION 07 14 16 - Page 1 of 8 10/06/17

SECTION 07 14 16 COLD FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cold fluid-applied waterproofing, horizontal applications. 2. Drainage panels. 3. Deck Drains

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

1. Section 32 14 00 “Sand Set Concrete Pavers” for deck pavers over waterproofing.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.

B. Review requirements for waterproofing products and installation, including surface preparation, substrate conditions, project and manufacturer's details, installation procedures, checklist of required tools and sundries, mockups, testing and inspection requirements, protection and repairs, and coordination and sequencing of waterproofing work with work of other Sections.


A. Product Data: For each type of waterproofing product specified, including:

1. Technical data indicating compliance with requirements. 2. Substrate preparation instructions and recommendations.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations for waterproofing system components. Show details for each type of substrate, joints, corners, and edge conditions, including flashings, counterflashings, penetrations, transitions, and terminations.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer, (and waterproofing Inspector).

1. Certification of manufacturer's approval of Installer.

B. Low-Emitting Product Certificate: For waterproofing products specified to meet volatile organic emissions standards.



C. Product Test Reports: Test data for waterproofing products and waterproofing system, by qualified testing agency, indicating proposed waterproofing meets performance requirements, when requested by Architect.

D. Warranty: Sample of unexecuted manufacturer and installer special warranties.

E. Field quality control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A manufacturer-approved firm with minimum three years’ experience in installation of specified or similar products in successful use on similar projects, employing workers trained by manufacturer, including a full-time on-site supervisor with a minimum of three years’ experience installing similar work, and able to communicate verbally with Contractor, Architect, and employees.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer with minimum three years’ experience in manufacture of waterproofing as one of its principal products.

1. Manufacturer’s product submitted has been in satisfactory operation on three similar installations for at least three years.

2. Approval of Manufacturers and Comparable Products: Submit the following in accordance with project substitution requirements, within time allowed for substitution review:

a. Completed and signed Substitution Request form. b. Product data, including certified independent test data indicating compliance

with requirements. c. Sample shop drawings from similar project. d. Project references: Minimum of five installations of similar system not less than

five years old, with District and Architect contact information. e. Name and resume of proposed qualified Inspector. f. Sample warranty.

C. Waterproofing Inspector Qualifications: A technical representative of manufacturer not engaged in the sale of products and experienced in the installation and maintenance of the specified waterproofing system, qualified to perform observation and inspection specified in Field Quality Control Article, to determine Installer’s compliance with the requirements of this Project, and approved by the manufacturer to issue warranty certification. The Inspector shall be one of the following:

1. An authorized full-time technical employee of the manufacturer. 2. An independent party certified as a waterproofing inspector acceptable to Architect,

retained by the Contractor.



D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified independent agency experienced in the installation of the specified waterproofing system, and qualified to perform observation and inspection specified in Field Quality Control Article to determine Installer’s compliance with the requirements of this Project, acceptable to Architect, retained by the Contractor.

E. Mockups: Provide waterproofing mockup application within mockups required in other sections, or if not specified, in an area of not less than 90 sq. ft. of surface where directed by Architect for each type of substrate condition. Include examples of surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, waterproofing application, and flashing, transition, and termination conditions, to set quality standards for execution.

1. Include intersection of deck waterproof ing with adjacent vertical waterproofing and moisture control system.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Accept materials on site in manufacturer's unopened original packaging.

B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture, within temperature ranges recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

C. Construction Waste: Store and dispose of packaging materials and construction waste in accordance with requirements of Section 01 73 00, Execution.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer.

1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect membrane performance. 2. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

1.9 SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of waterproofing with completion and coordination of interfacing trades with waterproofing.

B. Schedule work so waterproofing applications may be inspected prior to concealment.

C. Ensure waterproofing materials are cured before covering with other materials.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which waterproofing manufacturer agrees to furnish and install waterproofing material to repair or replace those materials installed according to manufacturer's written instructions that exhibit material



defects or otherwise fail to remain watertight as specified under normal use within warranty period specified.

1. Access for Repair: District shall provide unimpeded access to the Project and the waterproofing system for purposes of testing, leak investigation, and repair, and shall reinstall removed cladding and overburden materials upon completion of repair.

2. Cost Limitation: Manufacturer's obligation for repair or replacement shall be limited to the original installed cost of the work.

3. Warranty Period: Twenty years date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Products: Provide waterproofing products manufactured by Tremco, Inc., Commercial Sealants and Waterproofing Division, An RPM Company, Beachwood OH; (866)321-6357; email: [email protected]; www.tremcosealants.com, or comparable products of other manufacturer approved by Architect in accordance with Section 016000, Product Requirements.

B. Source Limitations: Provide waterproofing system materials and accessory products from single source from single manufacturer.


A. General: Waterproofing system shall be capable of performing as a continuous watertight installation and as a moisture drainage plane transitioned to adjacent flashings and discharging water to the building exterior. Waterproofing shall accommodate normal substrate movement and seal expansion and control joints, construction material transitions, opening transitions, penetrations, and perimeter conditions without resultant moisture deterioration.

B. VOC Content: Zero VOC’s and compliant with authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Compatibility: Provide waterproofing system materials that are compatible with one another and with adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by waterproofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2.3 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE

A. Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing: Polyurethane-methacrylate (PUMA)-based membrane. A two-component methacrylate-based (PUMA) liquid membrane. Tremco TREMproof PUMA (horizontal waterproofing system).

1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Tremco PUMA BC or BC LM. 2. VOC Content: 0 g/L, all grades. 3. Elongation ASTM D-638 407%



4. Low Temperature ability and Crack Bridging, ASTM C 1305: Pass. 5. Tensile Strength D-638 at 75 degrees F 1680 PSI

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. General: Accessory materials as described in manufacturer's written installation instructions, recommended to produce complete waterproofing system meeting performance requirements, and compatible with waterproofing material and adjacent materials.

B. Substrate Patching Material: Waterproofing manufacturer's standard trowel-grade filler material.

C. Primer: Tremco PUMA Primer.

D. Detailing Membrane: Tremco PUMA BC T thixotropic polyurethane methacrylate based membrane for use in detailing and field applied cant beads.

E. Flashing Membrane for Vertical and penetration applications: Tremco PUMA BC R

F. Crack filler and Patching material; Tremco PUMA WC and silica

G. Topcoat: Tremco PUMA TC to be utilized in areas exposed to pedestrian traffic and long-term UV exposure greater than 3 weeks

H. Initiator: Tremco PUMA Initiator, used to catalyze all EWS resins

I. Cleaner: Tremco PUMA Cleaner

J. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, approved by waterproofing manufacturer for adhesion and compatibility with waterproofing and accessories.

1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Dymonic 100.

2.5 DRAINAGE PANELS

A. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, spun-bonded polypropylene facing laminated to one side of a studded, non-biodegradable, polystyrene drainage core, with polymeric film attached to back of drainage core.

1. Basis of Design: Tremco, TREMDrain 1000 . 2. Flow Capacity, per unit width, ASTM D 4716: 18 gpm/ft. (224 lpm/m). 3. Flow Rate, ASTM D 4491: 165 gpm/ft2 (6,724 lpm/m2). 4. Apparent Opening Size: No. 70 sieve (210 micron). 5. Puncture Strength, ASTM D 4833: 65 lb (289 N). 6. Core Compressive Strength, ASTM D 1621: 15,000 lb/ft2 (732 kN/m2). 7. Thickness: 0.437 inch (11 mm).



2.6 DECK DRAINS

A. Zurn modelZ154, 12-inch square top promenade deck drain with nickel-bronze finish, heal proof grate and rotatable frame, galvanized cast iron construction with seepage opening, frame clamps, no-hub outlet connection and stainless steel perforated extension.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Surface Condition: Before applying waterproofing materials, examine substrate and conditions to ensure substrates are fully cured, smooth, clean, dry, and free from high spots, depressions, loose and foreign particles and other deterrents to adhesion, and conditions comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Verify concrete and masonry surfaces are visibly dry, have cured for time period

recommended by waterproofing manufacturer, and are free from release agents, curing agents, laitance, and other contaminates. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263 moisture level must be less than 6%. Test for waterproofing adhesion per manufacturer's recommended method. Notify Architect of unsatisfactory conditions.

2. Verify the concrete has a #3-4 ICRI CSP and a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi

3. Verify masonry joints are filled with mortar and struck flush.


3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK

A. Sequencing of Work: Coordinate sequencing of waterproofing work with work of other sections that form portions of building envelope moisture control to ensure that flashings and transition materials can be properly installed and inspected.

B. Subsequent Work: Coordinate waterproofing work with work of other sections installed subsequent to waterproofing to ensure complete inspection of installed waterproofing and sealing of waterproofing penetrations necessitated by subsequent work.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates in accordance with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Mask adjacent finished surfaces. 2. Remote contaminants and film-forming coatings from substrates. 3. Remove projections and excess materials and fill voids with substrate patching material. 4. Prepare and treat joints and cracks in substrate per ASTM D 4258 and waterproofing

manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Detail Preparation: Prepare non-moving shrinkage cracks, large cracks, construction joints, expansion joints, projections and protrusions, penetrations, drains, and changes in plane in accordance with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and details, using accessory materials specified.

3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Apply waterproofing material within manufacturer’s recommended application temperature ranges.

B. Primer: Apply primer to substrates at required rate, using a roller or brush. Allow to dry.

C. Start application with manufacturer's authorized representative present.

D. Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing in total wet film thickness and with methods recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer’s application instructions.

E. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply waterproofing components.

3.5 PROTECTION INSTALLATION

A. Drainage Panel: Place and secure drainage panels using methods that do not penetrate waterproofing. Face geotextile away from deck substrate. Lap edges and ends of geotextile.


A. Contractor's Inspector: Contractor shall engage manufacturer's qualified representative during the work to perform tests, including documenting of waterproofing prior to concealment.

1. Contractor's Inspector shall measure membrane thickness with mil gauge at least once for every 100 sq. ft. (10 sq. m).

2. Provide written report of tests and inspections.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, waterproofing application, protection, and drainage components, observe flood testing and to furnish reports to Architect.

C. Flood Testing:

1. Flood test each waterproofed area for leaks, according to recommendations in ASTM D 5957, after completing and protecting waterproofing but before overlaying construction is placed. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water. Testing agency shall observe flood testing. Provide written report, including description of any required repairs.



a. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) with a minimum depth of 1 inch (25 mm) and not exceeding a depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Maintain 2 inches (50 mm) of clearance from top of sheet flashings.

b. Flood each area for 24 hours. c. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until

waterproofing installation is watertight.

D. EFVM Testing:

1. Test each entire waterproofed area for leaks using Electric Field Vector Mapping (EFVM). Provide written report, including description of any required repairs.

a. Leave wiring for EFVM testing intact and terminate in a weatherproof ground recessed or wall mounted junction box in a location as directed for use in future testing, if necessary.

E. Coordination of Inspection: Cooperate with testing agency. Allow access to work areas and staging. Notify testing agency in writing of schedule for Work of this Section to allow sufficient time for testing and inspection.

1. Do not cover Work until testing and inspection is completed and accepted.

F. Reporting: Forward written inspection reports to the Architect within 10 working days of the inspection and test being performed.

G. Correction of Work: Correct deficient applications not passing tests and inspections, make necessary repairs, and retest as required to demonstrate compliance with requirements.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean spills, stains, and overspray resulting application utilizing cleaning agents recommended by manufacturers of affected construction. Remove masking materials.

B. Protect waterproofing from damage from subsequent work. Protect waterproofing materials from exposure to UV light for period in excess of that acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer; replace overexposed materials and retest.



AC Transit CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING Oakland, CA SECTION 07 16 16 - Page 1 of 5 10/06/17

SECTION 07 16 16 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes crystalline waterproofing used to stop water flow at the wall/curb interface with concrete floor slabs.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, and material descriptions and installation instructions for crystalline waterproofing.

B. Product Certificates: For crystalline waterproofing, signed by product manufacturer.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

D. Material Test Reports: For crystalline waterproofing, from independent testing laboratory, demonstrating that the waterproofing system complies with requirements of this Section.

E. Manufacturer's inspection reports of completed installation.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. ISO 9001 certified. 2. Having at least 25 years experience in the manufacture of cementitious crystalline

waterproofing materials.

B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

C. Mockups: Provide mockups of crystalline waterproofing to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects.

1. Architect will select locations of mockups that represent typical surfaces and conditions for applications of crystalline waterproofing.



a. Intersection of vertical and horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 2 linear feet..

2. Apply waterproofing according to requirements for the completed Work after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 “Project Management and Coordination."

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review required certifying procedures.


A. Proceed with waterproofing work only after concrete and masonry substrate defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks, have been repaired to provide a sound substrate free of forming materials, including reveal inserts.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Installer agrees to repair or replace components of crystalline waterproofing that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure to maintain watertight conditions within specified warranty period.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the specified product made by Xypex Chemical Corporation, or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers listed:

1. Crystalline Waterproofing: Basis-of-Design Product: Xypex Chemical Corporation; Xypex:

a. American Permaquik Inc.; Super 200. b. Vandex International Ltd.; Vandex Super.

2. Plugging and Patching for Leak Repair: Basis-of-Design Product: Xypex Chemical Corporation; Patch 'n Plug or Megamix II.



a. American Permaquik Inc.; Permaquik Mortar 300 or Permaquik 400. b. Vandex International Ltd.; Vandex Plug or Vandex Unimortar

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Crystalline Waterproofing: A prepackaged, gray-colored proprietary blend of portland cement, specially treated sand, and active chemicals that, when mixed with water and applied, penetrates by capillary action into concrete or masonry and reacts chemically with free lime in the presence of water to develop crystalline growth within concrete or masonry capillaries to produce an impervious, dense, waterproof concrete or masonry with properties meeting or exceeding the following criteria:

1. Permeability: 0 for water at 405 feet (123 m) when tested according to CE CRD-C 48. 2. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) when tested according to

ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Patching Compound: Cementitious waterproofing and repair mortar for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections; with properties meeting or exceeding the following criteria:

1. Compressive Strength: 7600 psi (52.44 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2. Flexural Strength: 710 psi (4.8 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 348. 3. Shrinkage: Minus 0.093 percent at 28 days and plus 0.073 percent at 90 days when tested

according to ASTM C 596.

C. Plugging Compound: Cementitious compound with hydrophobic properties; resistant to water and moisture but vapor permeable for all standard applications (vertical, overhead and horizontal surfaces not exposed to vehicular traffic); with properties meeting or exceeding the following criteria:

1. Compressive Strength: 4500 psi (31.1 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

D. Water: Potable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, with Applicator present, where waterproofing is to be applied.

1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Notify Architect in writing of active leaks or structural defects that would affect system

performance.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect other work from damage from cleaning, preparation, and application of crystalline waterproofing. Provide temporary enclosure to confine spraying operation and to ensure adequate ambient temperatures and ventilation conditions for application.

B. Stop active water leaks according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Repair damaged or unsatisfactory concrete or masonry according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Surface Preparation: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, mortar spatter, grease, oils, curing compounds, and form-release agents to ensure that waterproofing bonds to concrete or masonry surfaces.

1. Clean concrete surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.

a. Scratch- and Float-Finished Concrete: Etch with 10 percent muriatic (hydrochloric) acid solution according to ASTM D 4260 or pressure wash using 3,000 to 4,000 psi water stream.

b. Prepare smooth-formed and trowel-finished concrete by mechanical abrading or abrasive-blast cleaning according to ASTM D 4259.

c. Wood-Formed Vertical Concrete Surfaces: Pressure wash, lightly sandblast, or acid etch with muriatic (hydrochloric) acid to provide a clean, absorbent surface.

2. Concrete Joints: Clean reveals according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions for application.

1. Saturate concrete substrate with clean water to ensure migration of crystalline chemicals into voids and capillary tracts of concrete. Remove free surface water before application.

2. Maintain damp condition until applying waterproofing. 3. Apply waterproofing to negative-side surfaces. 4. Number of Coats: As required to stop water penetration. 5. Dampen surface between coats.

B. Final Coat Finish: Brushed.

C. Moist-cure waterproofing for two days immediately after application has set, followed by two days of air drying as recommended in writing by manufacturer.

D. Waterproofing Treatment Extensions: Extend waterproofing treatment as follows:

1. Onto columns integral with treated walls. 2. Onto interior nontreated walls intersecting exterior treated walls, for a distance of 24

inches (600 mm) for cast-in-place concrete.



3. Onto every substrate in areas indicated for treatment, including wall-floor intersections, curbs and similar offsets and features.

E. Repair of Slab Interface Joints

1. Clean, rout and treat wall/slab and curb/slab joints as recommended by manufacturer using concentrate.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect applied crystalline waterproofing from rapid drying, severe weather exposure, traffic and water accumulation. Maintain completed Work in moist condition for not less than two days by procedures recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. Protect waterproofing from temperatures below 36 deg F (2 deg C). Take measures to protect completed crystalline waterproofing coating from damage for at least 2 weeks after application.


A. Inspection: Manufacturer's representative to inspect completed application and to provide a written report that application complies with manufacturer's written instructions.



AC Transit TRAFFIC COATINGS Oakland, CA SECTION 07 18 00 - Page 1 of 14 10/06/17

SECTION 07 18 00 TRAFFIC COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Specifications

1. Section 07 62 00 “Sheet Metal Flashings and Trim” for sheet metal integrated with traffic coatings.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

a. Traffic coatings and for the following applications:

1) Vehicular traffic (TC-1), includes pavement markings 2) New Roof/deck pedestrian traffic (TC-2) 3) Repair existing roof/Deck Pedestrian traffic (TC-3)

b. Concrete repair and concrete toppings as a substrate for traffic coatings.

c. Wheel stops

d. Drains integrated with traffic coatings


1. Section 03 30 00 “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for overlays exceeding 1.5 inches in thickness.

1.3 EXISTING TRAFFIC COATINGS

A. Repair existing roof/Deck Pedestrian traffic (TC-3)

1. A single sample of the existing traffic coating was determined by laboratory testing to be “elastomeric polyether polyurethane,” approximately 32 mils thick. The test report is available on request.






A. Product Data: For each type of product, including installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: For traffic coatings.

1. Include details for treating substrate joints and cracks, flashings, deck penetrations, and other termination conditions.

2. Include plans showing layout of pavement markings, lane separations, and defined parking spaces. Indicate, with international symbol of accessibility, spaces allocated for people with disabilities.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on rigid backing.

1. Provide stepped Samples on backing to illustrate buildup of traffic coatings.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of traffic coating.


D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For traffic coatings to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Build mockups of traffic coatings to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup for each traffic coating and substrate to receive traffic coatings. 2. Size: 200 sq. ft. (18.5 sq. m) of each substrate to demonstrate surface preparation, joint

and crack treatment, thickness, texture, color, and standard of workmanship.






A. Environmental Limitations: Apply traffic coatings within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not apply traffic coatings to damp or wet substrates, when temperatures are below 40 deg F (5 deg C), when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above dew point.

1. Do not apply traffic coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during the application and curing period. Apply only when frost-free conditions occur throughout the depth of substrate.

B. Do not install traffic coating until items that penetrate membrane have been installed.

C. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for oil-based materials 50 deg F (10 deg C) for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C).

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace traffic coating that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Adhesive or cohesive failures. b. Abrasion or tearing failures. c. Surface crazing or spalling. d. Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into deck

substrate.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base-, intermediate-, and topcoat; and accessory materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Source Limitations:



1. Obtain traffic coatings from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Obtain primary traffic-coating materials, including primers, from traffic-coating

manufacturer. Obtain accessory materials including aggregates, sheet flashings, joint sealants, and substrate repair materials of types and from sources recommended in writing by primary material manufacturer.

3. Obtain pavement-marking paint from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 TRAFFIC COATING TC-1

A. Traffic Coating: Manufacturer's standard, traffic-bearing, seamless, high-solids-content, cold liquid-applied, elastomeric, waterproofing membrane system with integral wearing surface for vehicular traffic; according to ASTM C 957.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pacific Polymers Elasto-Deck 6500, Sika Sikalastic 720/745 Traffic System, or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Advanced Polymer Technology Corporation. b. AVM Industries, Inc. c. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC - Building Systems. d. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. e. Crossfield Products Corp. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. g. Gaco Western LLC. h. Key Resin Company. i. LymTal International Inc. j. Neogard; Division of Jones-Blair. k. Pacific Polymers International, Inc. l. ParexLahabra, Inc. m. Pecora Corporation. n. POLY-CARB, Inc. o. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). p. Tremco Incorporated; an RPM company. q. Urethane Polymers International, Inc.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate and conditions by traffic-coating manufacturer.

1. Material: Epoxy.

C. Preparatory and Base Coats: Urethane/Polyurea.

1. Thicknesses: Minimum film thickness 20 mils.

D. Intermediate Coat: Urethane/Polyurea.

1. Thicknesses: Minimum film thickness 20 mils. 2. Aggregate Content: As recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer for

substrate and service conditions indicated.



E. Topcoat: Aliphatic Urethane/Polyurea

1. Thicknesses: Minimum film thickness 20 mils. 2. Aggregate Content: As recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer for

substrate and service conditions indicated 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Aggregate: Manufacturer's standard aggregate for each use indicated of particle sizes, shape, and minimum hardness recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer.

G. Energy Performance: Provide traffic coating with an initial Solar Reflectance Index of not less than 0.70 and emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.

H. Cementitious Topping: Latex modified Portland cement based mortar intended for toppings, Sika SikaQuick 1000, or comparable conforming to:

1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109)

a. 3 hours: 1,250 psi (8.6 MPa) b. 1 day: 4,000 psi min. (27.6 MPa) c. 7 day: 5,000 psi min. (34.5 MPa) d. 28 day: 7,000 psi min. (48.2 MPa)

2. Flexural Strength (ASTM C-78) @ 28 days: 1,000 psi (6.9 MPa) 3. Splitting Tensile Strength (ASTM C-496) @ 28 days 500 psi (3.4 MPa) 4. Bond Strength (ASTM C-882 Modified) @ 28 days: 2,500 psi (17.2 MPa) 5. The Portland cement mortar shall not produce a vapor barrier. 6. Density (wet mix): approximately 136 lbs. / cu. ft. (2.18 kg/l) 7. Permeability (ASTM C-1202) @ 28 days Approximately <1000 Coulombs 8. Drying Shrinkage, (ASTM C596) @ 28 days: 0.06% 9. Freeze/Thaw resistance (ASTM C666) @ 28 days: 98%


A. Traffic Coating: Manufacturer's standard, traffic-bearing, seamless, high-solids-content, cold liquid-applied, elastomeric, waterproofing membrane system with integral wearing surface for pedestrian traffic; according to ASTM C 957.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pacific Polymers 5000X2 or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Advanced Polymer Technology Corporation. b. AVM Industries, Inc. c. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC - Building Systems. d. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. e. Crossfield Products Corp. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. g. Gaco Western LLC. h. Key Resin Company. i. LymTal International Inc.



j. Neogard; Division of Jones-Blair. k. Pacific Polymers International, Inc. l. ParexLahabra, Inc. m. Pecora Corporation. n. POLY-CARB, Inc. o. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). p. Sika. q. Tremco Incorporated; an RPM company. r. Urethane Polymers International, Inc.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate and conditions by traffic-coating manufacturer.

1. Material: Epoxy.

C. Preparatory and Base Coats: Polyurethane.

1. Thicknesses: Minimum dry film thickness 25 mils.

D. Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane.

1. Thicknesses: Minimum dry film thickness 25 mills, measured excluding aggregate.

E. Topcoat: Aliphatic urethane.

1. Thicknesses: Minimum dry film thickness 10 mils, measured excluding aggregate. 2. Aggregate Content: As recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer for

substrate and service conditions indicated. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Aggregate: Manufacturer's standard aggregate for each use indicated of particle sizes, shape, and minimum hardness recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer.

G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide traffic-coating materials with the fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method below for deck type and slopes indicated by an independent testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Class A roof covering per ASTM E 108 or UL 790.

H. Energy Performance: Provide traffic coating with an initial Solar Reflectance Index of not less than 0.70 and emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.

I. Slope Correction: Use any of the following materials recommended or approved in writing by the system manufacturer:

1. Polymer modified Portland cement mortar:

a. Sikatop “123 Plus” or comparable recommended by traffic coating manufacturer

2. Traffic Deck System base coat mixed with aggregate, if approved by manufacturer.




A. Application: Repair and recoating of existing traffic coating.

B. Traffic Coating: Manufacturer's standard, traffic-bearing, seamless, high-solids-content, cold liquid-applied, elastomeric, waterproofing membrane system with integral wearing surface for pedestrian traffic; according to ASTM C 957.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pacific Polymers 5000X2 with Elasto-Deck 6500 top coat or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Advanced Polymer Technology Corporation. b. AVM Industries, Inc. c. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC - Building Systems. d. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. e. Crossfield Products Corp. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. g. Gaco Western LLC. h. Key Resin Company. i. LymTal International Inc. j. Neogard; Division of Jones-Blair. k. Pacific Polymers International, Inc. l. ParexLahabra, Inc. m. Pecora Corporation. n. POLY-CARB, Inc. o. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). p. Sika. q. Tremco Incorporated; an RPM company. r. Urethane Polymers International, Inc.

C. For localized repairs requiring fill or leveling of concrete substrate, use same methods and materials described for Traffic Coating System TC-2.

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer ASTM C 920.

B. Sheet Flashing: Nonstaining , cured neoprene sheet.

1. Thickness: Minimum 50 mils (1.3 mm).

C. Adhesive: Contact adhesive recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer.

D. Reinforcing Strip: Fiberglass mesh recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer.



2.6 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint.

1. Color: White.

2.7 WHEEL STOPS

A. Recycled plastic 4 foot long, intended for glue down installation, BP Products Company, 11 N. Batavia Ave., Batavia, IL 60510 | Tel: 1-800-338. www.barcoproducts.com

2.8 FLOOR DRAINS INTEGRATED WITH TRAFFIC TOPPINGS

A. Wide flange, medium-duty deck drain intended for use with traffic coatings, galvanized cast iron with polished bronze or nickel bronze top and grate.

1. Zurn Z530, Z531 or Z532 2. Josam 24020 or 24030

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TRAFFIC COATING SYSTEMS TC-1 AND TC-2

A. Concrete Topping Repair/Replacement at Parking Deck

1. Follow manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Remove failed existing cementitious topping material in areas indicated and localized

areas as required. 3. Roughen the concrete surface to receive the cementitious overlay material. 4. Apply bonding agent. 5. After placement and finish of overlay, cure as directed by manufacturer. 6. After adequate cure and strength gain, shot blast to a CSP-3 "sandpaper like" surface, in

order to accept the traffic coating.

B. Examination

1. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness, surface moisture, and other conditions affecting performance of traffic-coating work.

2. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. 3. Test for moisture according to ASTM D 4263.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of traffic-coating work.

D. Proceed with installation only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



1. Begin coating application only after minimum concrete-curing and -drying period recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer has passed and after substrates are dry.

2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

E. Preparation

1. General: Before applying traffic coatings, clean and prepare substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce clean, dust-free, dry substrate for traffic-coating application. Remove projections, fill voids, and seal joints as recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer.

2. Completely remove any existing traffic coatings if recommended by manufacturer or required for warranty.

3. Schedule preparation work so dust and other contaminants from process do not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.

4. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings to prevent overspray, spillage, leaking, and migration of coatings. Prevent traffic-coating materials from entering deck substrate penetrations and clogging weep holes and drains.

5. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically abrade surface to a uniform profile acceptable to manufacturer, according to ASTM D 4259. Do not acid etch.

6. Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete.

a. Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections. b. Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners,

form-release agents, and other incompatible materials that might affect coating adhesion.

c. Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.

F. Slope Correction:

1. Augment existing surfaces as required to ensure slope to drain and eliminate ponding. Ponding is defined as any water remaining on deck 48 hours after precipitation followed by dry weather.

G. Terminations And Penetrations

1. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through traffic coatings and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Provide sealant cants at penetrations and at reinforced and nonreinforced, deck-to-wall butt joints.

3. Terminate edges of deck-to-deck expansion joints with preparatory base-coat strip. 4. Retain paragraph below for sheet flashings. 5. Install sheet flashings at deck-to-wall expansion and dynamic joints, and bond to deck

and wall substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

H. Joint And Crack Treatment

1. Prepare, treat, rout, and sealant fill joints and cracks in substrates and apply reinforcing strips according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations. Before



coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

2. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.

I. Traffic Coating Application

1. Apply traffic coating according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Apply number of coats of specified compositions for each type of traffic coating at

locations as indicated on Drawings. 3. Retain first paragraph below if applicable. 4. Start traffic-coating application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. 5. Verify that wet film thickness of each coat complies with requirements every 100 sq. ft.

(9 sq. m). 6. Uniformly broadcast aggregate on coats specified to receive aggregate. Embed aggregate

according to manufacturer's written instructions. After coat dries, sweep away excess aggregate.

7. Apply traffic coatings to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to height indicated; omit aggregate on vertical surfaces.

8. Cure traffic coatings. Prevent contamination and damage during application and curing stages.

3.2 TRAFFIC COATING SYSTEM TC-3 – REPAIR AND RECOAT

A. Examination

1. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness, surface moisture, and other conditions affecting performance of traffic-coating work.

2. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. 3. Test for moisture according to ASTM D 4263.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of traffic-coating work.

C. Proceed with installation only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Begin coating application only after minimum concrete-curing and -drying period recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer has passed and after substrates are dry.


D. Preparation

1. Thoroughly clean entire area with steam cleaner, power scrubber, or high-pressure water blast.

2. Allow area to become completely dry (minimum 24 hours). 3. Schedule preparation work so dust and other contaminants from process do not fall on

wet, newly coated surfaces.



4. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings to prevent overspray, spillage, leaking, and migration of coatings. Prevent traffic-coating materials from entering deck substrate penetrations and clogging weep holes and drains.

E. Slope Correction and overlays:

1. Augment existing surfaces as required to ensure slope to drain and eliminate ponding. Ponding is defined as any water remaining on deck 48 hours after precipitation followed by dry weather.

2. Use any of the following methods recommended by the system manufacturer:

a. Polymer modified Portland cement mortar (Sikatop 123 Plus or manufacturer’s recommendation)

b. Traffic Deck System base coat mixed with aggregate

F. Terminations And Penetrations

1. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through traffic coatings and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Provide sealant cants at penetrations and at reinforced and nonreinforced, deck-to-wall butt joints.

G. Joint And Crack Treatment

1. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

2. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation. 3. Apply reinforcing strip in traffic-coating system where recommended in writing by

traffic-coating manufacturer.

H. Traffic Coating Application

1. Apply traffic coating according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Start traffic-coating application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.

I. Repair Physical Damage to the Coating System:

1. Remove damaged coating materials back to well adhered material. 2. Thoroughly clean the exposed substrate and existing coating surrounding the area with a

clean cloth that has been wet with an exempt solvent.(Acetone as an example) 3. Allow solvent to evaporate (1 hour at 75F, 50% R.H.). 4. Apply concrete primer and allow cure time as directed by manufacturer before coating. 5. Apply base coat material over exposed substrate, in thin film thicknesses to match up to

the fully adhered coating. Allow base coat to cure over-night. Install the coating system to the original film thickness, extending each coat onto the existing coating, feather-edging the terminating edge of the coating. If multiple coats are required (i.e.: coating removed to the original

6. Allow 24 hours cure time between coats or as directed by manufacturer.



7. Apply Elasto-Poxy Primer VOC at a rate of approximately 250-300 sq.ft. per gallon, avoid puddles or ponding. Allow primer to cure for 2 hours minimum.

J. Repair Excessive Wear Areas.

1. Scrub areas with an exempt solvent (Acetone as an example). Allow solvent to evaporate (1 hour at 75F, 50% R.H.)

2. Apply primer as directed by manufacturer in a thin, even film thickness. Avoid puddles or ponding of primer. Allow primer to cure for 2 hours minimum.

3. e. For Vehicular Decks: 4. In the event of extreme abusive wear exposing the base coat membrane, apply a new coat

of base coat membrane as directed by manufacturer. Feather-edge terminating edges. 5. Allow base coat membrane to cure over night as directed.

K. Replace Existing Overlays

1. When existing overlay exceeds 1.5 inches, use Portland cement concrete for overlay.

L. Replace Top Coat

1. Apply primer at a rate of approximately 250-300 sq.ft. per gallon, avoid puddles or ponding. Allow primer to cure for 2 hours minimum.

2. Apply topcoat as directed by manufacturer. While material is in the fluid condition, broadcast aggregate into the wet coating and backroll with a wet roller to evenly distribute the aggregate.

3. Allow 24 hours to cure before foot traffic.

3.3 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint for striping and other markings until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect and traffic coating has cured.

B. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

C. Apply pavement-marking paint with mechanical equipment to produce markings of dimensions indicated with uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates for a 15-mil- (0.4-mm-) minimum, wet film thickness.

1. Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint-resistant, die-cut stencils, firmly secured to surface. Mask an extended area beyond edges of each stencil to prevent paint application beyond stencil. Apply paint so that it cannot run beneath stencil.

2. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet pavement-marking paint at a rate of 6 lb/gal. (0.72 kg/L).

3.4 WHEEL STOPS

A. Replace any missing wheel stops.

B. Install wheel stops using epoxy or urethane adhesive recommended by wheel stop manufacturer and acceptable to traffic coating manufacturer.



3.5 DRAINS

A. Use ground penetrating radar to locate existing reinforcing steel, and install drains as near as possible to indicated location without damaging or cutting existing reinforcing steel. In case of conflict, contact Architect.

B. Provide deck clamps and other accessories as necessary.

C. Connect drains to existing drainage piping as required.

D. Install drains so that no ponding will occur at perimeter of drain.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field tests and inspections:

1. Materials Testing:

a. Samples of material delivered to Project site shall be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of District and Contractor.

b. Testing agency shall perform tests for characteristics specified, using applicable referenced testing procedures.

c. Testing agency shall verify thickness of coatings during traffic-coating application for each 600 sq. ft. (56 sq. m) of installed traffic coating or part thereof.

B. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water.

1. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) with a minimum depth of 1 inch (25 mm) and not exceeding a depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Maintain 2 inches (51 mm) of clearance from top of sheet flashings.

2. Flood each area for 24 hours. 3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until

waterproofing installation is watertight. 4. If test results show traffic coating does not comply with requirements, remove and

replace or repair the membrane as recommended in writing by traffic-coating manufacturer and make further repairs after retesting until traffic-coating installation passes.

C. Final Traffic-Coating Inspection: Arrange for traffic-coating manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect membrane installation on completion.

1. Notify Architect or District 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.




3.7 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect traffic coatings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



AC Transit SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM Oakland, CA SECTION 07 62 00 - Page 1 of 9 10/06/17

SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Miscellaneous sheet metal copings and flashings. 2. Gutter for Garage trench drain.


1. Section 09 11 13 "Exterior Painting" for painting sheet metal flashing. 2. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants” for sealants used in “pitch pans.”

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.



1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim.

3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation.





1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.

Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location

in Project. 4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of

fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 6. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 7. Include details of roof-penetration flashing. 8. Include details of special conditions. 9. Include details of connections to adjoining work. 10. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches (1:5).


A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.



1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

2.2 SHEET METALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316, dead soft, fully annealed; with smooth, flat surface.

1. Finish: 2D (dull, cold rolled) or 2B (bright, cold rolled).

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat and mill phosphatized for field painting.

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils (0.76 mm) thick, consisting of a slip-resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.


a. Carlisle Residential, a division of Carlisle Construction Materials; WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.-Conn.; Ultra. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Kirsch Building Products, LLC; Sharkskin Ultra SA. e. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield. f. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Specialty Tile & Metal Underlayment. g. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Deck Guard HT. h. Protecto Wrap Company; Protecto Jiffy Seal Ice & Water Guard HT. i. SDP Advanced Polymer Products Inc; Palisade SA-HT.

2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) or higher.

3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C) or lower.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.



B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip

galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

C. Solder:

1. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60 or Grade Sn96, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.

2. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.



3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

1. Gutters with Girth 26 to 30 Inches (660 to 760 mm): Fabricate from the following materials:

a. Stainless Steel: 0.031 inch (0.79 mm) thick.

2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, solder or weld watertight. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.

1. Joint Style: Drive cleat or lock SMANCA Figure 3-2, No.4. 2. Fabricate from the Following Materials:

a. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) thick.

B. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.

C. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.



D. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


2.7 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored. 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing

substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.


3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners[, solder], protective



coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm); however, reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.



1. Do not use torches for soldering. 2. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely.

Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless steel

and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch (400-mm) centers.

2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24-inch (600-mm) centers.

C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Secure in waterproof manner by means of interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant unless otherwise indicated.

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.5 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.

3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."



3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



AC Transit APPLIED FIREPROOFING Oakland, CA SECTION 07 81 00 - Page 1 of 7 10/06/17

SECTION 07 81 00 APPLIED FIREPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM), including corrosion-resistant primer, on the following:

1. All new steel structural members. 2. All existing steel members, as indicated, with fireproofing that has been removed or has

disbonded due to steel corrosion 3. Repair of fireproofing removed or damaged as a result of other repairs or demolition

under this contract.



1. Review products, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance requirements.





B. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing.

C. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES.

D. Field quality-control reports.




A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of each type of fireproofing and different substrate and each required finish as shown on Drawings.



1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on field mockups of fireproofing.

1. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and construction.

B. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods.

1. Bond Strength: Test for cohesive and adhesive strength according to ASTM E 736. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.

2. Density: Test for density according to ASTM E 605. Provide density indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.

3. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, attests that primers or coatings are compatible with fireproofing.

4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, obtain applied-fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions

for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated bonding agents or primers.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is 44 deg F (7 deg C) or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing for each fire-resistance design from single source.

C. Fire-Resistance Design: match density of existing fireproofing. Retain option in "VOC Content" Paragraph below if required for LEED-NC, LEED-CI, or LEED-CS Credit EQ 4.2 or if required by authorities having jurisdiction; coordinate with products and revise to suit Project.

D. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.

2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. SFRM: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying with indicated fire-resistance design, and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar before conveyance and application or conveyed in a dry state and mixed with atomized water at place of application.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved equal:

a. GCP Applied Technologies; Monokote Z156. b. Carboline Company; RPM International; AD Southwest Fireproofing Type 5GP

unless a higher density exists, in which case, match the existing density with AD Southwest Fireproofing Type 5MD, AD Southwest Fireproofing Type 7GP or AD Southwest Fireproofing Type 7HD .

2. Application: Designated for exterior use by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Bond Strength: Minimum 150-lbf/sq. ft. (7.18-kPa) cohesive and adhesive strength based on field testing according to ASTM E 736.

4. Density: Not less than 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m) and as specified in the approved fire-resistance design, according to ASTM E 605.

5. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E 605, whichever is thicker, but not less than 0.375 inch (9 mm).

6. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 7. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 10 or less.

8. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E 937. 9. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 759.



10. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 760.

11. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.270 g/sq. m) in 24 hours according to ASTM E 859.

12. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard finishes.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.

B. Substrate Primers:

1. Primer shall be an epoxy primer, organic zinc-rich epoxy primer, or inorganic zinc/polyamide tie coat primer system recommended by the SFRM manufacturer for maximum corrosion protection under exterior conditions.

2. Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with one or both of the following requirements:

a. Primer and substrate are identical to those tested in required fire-resistance design by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Primer's bond strength in required fire-resistance design complies with specified bond strength for fireproofing and with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on a series of bond tests according to ASTM E 736.

C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance design. Verify compliance with the following:

1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.



2. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.

3. Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application.

B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed before beginning fireproofing work.

C. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related work is complete before beginning fireproofing work.

D. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.

E. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing.

C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.

D. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, sealers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work.

B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing.

1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place.



2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed.

D. Metal Decks:

1. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal deck substrates until concrete topping, if any, has been completed.

2. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal roof deck until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fireproofing.

E. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

F. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

G. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.

H. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

I. For applications over encapsulant materials, including lockdown (post-removal) encapsulants, apply fireproofing that differs in color from that of encapsulant over which it is applied.

J. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from fireproofing over which they are applied.

K. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups.

L. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations.

M. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications.

N. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes:

1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for each finish selected.

2. Spray-Textured Finish: Finish left as spray applied with no further treatment. 3. Rolled, Spray-Textured Finish: Even finish produced by rolling spray-applied finish with

a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness. 4. Skip-Troweled Finish: Even leveled surface produced by troweling spray-applied finish

to smooth out the texture and neaten edges. 5. Skip-Troweled Finish with Corner Beads: Even, leveled surface produced by troweling

spray-applied finish to smooth out the texture, eliminate surface markings, and square off edges.




A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, 1704.10.

B. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.

C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. 2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results

indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades.

D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.

E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.



AC Transit JOINT SEALANTS Oakland, CA SECTION 07 92 00 Page 1 of 8 10/06/17

SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Preformed joint sealants.


1. Section 07 62 00, “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim,” for sealants used in conjunction with sheet metal fabrication and installation.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.

D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.



C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.



B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. JS-1: Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.


a. BASF Building Systems; Omniseal 50. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 295. d. Pecora Corporation; 895. e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C995. f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. JS-5: Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.


a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 900. c. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 230 Type II. d. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a. f. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic or Vulkem 116.

B. JS-2: Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.


a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1 or Sonolastic Ultra. b. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 40 FC. c. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 230 Type II. d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a. e. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116.



C. JS-3: Immersible Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T and I.


a. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso-Flex 880 GB. b. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 2 SL. c. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 245.

2.4 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS

A. JS-4: Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. (160 kg/cu. m) and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.


a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals; Polytite Standard. b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V. c. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal. d. Schul International, Inc.; Sealtite or Sealtite 50N. e. Willseal USA, LLC; Willseal 150 or Willseal 250.

2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or



harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.



C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile at joints in horizontal surfaces per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.

G. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.




A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.



3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces JS-2 or JS-3.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints in stone paving units. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Joints in concrete paving

2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade or Multicomponent, nonsag, traffic grade, Class 25.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-1.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints in dimension stone cladding. b. Joints between metal panels. c. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows and

louvers. e. Other joints as indicated.

2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 50. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.



AC Transit HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Oakland, CA SECTION 08 11 13 - Page 1 of 9 10/06/2017

SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal work.


1. Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 2. Section 09 91 13 “Exterior Painting” for priming and painting doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.





1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type.



2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.

Include interface with adjacent materials. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Amweld International, LLC. 2. Apex Industries, Inc. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Commercial Door & Hardware Inc. 5. Concept Frames, Inc. 6. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 7. Custom Metal Products. 8. Daybar. 9. Deansteel.



10. de La Fontaine Industries. 11. DKS Steel Door & Frame Sys. Inc. 12. Door Components, Inc. 13. Fleming-Baron Door Products. 14. Gensteel Doors Inc. 15. Greensteel Industries, Ltd. 16. HMF Express. 17. Hollow Metal Inc. 18. Hollow Metal Xpress. 19. J/R Metal Frames Manufacturing, Inc. 20. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 21. L.I.F. Industries, Inc. 22. LaForce, Inc. 23. Megamet Industries, Inc. 24. Mesker Door Inc. 25. Michbi Doors Inc. 26. MPI Group, LLC (The). 27. National Custom Hollow Metal. 28. North American Door Corp. 29. Philipp Manufacturing Co (The). 30. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 31. Premier Products, Inc. 32. Republic Doors and Frames. 33. Rocky Mountain Metals, Inc. 34. Security Metal Products Corp. 35. Shanahans Manufacturing Ltd. 36. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 37. Steward Steel; Door Division. 38. Stiles Custom Metal, Inc. 39. Titan Metal Products, Inc. 40. Trillium Steel Doors Limited. 41. West Central Mfg. Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.



2.3 HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. .

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm.) c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm),

with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,

polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating.

b. Construction: Full profile welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Metallic coating.

2.4 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-

(9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,

allowing not less than 2-inch (51-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.



2.5 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch (0.66 mm), steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches (152 mm) apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches (127 mm) o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation.

2. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3.2 mm in 51

mm). 4. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as

face sheets. 5. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors where required for attachment of

weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 6. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit

moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.



C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm)

from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c.

5. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.



1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply specified primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.



b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as

necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber

insulation. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled

expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

b. At Bottom of Door: [3/4 inch (19.1 mm)] [5/8 inch (15.8 mm)] plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

c. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.



3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.



AC Transit DOOR HARDWARE Oakland, CA SECTION 087100 - Page 1 of 11 10/06/17

SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Mechanical door hardware for swinging doors.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.

b. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents.

c. Content: Include the following information:

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame.

2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule.

3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.

4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 6) Mounting locations for door hardware. 7) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and

frame.



2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.


A. Qualification Data: For Architectural Hardware Consultant.

B. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule.


A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows:

1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer.

D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.



B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.

D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant.

C. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use.

2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and



adjusting as required for proper door and door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled on Drawings to comply with requirements in this Section.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products or products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are as indicated on Drawings. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated as indicated on Drawings.

2.2 HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on schedule or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Bommer Industries, Inc. b. Hager Companies. c. Lawrence Hardware Inc. d. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. PBB, Inc. f. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.

2. Finish: # 630, Satin Stainless Steel.

2.3 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows:

1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw.



C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

D. Lock Trim:

1. Description: Mortise Locksets. 2. Levers: Forged.

a. Lever “03.”

3. Escutcheons: Wrought; type “N.”

E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.

F. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational and Security Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings; NO SUBSTITUTIONS ACCEPTED:

a. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

2. Finish: # 630, Satin Stainless Steel.

2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product to

match existing keying system as directed by Owner.

B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; permanent cores that are interchangeable; face finished to match lockset.

C. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.

2.5 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A.

1. Existing System:

a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. b. Re-key Owner's existing master key system into new keying system.



B. Keys: Nickel silver.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation:

a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."

2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:

a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three.

2.6 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North

America. c. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand company. d. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. f. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. g. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard powder coat aluminum.

2.7 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Wall-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum base metal.


a. Hager Companies. b. Hiawatha, Inc. c. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. e. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. f. Trimco.

2. Finish: #626, Satin Chromium Plated.



2.8 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8.


a. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. b. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand company. c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2. Finish: #630, Satin Stainless Steel.

2.9 DOOR GASKETING

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.


a. Hager Companies. b. National Guard Products. c. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Reese Enterprises, Inc. e. Zero International.

2. Finish: As indicated on the Drawings.

2.10 THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.


a. Hager Companies. b. National Guard Products. c. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Reese Enterprises, Inc. e. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. f. Zero International.

2. Finish: As indicated on the Drawings.



2.11 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.


a. Hiawatha, Inc. b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. c. Pawling Corporation. d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. e. Trimco.

2. Finish: #630, Satin Stainless Steel.

2.12 FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.

1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18.

C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Fire-Rated Applications:

a. Machine Screws: For the following:

1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames. 2) Strike plates to frames. 3) Closers to doors and frames.

b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided:

1) Surface hinges to doors. 2) Closers to doors and frames. 3) Surface-mounted exit devices.

2. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.



3. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors."

4. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.

2.13 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in this section.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.



B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. 2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.

E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

F. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.

1. Provide solid in-wall blocking between studs as required to accommodate stop.

G. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

H. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

I. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.


A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to



operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training."

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Located in the Drawings.



AC Transit PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING Oakland, CA SECTION 09 24 00 -Page 1 of 5 10/06/17

SECTION 09 24 00 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Patching, as required, of exterior Portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath.




A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide Portland cement plaster assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.


A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.

B. Exterior Plasterwork:



1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind.

2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has

occurred.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL LATH

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.


a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company. b. CEMCO. c. Clark Western Building Systems. d. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. e. MarinoWARE. f. Phillips Manufacturing Co.

2. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Flat or Self-furring, 2.5 lb/sq. yd. (1.4 kg/sq. m).

B. Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790, Type I, Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable paper 60-Minute.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.

B. Metal Accessories:


a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company. b. CEMCO. c. Clark Western Building Systems. d. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. e. MarinoWARE. f. Phillips Manufacturing Co.

2. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) zinc coating.

3. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.



4. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with expanded flanges.

5. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.


A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.

B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in Portland cement plaster.

C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.

D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than three exposed threads.

E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063.

F. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch (1.21-mm) diameter, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I Type II.

1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray.

B. Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1328.

C. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.

2.5 PLASTER MIXES

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.

1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious materials.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering.


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.

3.4 INSTALLING METAL LATH

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.

3.5 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES

A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.

B. Reinforcement for External Corners:

1. Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations.

C. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations where they previously existed at patched areas.

3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.

1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6.4 mm in 3 m) from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge placed on surface.

2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal.



3. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.

B. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork; 3/4-inch (19-mm) thickness.

1. Portland cement mixes. 2. Plastic cement mixes. 3. Portland and plastic cement mixes.

C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide finish to match adjacent existing.

3.7 PLASTER REPAIRS

A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.



AC Transit EXTERIOR PAINTING Oakland, CA SECTION 09 91 13 - Page 1 of 8 10/06/17

SECTION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following substrates:

1. Galvanized sheet metal. 2. Steel 3. Stainless steel. 4. Exterior Portland cement plaster (stucco).


1. Section 01 73 00 – “Execution” for painting related to interior Cutting and Patching 2. Section 07 81 00 – “Applied Fireproofing” for primers used with cementitious

fireproofing of steel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.



1.4 EXISTING WALL COATINGS

A. A single sample taken at the south 10th Floor balcony deck below the windows was determined by laboratory test to be “butyl-ethylene-acrylate elastomer” in three layers approximately 26 mils total thickness. The test report is available on request.

B. It is the Contractor’s responsibility, prior to making submittals, to ascertain the composition of existing paints and coatings to be over-coated, verify with manufacturer compatibility with new paints and coatings, and test for and verify suitable adhesion of existing paints and coatings to substrate.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

3. VOC content.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects, verify suitable adhesion and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.



a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to District.




A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINTS AND ACRYLIC COATINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Behr Process Corporation. b. Benjamin Moore & Co. c. Cloverdale Paint. d. Dulux (formerly ICI Paints); a brand of AkzoNobel. e. Dunn-Edwards Corporation. f. Kelly-Moore Paint Company Inc. g. PARA Paints. h. Parex USA, Inc. i. Parker Paint; Comex Group. j. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. k. Pratt & Lambert. l. Rust-Oleum Corporation; a subsidiary of RPM International, Inc.



m. Sherwin-Williams; Paint Stores Group.

2.2 SILICONECOATINGS


a. GE Sealants and Adhesives (Momentive Performance Materials, 260 Hudson River Road, Waterford, NY 12188, www.ge.com/silicones). .

b. Corning Corporation, PO Box 994, Midland, MI 48686-0994, 800-248-2481, www.dowcorning.com/construction.

2.3 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Galvanized: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

2.5 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #163.

2.6 HIGH-BUILD ACRYLIC COATINGS

A. Primer for High Build Coating, Latex, Flat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

B. Intermediate Coat for High Build Coating, Latex, Flat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.

C. Latex, Exterior, High Build: MPI #40.



2.7 HIGH-BUILD SILICONE COATINGS

A. Primer for High-Build Coating: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. Compatible with surface and coating approved by manufacturer. Primer may not be required.

B. Intermediate Coat: GE Silicone Coatings Silshield SE2400 or Dow Corning Allguard Silicone Elastomeric Coating.

C. Topcoat: GE Silicone Coatings Silshield SE2400 or Dow Corning Allguard Silicone


A. Testing of Paint Materials: District reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. District will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. District may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Remove all existing coatings that are not fully bonded using methods acceptable to the paint manufacturer.

D. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

E. Stainless Steel requires special preparation.

1. Surface contaminants like dirt, oil, grease, or dust can create adhesion issues between the coating and the steel surface. These contaminants can be removed with emulsifying cleaners, detergent, metal conditioners or other cleaning methods (one effective method used in the field involved the application of a clean and etch solution to remove surface contaminants and dull the stainless steel substrate).

2. Stainless steel is generally a very smooth surface and it can be very difficult for coatings to adhere to. To provide an anchor pattern for the coatings to adhere to, some form of mechanical abrasion is required. This is ideally achieved through abrasive blasting; however given the conditions of the jobsite, may not be possible. In situations where abrasive blasting is not an option, the surface can be abraded by sanding or by tool cleaning.

3. It is important to use a test-patch by applying the selected primer to a small, inconspicuous area of the project before large-scale coatings application begins. This will help verify adhesion between the primer and the substrate. Using a test-patch can help determine the effectiveness of surface preparation and identify any issues that may lead to coatings failure.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final

installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door

frames. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes.



5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Adhesion Testing: Perform tests on each substrate, including plaster, CMU and existing coatings to be retained to determine adequate adhesion using ASTM D3359, or other methods recommended by the paint manufacturer. Report results in writing.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Galvanized Sheet Metal Substrates:



1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134, or as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated.

b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat. (Level 5), MPI #163.

B. Steel Substrates (without fireproofing)

1. Pigmented Polyurethane over High-Build Epoxy System MPI EXT 5.1J:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #101. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, high build, low gloss, MPI #108. c. Topcoat: Polyurethane, two component, pigmented, gloss (MPI Gloss

Level 6), MPI #72.

C. Stainless-Steel Substrates:

1. Polyurethane System

a. Prime Coat: Primer, vinyl wash, MPI #80. b. Intermediate Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #101. c. First and Second Topcoat: Polyurethane, two component, pigmented, gloss

(MPI Gloss Level 6), MPI #72.

D. WC-1: Portland Cement Plaster and CMU Substrates – Acrylic System:

1. High-Build Latex System: Dry film thickness not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm).

a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, high build, MPI #40.

E. WC-2: Portland Cement Plaster and CMU Substrates – Silicone System:

1. High-Build Silicone System: Dry film thickness not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm).

a. Primer for High-Build Coating: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. Compatible with surface and coating approved by manufacturer. Primer may not be required.

b. Intermediate Coat: GE Silicone Coatings Silshield SE2400 or Dow Corning Allguard Silicone Elastomeric Coating.

c. Topcoat: GE Silicone Coatings Silshield SE2400 or Dow Corning Allguard Silicone


General Office Water Intrusion Repairs IFB# 2018-1420

AC Transit WET PIPE FIRE SPRINKLERS Oakland, CA SECTION 21 13 13 - Page 1 of 6 10/06/17

SECTION 211313 WET PIPE FIRE SPRINKLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Fire-protection valves. 3. Sprinklers. 4. Automatic Sprinkler Accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate

at working pressure of 175 psig maximum.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water

and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device.

B. Extend automatic wet pipe sprinkler system to areas shown on drawings.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working

pressure. B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses

through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers. 2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:

a. Mechanical Equipment Rooms. 3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:

a. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area. 4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing.

a. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. b. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

D. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7.

1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.



B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer with C-16 license. E. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that

have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

F. Welding certificates. G. Fire-hydrant flow test report. H. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with

performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

I. Field quality-control reports. J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test. a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field

test reports by a qualified professional engineer. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code. C. Codes

1. California Building Code 2. California Plumbing Code 3. California Fire Code

D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems." 2. NFPA 291, “Recommended Practice for Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants.”

1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates

ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for

joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 ABOVE GRADE STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. All steel piping with 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working pressure.

1. Pipe 2” and smaller:



a. Indoor: Schedule 40 Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B with threaded pipe connection.

2. Pipe 2-1/2” and larger: a. Indoor: Schedule 10 black steel with grooved joints.

3. All Piping shall be UL listed and comply with NFPA 13.

2.3 VALVES A. General Requirements:

1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved. 2. Valves shall be in accordance with NFPA 13. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig. 4. Do not use quarter turn ball valves for 2” or larger drain valves.

2.4 SPRINKLERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. 2. Viking Corporation. 3. Or Approved Equal

B. General Requirements: 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"

published by FM Global, listing. 2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.

C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element: 1. Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 1767. 2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199. 3. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for

"Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

D. Sprinkler Finishes: 1. Painted: White

2.5 PIPE ESCUTCHEONS A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates. B. One-Piece Floor Plates: White finish C. Slope Ceiling: Viking White finish

2.6 SLEEVES A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to ductile-iron

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with

welded longitudinal joint. C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, standard weight, zinc coated,

plain ends. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.

Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set-screws.



2.7 SLEEVE SEALS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Calpico, Inc. 2. Metraflex, Inc. 3. Link-Seal 4. Or Approved Equal.

B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements.

2.8 GROUT A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, posthardening and volume adjusting, dry, hydraulic-

cement grout. B. Characteristics: Nonshrink, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for

system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13. B. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint device

materials and installation in NFPA 13. C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions

in pipe sizes. D. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply

with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13. E. Fill sprinkler system piping with water. F. Provide pipe ID and direction of flow at 20 ft on center.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings

that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings

before assembly. D. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for

water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.



E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified

processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article. 1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for

galvanized-steel pipe. G. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to

AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

H. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.4 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. B. Escutcheons for New Piping:

1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern. 2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass

with polished chrome-plated finish stamped steel with set-screw stamped steel with set-screw or spring clips stamped steel with spring clips.

3. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish cast brass with rough-brass finish stamped steel with set-screw stamped steel with spring clips stamped steel with set-screw or spring clips.

4. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, cast brass stamped steel with set-screw stamped steel with spring clips stamped steel with set-screw or spring clips.

5. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate.

3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in

floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. C. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated. D. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation

using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. E. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout. F. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve

and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated. G. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:

1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment Areas or Other Wet Areas: Galvanized-steel pipe Stack sleeve fittings. a. Extend sleeves 2 inches above finished floor level. b. For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast-iron sleeve

fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Comply with requirements for flashing in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.".

2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions: a. Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves for pipes.



3. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls: a. Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves for pipes.

H. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.

3.6 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION A. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position

pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in

NFPA 13.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.

C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller:

1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with threaded ends. UL listed. B. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 and larger:

1. Thinwall Schedule 10, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

3.11 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. 2. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.

B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated. 1. Upright Pendent and Sidewall Sprinklers: rough bronze in unfinished.



AC Transit STORM DRAINAGE PIPING AND SPECIALTIES Oakland, CA SECTION 22 14 23 - Page 1 of 3 10/06/17

SECTION 221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING AND SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Area drains. 2. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties. 3. Cleanouts. 4. Trench drains. 5. Flashing materials.




A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Floor Cleanouts: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable

product by one of the following:

a. Josam Company. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. c. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for heavy-duty, adjustable housing cleanouts. 3. Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Type: Heavy-duty, adjustable housing.



5. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron. 6. Outlet Connection: Threaded. 7. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket. 8. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads. 9. Top-Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install area drain at low point of parking area as shown on the drawings. 1. Position drains for easy access and maintenance.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following instructions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100

feet for larger piping.

C. Install trench drain as shown on drawings. Set grates of drains flush with finished surface unless otherwise indicated.

D. Assemble channel drainage system components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with adjacent surface.

E. Install sleeve flashing device with each conductor passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

3.2 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of 6.0-lb/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.

2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum length of 10 inches and with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches

around specialty.



C. Set flashing on floors in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.



AC Transit ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING Oakland, CA SECTION 230518 - Page 1 of 2 10/06/17

SECTION 230518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.


AC Transit ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING Oakland, CA SECTION 230518 - Page 2 of 2 10/06/17

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type

with concealed hinge. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished, chrome-plated finish. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.



AC Transit HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Oakland, CA SECTION 230529 - Page 1 of 6 10/06/17

SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Fastener systems.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.




A. Welding certificates.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

2.2 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following: a. Cooper B-Line, Inc. b. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

3. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

4. Standard: MFMA-4. 5. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips. 6. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel

slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 7. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 8. Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following: 1. PHS Industries, Inc. 2. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 3. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.



D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig minimum compressive strength.

E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless- steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.



D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

L. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

3. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

4. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:




2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.

E. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.



4. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

G. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 2. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

H. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 4. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 5. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

I. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

J. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

K. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.



AC Transit VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC Oakland, CA SECTION 230548 - Page 1 of 3 10/06/17

SECTION 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Open-spring isolators. 2. Mechanical anchor bolts.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning & Development (for the State of California).



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of vibration isolation device and seismic-restraint component required.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation and seismic bracing for HVAC piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any.

B. Welding certificates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators: .

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provider comparable product by one of the following: a. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. b. Mason Industries, Inc.

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 7. Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator

pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 8. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw

to fasten and level equipment.

2.2 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following: 1. Hilti, Inc.

C. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.




3.2 VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

B. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 3. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.



AC Transit IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Oakland, CA SECTION 230553 - Page 1 of 4 10/06/17

SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 3. Valve tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:



1. Material and Thickness: Aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

2.3 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

B. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Heating Water Piping:

a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Black.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, square.



2. Valve-Tag Color: a. Hot Water: Natural.

3. Letter Color: a. Hot Water: Black.



AC Transit TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Oakland, CA SECTION 230593 Page 1 of 7 10/06/17

SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.


A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. Certified TAB reports.

E. Sample report forms.



F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration.


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC NEBB or TABB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician.

B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect.

D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."


A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

H. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

I. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.



2. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 3. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 4. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials.

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for fans. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

C. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

D. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

E. Check for airflow blockages.

F. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:



a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. 3. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than

indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

4. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

3.7 TOLERANCES

A. Set air flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Exhaust Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.

3.8 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers' test data. 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:



1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 14. Test conditions for fans performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor and exhaust-air dampers. b. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. c. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number, make, and size of belts.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):



a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

E. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration.



AC Transit METAL DUCTS Oakland, CA SECTION 15815 metal ducts -- Page 1 of 8 10/06/17

SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports. 6. Seismic-restraint devices.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Sealants and gaskets. 2. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and

coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers.



d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static- pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types

and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards

- Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.



B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black

and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and

gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O.

D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."



C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

D. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

E. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2.6 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel

channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.

C. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of

cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips.

D. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted

connections to hanger rod.

E. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.



D. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

E. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

F. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

G. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

H. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed

to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

I. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install

fire/smoke dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

J. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.

Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter

4, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,

bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum interval of 16 feet.



F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.4 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."

1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum

of 80 feet o.c. 2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and

seismic loads.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.

E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to

structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test.



2. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.

3. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

4. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according

to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media

shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.8 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and

Balancing." 3.9 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.

B. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.

C. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 with vanes.



D. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.



AC Transit AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Oakland, CA SECTION 23 33 00 Page 1 of 2 10/06/17

SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Flexible connectors.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Ventfabrics, Inc.

C. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

D. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

E. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.

1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.


AC Transit AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Oakland, CA SECTION 23 33 00 Page 2 of 2 10/06/17

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.



AC Transit HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Oakland, CA SECTION 233423 - Page 1 of 6 10/06/17

SECTION 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Utility set fans. 2. Centrifugal roof ventilators.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Roof curbs. 7. Fan speed controllers.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.




A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UTILITY SET FANS


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Loren Cook Company. 2. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

C. Housing: Fabricated of steel with side sheets fastened with a deep lock seam or welded to scroll sheets.

1. Housing Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to eight standard positions.

D. Fan Wheels: Single-width, single inlet; welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun-steel inlet cone, with hub keyed to shaft.



1. Blade Materials: Steel.

E. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

F. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings with ABMA 9, L50 of 200,000 hours.

1. Extend grease fitting to accessible location outside of unit.

G. Belt Drives:

1. Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation 2. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5. 3. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use

with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.

4. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 5. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.

H. Accessories:

1. Inlet and Outlet: Flanged. 2. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing. 3. Backdraft Dampers: Gravity actuated with counterweight and interlocking aluminum

blades with felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge. 4. Inlet Screens: Removable wire mesh. 5. Drain Connections: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded coupling drain connection installed at

lowest point of housing. 6. Weather Hoods: Weather resistant with stamped vents over motor and drive

compartment.

2.2 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF SUPPLY FAN


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Loren Cook Company.

C. Housing: Removable, extruded-aluminum, rectangular top; square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone. 1. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and

maintenance.

D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.



E. Belt Drives:

1. Resiliently mounted to housing. 2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. 4. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley. 5. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

F. Accessories: 1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted outside

fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch (13-mm) mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;

factory set to close when fan stops.

G. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-) thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.

1. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange. 2. Overall Height: 8 inches (200 mm). 3. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope. 4. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel.

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.


A. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install roof mounted fans level and plumb.

B. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. See Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.

C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.



3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.



AC Transit ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Oakland, CA SECTION 260500 - Page 1 of 12 10/06/17

SECTION 26 05 00 ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Conduit, raceways and fittings. B. Wires and Cables for 600 Volts and less. C. Wire connections and devices. D. Outlet boxes. E. Pull and junction boxes. F. Disconnect Switches and Fuses G. Supporting Devices. H. Identifying Devices. I. Grounding and Bonding

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 the following items: B. A list of conduit types indicating where each type of conduit will be used. Indicate conduit

manufacturers and fittings to be used. C. Wires and Cables. D. Wiring Devices and Plates E. Nameplates, including engraving schedules where engraved plates are specified. F. Fused disconnect switches.

1.3 DRAWINGS

A. The drawings are diagrammatic and show the general extent and arrangement of the work required which shall be followed as closely as the actual construction site conditions and work of the other trades will permit.


A. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Coordination of the work: Contractor shall become familiar with the conditions of the job site, and with the landscape drawings, drawings of other disciplines and specifications and plan the installation of the electrical work to conform with that shown and specified so as to provide the best possible assembly of the combined work of the trades.



1.5 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. C. ANSI C80.5 - Rigid Aluminum Conduit. D. NECA (INST) - Standard of Installation; National Electrical Contractors Association. E. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable

Assemblies. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code - latest edition.

1.6 Provide as-built reproducible drawings showing all outlets with circuit numbers at each outlet and maintenance manuals for all new equipment.

1.7 Warranties for labor and materials - 1 year from the date of final acceptance of the work.

1.8 In addition to material and equipment specified, also provide all incidental materials required to effect complete installation. Such incidental materials include solders, tapes, caulking, mastics, gaskets, etc.

1.9 The Contractor will be held responsible to have examined the site and premises and satisfied himself as to existing conditions under which he will be obligated to operate in performing his part of the work or that which will in any manner affect the work under this contract.

1.10 Provide wiring tests upon completion of work and make adjustments as necessary for satisfactory operation of system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT – GENERAL

A. Materials and equipment shall be new, current models of manufacturers, Bare complete identification by manufacturer and Bare UL labels where applicable.

2.2 CONDUIT, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS

A. Rigid Steel Conduit 1. Rigid steel conduit shall be full weight, pipe size, finished inside and out by hot-dip

galvanizing after fabrication, and shall conform with ANSI C80.1 and UL. 2. Couplings shall be electroplated steel, compression type. 3. Insulating Bushings: Threaded polypropylene or thermo-setting phenolic rated 150°C

minimum. 4. Insulated grounding Bushings: Threaded cast malleable iron body with insulated throat

and steel "lay-in" ground lug with compression screw.



5. Insulated Metallic Bushings: Threaded cast malleable iron body with plastic insulated throat rated 150°C.

6. Running threads are not acceptable.

B. Non-Metallic Conduit 1. Schedule 40 PVC underground is an acceptable conduit material.

2.3 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Rigid galvanized steel or IMC shall be galvanized. Coupling and connectors shall be galvanized or cadmium plated; Allied Tube and Conduit, Triangle, or equal.

B. Conduit Fittings: Provide watertight compression type conduit fittings for electrical metallic tubing installed in wet location. Fittings for rigid galvanized steel or IMC shall be threaded.

2.4 CONDUCTORS

A. Conductors for within dwelling unit and garage shall be NM cable complying with NEC Article 334.

B. Conductors for exterior shall be soft drawn, annealed copper wire 98% conductivity bearing UL label.

C. Insulation: Provide the following (600 volt): D. Type THW, XHHW insulated wire for conductors #2 or larger E. Type THHN/THWN for all wire smaller than #2 F. Manufacturers: Southwire, Anaconda, Rome, General Cable, Cerro Wire, or equal.

2.5 WIRE CONNECTION

A. Wire Joints: Wires in sizes from #18 to #8 AWG, stranded conductor, with insulation rated 105 degrees C. or less shall be joined with electrical spring connectors of three part construction incorporating a non-restricted, zinc coated steel spring enclosed in a steel shell with an outer jacket of vinyl plastic with a flexible insulating skirt.

B. Mechanical Compression Connectors and Taps: Stranded conductors from #6 AWG to 750 Kcmil shall be joined or tapped using bolted pressure connectors having cast bronze compression bolts. Fittings shall be wide range-taking and designed to facilitate the making of parallel taps, tees, crosses or end-to-end connections. Split-bolt connectors will not be acceptable.

C. Fixture Connections: Splice fixture wire to circuit wiring with solderless connectors as specified above in paragraph A.

D. Terminating Lugs: Conductors from size No. 6 AWG to 750 MCM, copper, shall be terminated using tin plated hydraulically operated crimping tools and dies as stipulated by the lug manufacturer. Lugs shall be 3M "Scotchlok" series 30014, Burndy Type Ya-L series, or equal.

E. Splicing and Insulating Tape (600 volts and below): General purpose electrical tape shall be suitable for temperatures from minus 18 degrees C to 105 degrees C, shall be black, ultraviolet proof, self-extinguishing, 7 mil thick vinyl with a dielectric strength of 10,000 volts. Apply 4 layers half-lap with 2” over-lay on each conductor.

F. Insulating Putty (600 volts and below): Pads or rolls of non-corrosive, self-fusing, one eight inch thick rubber putty with PVC backing sheet. Putty shall be suitable for temperatures from



minus 17.8 degrees C to 37.8 degrees C and shall have a dielectric strength of 570 volts/mil minimum.

G. Insulating Resin: Two Part liquid epoxy resin with resin and catalyst in pre measured, sealed mixing pouch. Resin shall have a set up time of approximately 30 minutes at 21.1 degrees C, and shall have thermal and dielectric properties equal to the insulation properties of the cables immersed in the resin.

H. Terminal Strip Connectors: Terminate wire in locking tongue style, pressure type, solderless lug where applicable.

I. Wire Connectors: J. #6 AWG and larger: Thomas and Betts "Lock-Tite", Burndey, "Quicklug" or OZ Type

PT/PTC. K. #8 AWG and smaller: Scotch spring steel with insulated cap, Thomas and Betts, "STA-KON

Piggy" with insulator or ideal, wire nut or wing nut type.

2.6 OUTLET BOXES

A. Standard outlet boxes: Galvanized, die formed or drawn steel, knock-out type of size and configuration best suited to the application indicated on the plans. Minimum box size, 4 inch square by 1-1/2 inch deep, indoor use. FS cast boxes are required for outdoor use.

B. Cast Metal Outlet Boxes: FS cast boxes are required for outdoor use. Four-inch round, galvanized cast iron alloy with threaded hubs and mounting lugs as required. Boxes shall be furnished with cast cover plates of the same material as the box and neoprene cover gaskets. Thomas and Betts, Crouse-Hinds VXF series, Appleton JBX series or equal.

C. Conduit Outlet Bodies: Cadmium plated, cast iron alloy. Obround conduit outlet bodies with threaded conduit hubs and neoprene gasketed, cast iron covers. Outlet bodies shall be used to facilitate pulling of conductors or to make changes in conduit direction only. Splices are not permitted in conduit outlet bodies. Thomas and Betts, Crouse Hinds Form 8 Condulets, Appleton form 35 Unilets, or equal.

D. Wiring Devices: E. Duplex Receptacles: 20A, 125V, 3 wire, grounded, NEMA 5-15R, tamper resistant, Pass &

Seymour S885TRWCC14 decorator style or equal. F. GFI Receptacles: 20A, 125V, 3 wire, Nema 5-15R, tamper resistant, Pass & Seymour

S1595NTLTRWCC8 or equal. G. Outdoor Receptacles: shall be 20A, 125V, 3-wire, Nema 5-15R, Pass & Seymour

S1595TRWCC8 with while in use cover or equal. H. Switches: Lighting switches shall be 20A, 3 wire. Shall be Pass & Seymour 2601-W decorator

style or equal. 3-way switch shall be Pass & Seymour 2603-W or equal. I. Dimmer Switches: Dimmer have full-on bypass mode. Shall be Pass & Seymour 91180-W

decorator style or equal. 3-way dimmer switch shall be Pass & Seymour 91183-W or equal.

2.7 PULL AND JUNCTION

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: Use standard outlet or concrete ring boxes wherever possible; otherwise use minimum 15 gauge get metal, NEMA 1 boxes, sized to code requirements with covers secured by cadmium plated machine screws located 6 inches on centers. Circle AW Products, Hoffman Engineering Co., or equal.

B. Cast Metal Boxes: Use standard cast malleable iron outlet or device boxes wherever possible; otherwise use cadmium plated, cast malleable iron junction boxes with bolt-on, interchangeable



conduit hub plates with neoprene gaskets. Appleton RS series; Crouse Hinds RS series, or equal.

2.8 DISCONNECTS

A. Small Motors and Water Heaters: Provide 30A, 600V AC rated double-pole toggle switch for equipment disconnects. Switch shall be rated for 2HP motors at 120V and 5HP motors at 240V. Toggle switch shall be horsepower rated. Device shall have silver cadmium oxide contacts. Device shall be fully enclosed. Device shall have quick make, slow break design. Device shall be listed as a manual motor controller. Device shall be Bryant 30002B for interior installation and Bryant 30302B for exterior installations or equal.

B. Large Motors: Provide switches rated from 30A to 60A. Switches shall have switch blades which are visible when the switch is OFF and the cover is open The switch operating mechanism shall be quick-make, quick-break such that, during normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The operating handle shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover. Switch enclosures shall be rated Nema 3R for exterior installations. Switches shall be Square D – Class 3130 or equal.

2.9 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. All disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty type and have the number of poles, voltage rating, and horsepower rating as required by the motor or equipment. Disconnect switches shall be in enclosures to suit conditions, NEMA 3R for outdoor and NEMA 1 for indoor. Disconnect switches shall be fused unless otherwise noted on the drawings. As manufactured by: Square D - Class 3110, ITE Seimens, or equal.

2.10 FUSES

A. Dual Element, Time Delay, UL Class RK5. Rejection type. Size and Voltage as indicated on equipment. Bussman, Little Fuse, or approved equal.

2.11 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Concrete Fasteners: Phillips "Red-Head" or equal, self drilling expansion type concrete anchor. B. Conduit Straps: Hot-dip galvanized, cast malleable iron, two hole type strap with cast clamp-

backs and spacers as required. OZ/Gedney No. 14-50G strap and #141G spacer; Efcor No. 231 strap, and No.131 spacer; or equal.

C. Construction Channel: 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch 12 gauge galvanized steel channel with 17/32 inch diameter bolt holes, 1-1/2 inch on center, in the base of the channel. Kindorf 905 series, Unistrut P-1000-HS or equal.

D. Cable Ties and Clamps: Thomas and Betts Co. "Ty-Raps" Panduit "Pan-Ty" or equal one piece, nylon, reusable type lashing ties.

E. Fasteners (General) : Wood screws for fastening to wood. Machine screws for fastening to steel. Toggle bolts for fastening to hollow concrete block, gypsum board, or plaster walls. Expansion anchors for attachments to pre-poured concrete.



2.12 IDENTIFYING DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Type NP: Engraved black bakelite, 1 inch by 3-1/2 inch, 1/8 inch high white letters, machine screw retained. For permanent identification of all switchboards, panelboards, circuit breakers in separate enclosures, motor starters, relays, time switches, disconnect switches and other cabinet-enclosed apparatus including terminal cabinets or match existing as closely as possible.

B. Legend Plates: Type LP: Die-stamped metal legend plate with mounting hole and positioning key for attachment to panel mounted operators' devices. Engraved paint-filled characters as specified.

C. Wire & Terminal Markers: Self-adhering, pre-printed vinyl with self-laminating wrap around strip. Markers shall be legible after termination. Brady B191 series, Thomas & Betts WSL series or equal.

D. Conductor Phase Markers: Thomas & Betts WCPHAS series or similar in addition to colored marking as specified under this section of the specifications.

2.13 GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. Ground Rods B. Manufacturer: Blackburn, Erico, or approved Equal C. Size: 3/4" x 10' Ground Rods D. Grounding Electrode Conductor, 2/0 for foundation foots, and per NEC. E. Grounding Well - Christy Box, Valve Box

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. General: Exact locations of distances and devices shall be taken from field measurements and approved by the architect prior to rough in.

B. Provide all wiring connections for equipment furnished under other sections of the contract documents.

3.2 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY APPLICATIONS

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: For all exterior applications, all conduits larger than 2” trade diameter, indoor, below eight (8) feet.

B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Interior only and above eight (8) feet or when entering a panel from above.

C. Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit: In damp and wet locations for connections to motors, transformers, vibrating equipment and machinery. Connections to all pump motors, flow switches, and similar devices.

D. Rigid Galvanized: Install for all underground and exterior runs. Minimum conduit size shall be ¾”.



3.3 WIRE

A. Wire Sizes: Provide no wire smaller than #12 for lighting, receptacles or other circuits. Provide stranded wire for wire larger than #10.

B. Wiring for two circuits in bedrooms can be Southwire NM-B 2/2 or equal. C. Wires installed in exterior locations shall be THWN. NM-B conductors shall not be installed in

exterior locations. D. NM-B conductors shall be installed in interior locations only.

3.4 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. General 1. All conduit runs shown on the plans are sized based on the use of rigid steel conduit and

THWN copper conductors. If conductor type is changed the contractor shall be responsible for resizing conduits to meet code. In no case is conduit to be sized smaller than 3/4" trade diameter.

2. Low voltage wiring shall be installed in conduit, minimum 3/4" trade diameter. 3. Conduits shall be tightly covered and well protected during construction using metallic

bushings and bushing "pennies" to seal open ends. 4. In making joints in rigid steel conduit, ream conduit smooth after cutting and threading. 5. Clean any conduit in which moisture or any foreign matter has collected before pulling in

conductors. Paint all field threaded joints to prevent corrosion. 6. In all empty conduits or ducts, install an 1100 pound tensile strength polyethylene pulling

rope. 7. Conduit systems shall be electrically continuous throughout. Install code size,

uninsulated, copper grounding conductors in all conduit runs, grounding conductor shall be bonded to conduit, equipment frames and properly grounded.

B. Layout: 1. All new conduits shall be concealed. Any field conditions that does not allow

concealment of conduits shall be reviewed with the Architect prior to rough-in. 2. Locations of conduit runs shall be planned in advance of the installation and coordinated

with concrete work, plumbing and framing. 3. Where practical install conduits in groups in parallel vertical or horizontal runs and at

elevations that avoid unnecessary off-sets. 4. Low voltage conduit shall be grouped separately and labelled every 10 ft interval as to

system (i.e. fire, control, etc) 5. Exposed conduit shall be run parallel or at right angles to the centerlines of the columns

and beams. 6. Conduits shall not be placed closer than 12 inches from a parallel hot water or steam line

or three inches from such lines crossing perpendicular to the runs. 7. In long runs of conduit, provide sufficient pull boxes per NEC inside buildings to

facilitate pulling wires and cables. Support pull boxes from structure independent of conduit supports. These pull boxes are not shown on the plans.

C. Supports: 1. All raceway systems shall be secured to building structures using specified fasteners,

clamps and hangers spaced according to Code. 2. Support single runs of conduit using two hole pipe straps. Where run horizontally on

walls in damp or wet locations, install "clamp blocks" to space conduit off the surface.



3. Multiple conduit runs shall be supported using "trapeze" hangers fabricated from 3/8 inch diameter, threaded steel rods secured to building structures. Fasten conduit to construction channel with standard two hole pipe clamps. Provide lateral seismic bracing for hangers.

4. Installation 5. Locate and install anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard

of Installation". 6. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 7. Do not drill or cut structural members. 8. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with

adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. 9. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. 10. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1

inch (25 mm) off wall. 11. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards

recessed in hollow partitions.

D. Terminations and Joints 1. Raceways shall be joined using specified couplings or transition couplings where

dissimilar raceway systems are joined. 2. Rigid conduit connection to enclosures shall be made by Myers type grounding hubs

only. EMT connections to enclosures shall be made with compression connector with grounding lock-nuts or bushings.

3. Conduit terminations exposed at weatherproof enclosures and cast outlet boxes shall be made watertight using appropriate connectors and hubs.Install expansion couplings where any conduit crosses a building separation or expansion joint

4. Install cable sealing bushings on all conduits originating outside the building walls and terminating in switchgear, cabinets or gutters inside the building. Install cable sealing bushings or caulk conduit terminations in all grade level or below grade exterior pull, junction or outlet boxes.

E. Penetrations: 1. Furnish and install metal sleeves for all exposed interior conduit runs passing through

concrete floors or walls. Following conduit installation, seal all penetrations using non-iron bearing, chloride free, non-shrinking, dry-pack, grouting compound.

2. Install specified watertight conduit entrance seals and membrane clamps at all below grade wall and floor penetrations. Conduits penetrating exterior building walls and building floor slab shall be insulated rigid steel.

3. Conduits penetrating rated walls, floors, etc. shall be fireproofed.

3.5 WIRING DEVICES

A. Receptacles: 1. General Areas: General provisions for receptacles shall comply with NEC Article

210.52.A.1-2. 2. Kitchen Areas: Receptacles shall be provided in compliance with NEC Article 210.52.B

and 210.52.C. 3. Restrooms: Receptacles shall be provided in compliance with NEC Article 210.52.D.



4. Family room, dining room, living room, dens, bedrooms, sunrooms, closets and hallways shall have devices that are Arc Fault Circuit-Interrupter (AFCI) protected or have breakers that are AFCI rated per NEC article 210.12.

B. Switches: 1. Controls for lighting shall comply with 2005 Title 24 Residential Compliance Manual.

3.6 CABLE AND WIRE INSTALLATION

A. Examination 1. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. 2. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. 3. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported. 4. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Preparation 1. In existing conduits that will be reused, pull out existing conductors. 2. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. 3. Use 50/50 solution of Simple Green. Use CO2 to blow water and soap into conduit - let

soak to break up dried out pulling compounds, then pull conductors. Pull one conductor at a time if will not pull all out together.

C. General: 1. Conductors shall not be in conduit until all work of any nature that may cause injury is

completed. Care should be taken in pulling conductors that insulation is not damaged. U.L. approved non-petroleum base and insulating type pulling compound shall be used as needed.

2. All cables shall be installed and tested in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and warranty.

3. Block and tackle, power driven winch or other mechanical means shall not be used in pulling conductors of size smaller than AWG # 1.

D. Splicing and Terminating: 1. All aspects of splicing and terminating shall be in accordance with cable manufacturer's

published procedures. 2. Make up all splices in outlet boxes with connectors as specified herein with separate tails

of correct color to be made up to splice. Provide at least six (6) inches of tails packed in box after splice is made up.

3. All wire and cable in panels, control centers and equipment enclosures shall be bundled and clamped.

4. Encapsulate splices in exterior outlet, junction and pull boxes using insulating resin kits. All splices for exterior equipment in pump rooms shall be made up watertight.

5. Insulate mechanical compression taps AWG # 1/0 and larger using pre-molded, snap-on insulating boots or specified conformable insulating putty overwrapped with two half-lapped layers of insulating tape.

E. Identification: 1. Securely tag all branch circuits, noting the purpose of each. Mark conductors with vinyl

wrap-around markers. Where more than two conductors run through a single outlet, mark each circuit with the corresponding circuit number at the panelboard.



2. Color code conductors size #6 and larger using specified phase color markers and identification tags.

3. All terminal strips are to have each individual terminal identified with specified vinyl markers.

4. All identification shall be legible and readable after completion of installation.

3.7 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit

with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for

temperatures encountered. D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required. F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and

equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete

equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete

equipment wiring requirements.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF BOXES

A. General: 1. Leave no un-used openings in any box. Install close-up plugs as required to seal

openings. 2. Exposed outlet boxes and boxes in damp or wet locations shall be cast metal with

gasketed cast metal cover plates.

B. Box Layout: 1. Outlet boxes shall be installed at the locations and elevations shown on the drawings or

specified herein. Make adjustments to locations as required by structural conditions and to suit coordination requirements of other trades.

2. Install junction or pullboxes where required to limit bends in conduit runs to not more than 360 degrees or where pulling tension achieved would exceed the maximum allowable for the cable to be installed. Consult wire and cable manufacturer.

3.9 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES

A. General 1. Install all devices flushmounted unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Comply with

layout drawings for general locations. Consult Architect or Owner for locations that have conflict with other devices or manner not suitable for installation. Avoid place devices behind open doors.



2. Align devices horizontally and vertically. Device plates shall be aligned vertically with tolerance of 1/16". All four edges of device plates shall be in contact with the wall surface.

3. Mounting height as indicated on the drawings and according to ADA requirements. 4. Install device plates on all outlet boxes. Provide blank plates for all empty, spare, and

boxes for future use. 5. Securely fasten devices into boxes and attach appropriate cover plates. 6. Caulk around edges or outdoor device plates and boxes when rough wall surfaces prevent

raintight seal. Use caulking materials approved by Architect/Engineer. 7. Fireproof around opening of devices located or penetrating firerated construction

assemblies.

B. Identification 1. Label all outlets and switches. Mark each wiring device where circuits and panel supply

is derived from. 2. All identification shall be legible and readable after completion of installation.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF FUSES AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Fuses shall be installed where noted on plans. Sizes are based on design data provided by air conditioning mfg. Listed or labeled equipment must be in accordance with instructions included in the listing or labeling. Be sure to observe maximum branch circuit fuse size labels.

B. Disconnect switches shall be mounted on the units. Coordinate with mechanical contractor to ensure switches are not mounted on a removable access panel.

C. Label each disconnect fuse with equipment tag as indicated in the single line diagram, or as directed.

3.11 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Ground non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment enclosures, frames, conductor raceways or cable trays to provide a low impedance path for line-to-ground fault current and to bond all non-current carrying metal parts together. Install a ground conductor in each raceway system in addition to conductors shown. Equipment ground conductor shall be electrically and mechanically continuous from the electrical circuit source to the equipment to be grounded. Size ground conductors per NEC 250 unless larger conductors are shown on the drawings.

B. Grounding conductors shall be identified with green insulation, except where a bare ground conductor is specified. Where green insulation is not available, on larger sizes, black insulation shall be used and suitably identified with green tape at each junction box or device enclosure.

C. Install metal raceway couplings, fittings and terminations secure and tight to insure good ground continuity. Provide insulated grounding bushing and bonding jumper where metal raceway is not directly attached to equipment metal enclosure and at concentric knock-outs.

D. Motors shall be connected to equipment ground conductors with a conduit grounding bushing and with a bolted solderless lug connection on the metal frame.

E. Conduit terminating in concentric knockouts at panelboards, cabinets and gutters shall have insulated grounding bushings and bonding jumpers installed interconnecting all such conduits and the panelboard cabinet, gutter, etc.

F. Performance: Measure ground resistance, 25 Ohms or less.



3.12 BONDING

A. Bonding shall be provided to assure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any fault current likely to be imposed.

B. Bonding shall be in accordance with NEC Article 250, Part V

3.13 WORKMANSHIP

A. Preparation, handling, and installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and technical data particular to the product specified and/or accepted equal except as otherwise specified. Coordinate work and cooperate with others in furnishing and placing this work. Work to reviewed shop drawings for work done by others and to field measurements as necessary to properly fit the work.

B. Conform to the National Electrical Contractor's Association "Standard of Installation" for general installation practice.

3.14 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



AC Transit DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM Oakland, CA SECTION 28 31 11 - 1 of 11 10/06/17

SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. System smoke detectors. 2. Addressable interface device. 3. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.

B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.

C. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring.

4. Detail assembly and support requirements. 5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits. 6. Include battery-size calculations. 7. Include input/output matrix.



8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72.

9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector. 10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature,

and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. 11. Provide program report showing that air-sampling detector pipe layout balances

pneumatically within the airflow range of the air-sampling detector. 12. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,

drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them.

a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators.

b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm. c. Show field wiring and equipment required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm and

override by firefighters' control system. d. Show field wiring and equipment required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm and

override by firefighters' smoke-evacuation system. e. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations. f. Show air-sampling detector pipe routing.

13. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.

C. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the device.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.

3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.





B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.


1.6 SAMPLE WARRANTY: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following and deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with indication of origination and termination points.

d. Riser diagram. e. Device addresses. f. Air-sampling system sample port locations and modeling program report showing

layout meets performance criteria. g. Record copy of site-specific software. h. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:

1) Equipment tested. 2) Frequency of testing of installed components. 3) Frequency of inspection of installed components. 4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. 5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.

i. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. j. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each

annunciator unit.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:



1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type

installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type. 2. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type installed, but no

fewer than one unit of each type.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level III minimum technician.

C. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationally recognized testing laboratory).

D. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.

E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 in the form of a placard by an FM Global-approved alarm company.

F. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72.


A. Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any equipment or components not functioning as designed.

B. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Construction Manager's written permission.

C. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are placed in service to protect the facility during construction.



1.11 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service, and label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.

B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnected fire-alarm equipment and wiring.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service Agreement.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system manufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system.

B. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems]:

1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Flame detectors. 4. Smoke detectors. 5. Duct smoke detectors. 6. Air-sampling smoke-detection system (VESDA). 7. Carbon monoxide detectors. 8. Combustible gas detectors. 9. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 10. Preaction system. 11. Fire-extinguishing system operation. 12. Fire standpipe system.



13. Dry system pressure flow switch. 14. Fire pump running.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. All initiation shall of existing system shall comply with NFPA 72 and authority having jurisdiction. Refer to asbuilts to existing system for initiation and actions sequences.


A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2.4 AIR-SAMPLING SMOKE DETECTOR


1. Edwards Signaling Technologies

2. Or approved equal.

B. General Description:

1. Air-sampling smoke detector shall be laser based using a piping system and a fan to transport the particles of combustion to the detector.

2. Provide two levels of alarm from each zone covered by the detector and two supervisory levels of alarm from each detector.

3. The air being sampled shall pass through filters to remove dust particulates greater than 20 microns before entering the detection chamber.

4. Detectors shall have the capability via RS 485 to connect up to 100 detectors in a network.

5. Detectors shall communicate with the fire-alarm control unit via addressable, monitored dry contact closures, RS 485, and interface modules. Provide a minimum of six relays, individually programmable remotely for any function.

6. Pipe airflow balancing calculations shall be performed using approved calculation software.

C. Detector:

1. Detector, Filter, Aspirator, and Relays: Housed in a mounting box and arranged in such a way that air is drawn from the detection area and a sample passed through the dual-stage filter and detector by the aspirator.

2. Obscuration Sensitivity Range: 0.005 - 6 percent obs/ft.

3. Detector shall also transmit the following faults:



a. Detector. b. Power.

4. Provide four in-line sample pipe inlets that shall contain a flow sensor for each pipe inlet. The detector shall be capable of identifying the pipe from which smoke was detected.

5. Aspirator: Air pump capable of allowing for multiple sampling pipe runs up to 650 feet in total, (four pipe runs per detector) with a transport time of less than 120 seconds from the farthest sample port.

6. Air-Sampling Flow Rates Outside Manufacturer's Specified Range: Result in a trouble alarm.

7. Provide software-programmable relays rated at 2 A at 30-V dc for alarm and fault conditions.

8. Provide built-in event and smoke logging; store smoke levels, alarm conditions, operator actions, and faults with date and time of each event. Each detector (zone) shall be capable of storing up to 18,000 events.

9. Urgent and Minor Faults. Minor faults shall be designated as trouble alarms. Urgent faults, which indicate the unit may not be able to detect smoke, shall be designated as supervisory alarms.

2.5 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. General:

1. Include address-setting means on the module. 2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type. 3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.

B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command. 2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for

field wiring.

C. Control Module:

1. Operate notification devices. 2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before installation begins.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation.


3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."

1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be replaced.

2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust, debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage instructions.

B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections.

1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building. 2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station. 3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control monitoring equipment as necessary to

extend existing control monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.

C. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high

ceiling areas shall be determined according to Annex A or Annex B in NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 36 inches from air-supply diffuser or return-air

opening. 6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting

fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting.

D. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover.

E. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches long shall be supported at both ends.



1. Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke-detector housing during construction. Install detector only during system testing and prior to system turnover.

3.3 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in non-accessible locations may be routed exposed.

1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT.

B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT.

C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled. 1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in NFPA 70.

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

D. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective



components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

1. Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.



AC Transit SAND SET CONCRETE PAVERS Oakland, CA SECTION 32 14 00 -- Page 1 of 5 10/06/17

SECTION 32 14 00

SAND SET CONCRETE PAVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provision of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Perform all work required to complete, as indicated by the Contract Documents, and furnish all supplementary items necessary for the proper installation of Pressed Concrete Pavers.

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 07 14 16 “Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing” for membrane below pavers. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

B. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including preparation instructions, installation methods, storage, handling requirements and recommendations.

2. Submit test results for compliance with performance requirements specified herein. 3. Submit written instructions for recommended maintenance.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Layout drawings of each paved area showing the pattern of pressed pavers and indicate pavers requiring cutting, drainage patterns, drains, and relationship of paving joints. Include details of setting beds, noting all materials and their thickness, show details at curbs and vertical surfaces.

D. Samples:

1. Submit sample to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s available standard and custom colors. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All products covered under this section shall be produced by a single manufacturer, unless otherwise specified, with a minimum of fifteen (15) years proven production of this concrete paver product.



B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall have a minimum of five years proven specialized construction experience with this product and be capable of estimating and building from drawings and details, in addition to proper material handling. All work must comply with local, state/provincial licensing and bonding requirements.

1.6 MOCK-UP INSTALLATION Prior to the start of pressed concrete paver work, construct mock-up of each type of pressed paver size

and pattern area for the owner and architect to review. The mock-up will be at the project site or at a location mutually agreed to by the owner and contractor.

1. Construct the mock-up installation in a minimum 4-foot by 4-foot area of typical concrete units and slabs with all setting beds, joints, and edge details as shown on the drawings.

2. After review of the mock-up, it will be retained and used as a standard of quality for the pressed concrete paver work. At completion of the work, remove the mock-up installation and related materials from the project site. If the mock-up is incorporated into the actual construction, record their location and size on the actual built record drawings for the project.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Pressed concrete pavers to be banded on pallets and delivered in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer identification, manufacturing number and manufacture date.

C. Protect pressed concrete pavers during shipment, storage and construction against damage. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation). Do not install products under adverse environmental conditions.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design product: Tectura Designs, 800-388-8728 Phone: (715) 359-3121 Fax: (715) 359-7456 E-mail: [email protected] Website: www.tecturadesigns.com, or equal products of other manufacturer approved by Architect in accordance with Section 016000.

B. Color and Pattern: UltraFace,

2.2 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150 specification for Portland Cement. B. Aggregates: ASTM C127, ASTM C128, and ASTM C-136. Aggregate shall be blended to meet

individual project requirements.



C. Coloring: Pigments used shall be inorganic and alkali resistant and used per manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Factory Applied Sealer: Colorless slip and stain resistant penetrating or acrylic sealer. 2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Compressive Strength: (ASTM C-140) The average compressive strength shall not be less than 8,000 psi

with no individual unit less than 7,000 psi.

B. Water Absorption: (ASTM C-140) The average shall not be greater than 6 percent. C. Flexural Strength: (ASTM C-293) Shall not be less than 800 psi. D. Center Load: (WTCL 99) Pressed paver units shall have a tested center load capacity of 1,850 lbs. E. Freeze/Thaw: (ASTM C-1262) Durability of the pressed paver shall meet the freeze/thaw tests per

Section 8, shall have no breakage and not greater than 1 percent loss in dry weight of any individual unit when subject to 100 cycles of freeze/thaw.

F. Static Coefficient of Friction: (ASTM C-1028): Wet: > 0.50 and Dry: > 0.60 G. Sizing Dimensions: Shall not differ by more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from width, height, length or

thickness. Unit shall conform to a true plane and not differ by more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in either concave and/or convex warpage.

2.4 INSTALLATION OF SAND SETTING BED 1. Place solid steel, 3/4-inch or 1-inch thick, control bars directly on the sand or geotextile filter fabric.

Install shims under bars for minor adjustment of depth and finish pressed paver elevations and slopes. Space bars approximately 7 feet apart and parallel to each other to serve as guides for strike-off boards. Spacing can very as determined by the size of the area and layout.

3. Place sand setting bed between control bars on the sand or geotextile filter fabric to not less than thickness of the designated control bars. Spread material and strike off by pulling the material with a 8-foot long by 2-inch by 6-inch wood board several times to produce a smooth, firm and even setting bed. Add fresh material in low areas after each pass of the strike-off board. After each panel is complete, remove and advance the first control bar to the next panel position in readiness for placing and striking adjacent panels. Fill in depressions left by the control bar and any shims.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine all jobsite surfaces to receive the parts of the paving materials. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Installation of pressed concrete pavers and associated



construction constitutes acceptance of the adjacent and underlying construction.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Pressed pavers used, pattern, grid layout, starting point and finished elevation shall be shown on plan view shop drawings.

B. Install pressed concrete pavers in patterns, allowing for surface drainage as shown on the drawings.

C. Set pressed concrete pavers on sand setting bed in patterns shown on the drawings with hand tight joints 1/8-inch to 3/16-inch wide joints and uniform top surfaces.

D. Field cut pressed concrete pavers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for methods, equipment and precautions.

E. Maintain accurate alignment and check for creep and shrinkage. Make adjustments to creep and shrinkage within the 30-foot module area.

F. Install edge restraints where required and as shown on the architectural drawings and details.

G. Sweep fine dry polymeric sand of a type and color approved by the architect over pavement surface to fill joints immediately after installing pressed pavers, slabs and curbs on setting bed. Brush in polymeric sand until joints are completely filled, remove surplus sand. Do not allow traffic on installed pressed pavers, slabs or curbing until the joints have been filled.

H. Protect newly laid pressed pavers, slabs and curbs with plywood panels on which workers stand. Advance protective panels as work progresses, but maintain protection in areas subject to continued movement of materials and equipment to avoid creating depressions or disrupting alignment of installed pressed pavers, slabs and curbs.

I. Install the specified joint filler where pressed concrete pavers abut curbs vertical surfaces and other construction.

J. Final cleaning to remove all soiling from pressed pavers for final acceptance.

K. Placement Tolerance:

1. Maximum of 1/16-inch (1.6 mm) height variation between adjacent pressed pavers. 2. Individual pressed pavers shall not vary more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from level across width of the

pressed paver. 3. Paved areas shall not vary more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a distance of 10 feet (3 m) measured at any

location and in any direction. 4. The surface elevation of pressed pavers shall be 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch (3 mm to 6 mm) above adjacent

drainage inlets, concrete collars or channels. 5. Joints between pavers to be uniform width minimum 1/8 inch – maximum 3/16 inch than 1/16 inch.




.A. Remove and replace pressed pavers which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units with same joint treatment to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Wash entire surface with phosphate free neutral cleaner, rinse with clean water and allow to dry

thoroughly. C. Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.

1. Penetrating or topical type sealer designed especially for pressed concrete pavers.
